The UAE deals, signed in Abu Dhabi, focus on technology, aviation, energy, and critical materials—indicating a shift in economic cooperation between Washington and its regional partners, with less emphasis on oil and more focus on high-growth sectors.

Abu Dhabi Launching Largest AI Hub Outside the U.S.

A key project included in the agreements is the construction of a massive artificial intelligence campus in Abu Dhabi. Covering 10 square miles and equipped with 5 gigawatts of data capacity, the facility will be built by Emirati tech firm G42, working in partnership with major American technology companies.

The site will support high-performance computing for AI applications and is expected to serve both regional and international markets, particularly in developing economies across Africa and South Asia.

U.S. officials confirmed that negotiations are underway to allow the UAE to purchase up to 500,000 Nvidia H100 chips annually through 2027. Of that total, around 20% would go directly to G42’s data operations.

Despite some concerns within U.S. security circles about the risk of sensitive technology reaching rival states, the U.S. Department of Commerce said the deal includes tight controls on access and compliance measures to prevent unauthorized use or transfers.

“The UAE has made specific and enforceable commitments to protect advanced technologies,” said U.S. Secretary of Commerce Howard W. Lutnick. “This is a strategic alignment between two innovation-driven economies.”

UAE President Sheikh Mohamed bin Zayed Al Nahyan, speaking alongside President Trump during the announcement, described the partnership as a model for international cooperation in artificial intelligence.

Etihad Orders Widebody Aircraft in €13 Billion Agreement

The visit also led to significant developments in aviation. Etihad Airways signed a €13.1 billion ($14.5 billion) contract with Boeing and GE Aerospace to acquire 28 new widebody aircraft. The purchase includes Boeing 787 Dreamliners and the next-generation 777X, all powered by GE’s latest jet engines.

This comes just one day after Boeing finalized a €89 billion ($96 billion) order with Qatar Airways. These deals are boosting confidence in the U.S. aerospace sector, with Boeing and GE shares rising following the announcements.

Etihad CEO Antonoaldo Neves said the investment will help the airline improve fleet efficiency and expand long-haul operations. The aircraft will be manufactured in Boeing’s U.S.-based facilities, supporting thousands of American jobs in assembly, engineering, and parts manufacturing.

American Energy Firms Join Forces with ADNOC in €54 Billion Venture

In the energy sector, U.S. oil majors ExxonMobil, Occidental Petroleum, and EOG Resources signed a €54 billion ($60 billion) partnership with the Abu Dhabi National Oil Company (ADNOC). The initiative focuses on expanding oil and gas production, modernizing infrastructure, and investing in lower-emission technologies.

The agreement reflects ADNOC’s plan to raise output capacity while reducing the carbon intensity of its operations. Projects under this partnership are expected to include carbon capture and storage, enhanced oil recovery, and the use of digital systems to optimize field performance.

This cooperation comes amid rising demand for energy security worldwide, especially as many countries seek to balance energy supply with climate commitments.

Investment in Critical Materials for Advanced Manufacturing

In addition to AI and energy, the UAE also signed agreements aimed at boosting its capacity in industrial metals. Emirates Global Aluminum (EGA) will expand its aluminium and gallium production through a new collaboration with U.S. companies.

Gallium is a key material used in semiconductors, solar panels, and high-frequency electronics. With China currently dominating global gallium supply, this project is expected to give the U.S. and its partners a more stable and diversified source.

The expansion will contribute to both countries' goals of building secure and resilient supply chains for critical materials used in defense, clean energy, and digital infrastructure.

Economic Cooperation Shifts Toward High-Tech and Strategic Industry

President Trump’s Gulf tour has resulted in large-scale agreements with Saudi Arabia, Qatar, and the UAE—each focusing on future-oriented sectors rather than traditional commodity trade.

From AI infrastructure and aviation to oil modernization and semiconductor materials, these deals reflect a mutual interest in strengthening industrial capacity and promoting long-term investment. They also support Trump’s domestic agenda to bring more high-value manufacturing and technology partnerships back to the United States.

In total, the tour has delivered a series of major deals that serve both American economic priorities and the Gulf states’ drive to diversify their economies.

The agreements signed in Abu Dhabi reflect a practical move by the U.S. and UAE to build stronger economic ties. Both countries are focused on developing new industries such as artificial intelligence and energy, signaling a shift away from oil dependency toward diversified growth.

Also Read: Saudi Arabia Partners with Nvidia to Build Massive AI Infrastructure as Trump Visits Gulf

In a statement Thursday, Coinbase confirmed that a group of overseas customer service agents were bribed by cybercriminals who used the stolen information to launch targeted crypto scams. The compromised data includes names, birth dates, and parts of customers' Social Security numbers — sensitive details that scammers used to impersonate Coinbase employees and trick users into handing over their funds.

“These attackers aren’t breaching our systems through code — they’re exploiting trust,” said CEO Brian Armstrong in a social media post. “They’re using social engineering tactics to fool real people into handing over real money.”

Company Refuses to Pay, Offers Bounty Instead

Rather than give in to the hackers' demands, Armstrong said Coinbase won’t pay the ransom — and is instead offering a $20 million reward to anyone who can help identify and bring the attackers to justice.

“We won’t be extorted,” he said. “If you have information that leads to their arrest, we’ll pay you.”

Coinbase received the ransom demand last Sunday, with attackers threatening to release stolen data unless they were paid in Bitcoin.

How the Breach Happened

Coinbase disclosed in a filing with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) that it had previously discovered “a small number” of its customer support agents accessing data they weren’t authorized to view. Those employees have since been terminated, and the company said it’s reinforcing internal controls.

Though it’s unclear how many users were affected, the company expects to spend between $180 million and $400 million on response efforts, including customer reimbursements and fraud prevention upgrades.

The company has pledged to cover losses for any customers impacted by the scam.

???? URGENT: Coinbase Breach — Internal support agents bribed, personal data leaked for <1% of users, company promises full reimbursement pic.twitter.com/dMlecNAiJf

— Juan Cienfuegos | BitCorner (@TheJuanSC) May 15, 2025

Why This Breach Is a Wake-Up Call

This incident is a stark reminder that even the most secure platforms can be compromised — not just through code, but through people. Coinbase didn’t fall victim to a complex cyberattack; it was betrayed by a few insiders who gave up customer data for money.

What’s especially troubling is that the data stolen wasn’t just usernames or emails — it included partial Social Security numbers and enough personal information to launch convincing scams. For users, that means the risk doesn’t stop at this breach. Phone calls, phishing attempts, and impersonation schemes may follow for months.

It also raises bigger questions about how crypto companies are managing remote teams and overseas support operations. If a handful of employees can leak sensitive data, what other vulnerabilities are going unnoticed?

The fact that Coinbase is refusing to pay the ransom — and instead offering the same amount as a bounty — sends a message to cybercriminals. But whether that approach discourages future attacks or just escalates the conflict remains to be seen.

Also Read: Surge in Cryptocurrency Theft Through Hacking in First Half of 2024

During the company's earnings call on Thursday, CEO Doug McMillon told investors that ongoing tariffs are creating cost pressures the retailer can’t ignore. “We can control what we can control,” he said. “Even at the reduced levels, the higher tariffs will result in higher prices.”

The price increases are expected to roll out later this month, although Walmart says it’s working to absorb as much of the extra cost as possible, especially on everyday items like groceries.

“In some cases, we are holding retail prices where they are despite the tariff cost pressures,” McMillon added. “We’ll do our best on what we can control in order to keep food prices as low as possible.”

Walmart’s update comes just as grocery prices showed a slight dip—falling 0.1% in April compared to the previous month, according to U.S. government data. Still, broader inflation has kept many household expenses high, and shoppers remain sensitive to even small increases.

While the Biden administration has dialed back some tariffs originally imposed under former President Trump, many duties on Chinese imports remain in place. Walmart and other retailers, which source a large portion of their merchandise from China, are still grappling with those lingering costs.

Amid the uncertainty, Walmart has also withdrawn its profit outlook for the upcoming quarter, citing an unpredictable global economic landscape. The company did, however, express confidence that profit growth will continue to outpace sales growth in the near future.

The retailer’s message was clear: even in a slightly more relaxed tariff environment, the effects of trade tensions are far from over — and consumers could see those effects on store shelves in the coming weeks.

Also Read: Walmart Could Lose Billions as Trump’s Tariffs Raise Import Costs

According to Deutsche Bank, the market capitalization of stablecoins has exploded from $20 billion in 2020 to an impressive $246 billion by May 2025. That’s more than a tenfold increase in just five years. What’s behind this surge? It’s a combination of growing trust, widespread use, and a clearer path toward regulation.

Stablecoins stand out because they combine the speed and efficiency of cryptocurrencies with the stability of traditional money. While Bitcoin and other cryptos can see huge price swings daily, stablecoins generally hold a consistent value—often one coin equals one U.S. dollar. This stability is key for everyday transactions, making them appealing to both consumers and businesses who want to avoid crypto’s wild ups and downs.

Tether (USDT) is the biggest player here, with about $150 billion in market value alone. Interestingly, Tether holds nearly $99 billion in U.S. Treasury bills, making it one of the largest holders of U.S. government debt. This shows how stablecoins are bridging traditional finance and the crypto world in a way few expected just a few years ago.

But why are lawmakers paying so much attention now? The rapid rise of stablecoins means they are becoming integral to how people trade, invest, and send money globally. The U.S. House of Representatives and Senate are pushing forward legislation—the STABLE Act and GENIUS Act, respectively—to create a clear set of rules. These bills aim to ensure that stablecoins are fully backed by real assets, are transparent about their reserves, and follow consumer protection laws to avoid risks seen in the crypto industry.

There’s still debate in Washington, though. Some Democrats are wary of the Senate bill, partly due to concerns about former President Trump’s family ties to crypto projects. But the broader goal is to bring stability and trust to a market that’s grown faster than regulation.

Stablecoins aren’t just big numbers on paper. In 2024, they moved an astonishing $28 trillion in transactions—more than the combined volume processed by Visa and Mastercard. For many people, especially in countries where the local currency is unstable or access to banks is limited, stablecoins offer a reliable digital dollar alternative. This has huge potential for financial inclusion, allowing more people to save securely, send money internationally without heavy fees, and take part in the digital economy.

Experts believe that as stablecoins gain mainstream use, demand for U.S. Treasury securities will rise too, because many stablecoins hold government bonds as reserves. This could have ripple effects on global finance, making digital currency an important piece of the economic puzzle.

In short, stablecoins are quietly reshaping how we think about money. Supported by new U.S. regulations, they promise to bring the benefits of blockchain technology—speed, transparency, low costs—to everyday finance, without the volatility that scared many away before.

For anyone watching the future of money, stablecoins aren’t just another crypto fad. They’re becoming the digital backbone of a new financial era.

Also Read: Coinbase Adds Fee-Free Access to PayPal’s PYUSD Stablecoin — Could It Challenge USDC and Tether?

While the statement has sparked fresh speculation about a potential breakthrough in trade talks, there has been no official confirmation from the Indian government. India’s External Affairs Minister, Subrahmanyam Jaishankar, later told reporters that discussions were still underway and cautioned that it was “too early” to make any final judgments until a mutually agreeable deal is reached.

Trade Talks Still Ongoing

Negotiations between the U.S. and India picked up momentum after Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s visit to the White House earlier this year. Both countries agreed to work toward the first phase of a trade agreement by the fall. India’s trade minister is scheduled to travel to Washington from May 17 to 20 for further talks.

India had previously threatened to impose retaliatory tariffs in response to U.S. duties on steel and aluminum. Trump’s new comments suggest that India may be softening its stance in the interest of moving the talks forward.

What’s on the Table?

According to earlier reports, India has already made efforts to ease tensions by cutting tariffs on certain high-profile American goods—like bourbon whiskey and Harley-Davidson motorcycles. New Delhi has also proposed a zero-tariff structure on select goods such as auto components and pharmaceuticals, on a reciprocal basis, up to a specific volume.

Trump’s claim that India is ready to drop tariffs entirely would represent a major shift. But it’s unclear whether this would apply to all U.S. goods or only specific categories. Indian officials have remained tight-lipped on the details.

Analysts Weigh In

Some trade analysts believe Trump’s announcement may be a negotiating tactic to put public pressure on India. Ajay Srivastava, founder of the Global Trade Research Institute in New Delhi, said, “It could mean we’re close to a deal, or it could just be political posturing. Either way, the deal needs to be balanced.”

India has long faced criticism from the U.S. over its trade surplus and relatively high tariffs. Trump, in particular, has pushed for “reciprocal” trade terms and even threatened to impose steep tariffs on Indian goods—though those are currently paused.

Strain Behind the Scenes

While Trump and Modi have often praised each other publicly, Indian officials have expressed discomfort with some of Trump’s past comments—especially claims that he used trade talks to influence peace negotiations between India and Pakistan. Indian authorities have dismissed those assertions.

Adding another wrinkle, Trump also claimed during his remarks that he told Apple CEO Tim Cook not to expand manufacturing in India. According to Trump, he told Cook, “India can take care of themselves, they are doing very well,” and encouraged him to focus on U.S. production instead. Apple has not commented on the exchange.

Market Reaction

Markets appeared largely unaffected by the news. The Indian rupee regained some ground, and the benchmark NSE Nifty 50 index rose by 1.7% by mid-afternoon.

For now, all eyes are on the upcoming trade meetings in Washington. Whether Trump’s comments indicate a major development—or simply more tough talk—remains to be seen. What is clear is that both sides are under pressure to reach a deal that benefits their economies and avoids escalating trade tensions.

Also Read: US–China Tariff Talks Enter Second Day Without Breakthrough as Trump Claims ‘Great Progress’

Mersinger will replace Kristin Smith, who is stepping down this Friday to join the Solana Policy Institute. Until Mersinger officially takes the helm, Sarah Milby, currently the association’s head of policy, will serve as interim CEO.

Mersinger’s departure from the CFTC is scheduled for May 30. Neither the CFTC nor Mersinger’s office has issued public comments on the transition so far.

Appointed to the CFTC in 2022, Mersinger was considered a contender to lead the agency before former President Donald Trump instead selected Brian Quintenz—another figure with strong ties to the crypto industry—as chairman. Mersinger, a Republican, has been seen as generally supportive of the digital asset space and has gained the respect of many within the blockchain industry for her nuanced policy views.

A Critical Time for Crypto Regulation

Her move comes as the cryptocurrency sector intensifies its campaign for clearer rules and stronger representation in Washington. Industry leaders have long complained about a lack of consistent regulation and are now pushing for Congress to pass comprehensive digital asset legislation.

That effort hit a roadblock recently when a stablecoin bill failed to make it through the Senate. Stablecoins—digital currencies pegged to the U.S. dollar—are widely viewed as a foundational piece of the crypto economy, and the setback was a disappointment for many advocates hoping for momentum this year.

Meanwhile, political dynamics around crypto are shifting. On the campaign trail, Trump has positioned himself as a pro-crypto candidate, vowing to support innovation in digital assets. He has already issued executive orders focused on cryptocurrency, including a directive in March to establish a federal stockpile of bitcoin and create a working group to draft digital asset regulations.

Mersinger’s move to the Blockchain Association adds a seasoned regulatory voice to the crypto lobby’s efforts—someone who understands how federal agencies operate from the inside. Her presence may provide the group with additional credibility as it continues to engage with lawmakers and regulators.

Also Read: Eric Adams Invites Crypto Companies to Build in NYC

A Cheaper Way to Commute

The new Route Share feature offers fixed-route, shared rides that operate on a schedule—every 20 minutes during weekday rush hours. Instead of the usual point-to-point UberX experience, riders will be picked up along busy corridors and dropped off at predetermined stops. The tradeoff? A ride that costs roughly 50% less than a typical UberX trip.

The service is first launching in New York City, San Francisco, and Chicago, where Uber says it sees the highest volume of weekday commuters. The company is also in talks with employers to potentially let workers pay for these rides using pre-tax commuter benefits, a move that could make the rides even more affordable.

Price Lock Pass Gets a Wider Rollout

Uber’s Price Lock Pass, which launched earlier this year at $2.99 a month, is now being rolled out in more cities across the U.S. and will expand to Brazil later this year. The pass allows riders to lock in consistent fares on frequently traveled routes—helping avoid price spikes during peak hours or weather disruptions.

The ride pass will now be available in cities like Chicago, Dallas, and San Francisco, and later this year, Uber plans to make it accessible to teen accounts—part of a larger strategy to court younger riders who are just starting to rely on rideshare services.

Robotaxis Still in Focus

Alongside its affordability push, Uber is continuing to build out its autonomous vehicle efforts. The company is partnering with Volkswagen to launch a fleet of fully electric robotaxis based on the ID. Buzz model starting next year. These vehicles will eventually handle shared rides, complementing human drivers in busy cities.

Uber is also ramping up its collaboration with Waymo in Austin, where it plans to increase the number of self-driving vehicles to the hundreds in the coming months. While still in the early stages, Uber sees these moves as key to building a more flexible and scalable transportation network.

Uber is reshaping how it serves everyday riders. By offering cheaper, more structured ride options and fare passes that protect against unpredictable pricing, the company is zeroing in on what many users want right now—reliable transportation that doesn’t break the bank. The timing isn’t accidental: in a slower economic climate, being the more affordable option might be Uber’s smartest bet yet.

Also Read: Uber Introduces ‘Verified’ Rider Badges and Trip Recording to Enhance Driver Safety in the U.S.

Here’s what needs to go right.

1. Ripple Keeps Building Tools That Actually Get Used

Ripple isn’t just letting XRP sit idle. The company behind it is steadily turning the XRP Ledger into a real piece of financial infrastructure. They’re targeting the folks who move serious money: banks and financial institutions that need cross-border transfers to happen faster, cheaper, and more reliably than what old systems like SWIFT offer.

The XRP Ledger already supports stablecoins and real-world assets like U.S. Treasuries. Ripple’s recent purchase of a prime brokerage firm is another smart move—it means they can now offer lending backed by stablecoins and settle parts of those transactions using XRP. For banks, this isn’t just a technical upgrade. It’s faster, more flexible, and more cost-effective.

What Ripple is building isn’t hype. It’s a growing web of services that make XRP more useful, and the more useful it is, the more reason big players have to use it. That kind of demand doesn’t just keep the lights on—it moves the price.

2. Big Institutions and Even Countries Are Tuning In

Banks and financial firms have started testing XRP for real-world payments, looking to ditch slower, more expensive systems. For some, it’s not just a trial run—it's a transition in progress. When these institutions shift real capital into XRP’s network, it boosts demand, plain and simple.

And it’s not just banks. Bhutan has been working with Ripple to explore whether XRP’s tech could be the backbone for a digital currency. The U.A.E. is already using Ripple’s system to process payments with stablecoins.

Every time a country or financial heavyweight signs on, it sends a signal to the rest of the market. It’s not just about headlines—it’s about building legitimacy and a network effect that’s hard to ignore.

3. The Regulatory Climate Is Finally Turning a Corner

For a long time, Ripple was in the crosshairs of U.S. regulators. Lawsuits and unclear rules kept investors on edge and made institutions hesitant to commit. That chapter, thankfully, seems to be closing.

With legal battles behind it and talk of XRP being part of the U.S. National Digital Asset Stockpile, things are changing fast. If exchange-traded funds (ETFs) holding XRP get the green light from the SEC, that could open the floodgates. Institutional investors would need to buy in—and that’s exactly the kind of pressure that can push prices higher.

This shift from legal risk to possible regulatory support is huge. It gives everyone—from fund managers to retail investors—more confidence in XRP’s future.

So, Will XRP Actually Hit $5?
It’s not guaranteed. But if Ripple continues improving its ecosystem, more institutions sign on, and the regulatory tide keeps turning in its favor, that $5 target isn’t outlandish—it’s in play. For those watching from the sidelines, the next couple of years could be telling.

Also Read: Ripple to Acquire Prime Broker Hidden Road in $1.25 Billion Deal

For months, fears of an economic downturn in late 2025 had been rising due to concerns that sweeping tariffs would lead to higher prices and weaker consumer demand. However, the recent decision to pause the bulk of these tariffs appears to have changed the narrative.

The impact of the tariff relief is immediate and measurable. The average effective U.S. tariff rate on Chinese imports has declined from around 24% to 14%, essentially functioning as a $300 billion cost reduction for American consumers and businesses. This unexpected policy shift is now seen as a potential buffer against economic slowdown.

Michael Feroli, Chief U.S. Economist at JPMorgan, who had previously warned of a recession following the tariff hike, has adjusted his position. He now believes the odds of a recession have dropped below 50%, citing the tariff rollback as a crucial factor that could sustain consumer spending and support modest growth.

"Lower tariffs act as a direct tax cut for consumers," Feroli explained. "That additional spending power may be just enough to keep growth afloat in the second half of the year."

Feroli’s updated projections reflect a broader sentiment on Wall Street. Goldman Sachs has decreased its 12-month recession probability to 35% from an earlier estimate of 45%. The firm has also raised its U.S. GDP growth forecast for the year to 1%, up from 0.5%, signaling greater confidence in the resilience of domestic demand.

Yardeni Research echoed this trend, upgrading its 2025 GDP forecast to a range of 1.5% to 2.5%. The research firm previously anticipated much slower growth, ranging from 0.5% to 1.5%. These upward revisions are a direct response to the expectation that softer trade barriers will reduce costs across supply chains, helping to stabilize prices and ease inflationary pressures.

Barclays, which had been among the more bearish voices predicting a recession, has also shifted its stance. The bank withdrew its call for an economic downturn, highlighting that the reduced tariff rates are likely to cause less disruption to consumer behavior, hiring trends, and overall economic activity.

Marc Giannoni, Chief U.S. Economist at Barclays, noted that earlier tariffs had already slowed the flow of goods into the country, with cargo volumes declining. This reduction in imports raised red flags about future inventory shortages, higher prices, and the potential for job cuts as businesses faced declining sales. Now, with tariffs on pause and the possibility of further reductions, those risks appear more manageable.

Despite the more upbeat sentiment, economists warn that challenges remain. The U.S. labor market is showing signs of cooling, and inflation could rise again later in the year, particularly if energy prices spike or supply chain bottlenecks re-emerge. Still, the overall tone among economists is markedly more hopeful.

The shift in economic forecasts has had a visible impact on equity markets. The initial spike in recession fears following the earlier tariff announcement had led many strategists to cut their year-end targets for the S&P 500. But with trade tensions easing, those targets are climbing again.

Ed Yardeni of Yardeni Research raised his S&P 500 year-end projection from 6,000 to 6,500, citing improved economic fundamentals and reduced policy risk. He also pointed to a steep decline in recession odds on betting platforms, where predictions have dropped from 51% to under 40% since the tariff pause was announced.

Goldman Sachs followed suit, boosting its forecast for the index from 5,900 to 6,100. David Kostin, the firm’s Chief U.S. Equity Strategist, attributed the adjustment to a combination of lower tariffs, stronger-than-expected growth, and a reduced threat of recession.

While market sentiment and economic models are shifting toward optimism, analysts remain mindful of the uncertainty that lies ahead. Policy direction, global demand, and inflation trends will all play critical roles in determining the true trajectory of the U.S. economy.

Nonetheless, the temporary tariff suspension has created a window of opportunity. For consumers, it means potential relief at the checkout counter. For businesses, it could ease import costs and support inventory rebuilding. And for Wall Street, it signals a potentially more stable path forward after months of volatility and economic concern.

Also Read: US–China Tariff Talks Enter Second Day Without Breakthrough as Trump Claims ‘Great Progress’

This move is part of Saudi Arabia’s larger effort to shift its economy away from oil and become a key center for advanced technologies by the end of the decade.

Focus on Building AI Centers and Skilled Workforce

Under the new partnership, Nvidia will help Saudi Arabia build AI data centers, often called “AI factories,” which are advanced facilities used to process and store large amounts of data. These centers are important for training AI models and powering new technology tools.

The deal also includes programs to train local talent in AI and software development, helping Saudi developers gain the skills needed to work in the industry. While exact investment numbers were not shared, the agreement is expected to result in large-scale support for Saudi Arabia’s tech ambitions.

Abdullah bin Sharaf Alghamdi, head of the Saudi Data and AI Authority (SDAIA), said the agreement is a strong step in the country's effort to build a technology-driven economy that creates jobs and prepares for the future.

New Government-Led AI Company "Humain" Launched

One day before the Nvidia agreement, Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman launched a new national company called Humain. The company will focus on developing and managing AI systems that support various sectors like education, healthcare, and smart cities.

Humain is expected to work with both local and international organizations to build advanced AI solutions in the Kingdom. It is also expected to play a key role in improving government services and helping Saudi Arabia compete in the global technology market.

Proud of the launch of #HUMAIN, a bold step by #PIF to make Saudi Arabia a global AI leader. It is a strategic move toward Arabic LLMs, secure infrastructure, and a research-driven digital economy. #SaudiVision2030 ???????? pic.twitter.com/xCtbJ3kWQt

— Dr. Saja Alqurashi| د. سجى القرشي (@saja_alqurashi) May 12, 2025

Trump’s Visit Highlights Business Cooperation

President Trump’s current trip to Saudi Arabia has included several business-related meetings, with a clear focus on encouraging partnerships between U.S. companies and Gulf countries. The timing of the Nvidia announcement reflects Saudi Arabia’s goal to attract international support for its digital plans.

Rather than discussing military or political issues, Trump’s visit has been centered around economic development and trade opportunities, especially in sectors like tech, finance, and energy.

A Key Step in Saudi Arabia’s Tech Plans

This AI deal with Nvidia fits into Saudi Arabia’s larger Vision 2030 plan, which includes increasing digital services, building tech-related jobs, and investing in cloud and data technologies.

Saudi Arabia has already announced it wants to become one of the world’s top countries in AI by the next decade. The government plans to invest billions in technology and build partnerships with global tech leaders to support these goals.

By working with Nvidia—a company known for powering AI systems worldwide—Saudi Arabia is taking clear action to support its long-term technology plans and reduce its economic dependence on oil.

Also Read: OpenAI and Microsoft in Talks to Redefine Partnership and Set Stage for Future IPO

Under Armour also posted a non-GAAP loss of -$0.08 per share, matching Wall Street’s expectations. While the overall sales picture was weak, the company showed positive signs with its adjusted EBITDA of $19.92 million, well above the expected loss of $4.15 million. This figure indicates that the company has managed to improve its operational performance despite facing declining sales.

Challenges in Revenue Growth

The company’s 11.4% drop in revenue during Q1 signals persistent difficulties in increasing demand for its products. For a brand that once held a strong market position, these results are a reminder that Under Armour faces tougher competition and changing consumer preferences. The company’s constant currency revenue, which excludes the effect of foreign exchange, also dropped by 10% year-on-year, highlighting the global nature of these challenges.

Under Armour has been working hard to reframe its strategy, focusing on refining its product offerings and distribution channels, but these results reflect the need for further adjustments to boost sales. The company’s revenue decline isn’t entirely unexpected, as the market has shifted toward athleisure and performance-driven apparel, with rival brands like Nike and Adidas continuing to expand their influence.

Declining Margins Reflect Higher Costs

The company’s operating margin decreased significantly, reaching a negative 6.1%, which is a sharp drop from last year’s margin. This decline is indicative of increased operating costs, particularly with marketing and inventory management, which couldn’t be offset by rising sales.

These challenges underscore Under Armour’s struggles to increase its profitability while adjusting to new market conditions. A higher operating loss also reflects the company’s difficulty in improving efficiency while battling costs associated with its restructuring efforts.

Strategic Adjustments and CEO Comments

Under Armour's strategic shift continues as the company aims to better position itself for future growth. Kevin Plank, the company’s President and CEO, expressed optimism about their ongoing transformation: “We’re making the necessary changes to drive long-term growth. By focusing on elevating our products, refining our distribution model, and maintaining a disciplined approach to cost management, we’re positioning Under Armour for a more profitable future.”

The company has prioritized direct-to-consumer sales as a key focus, adapting to the rise of online shopping and consumer preferences for a more digital-first experience. These efforts include investments in improving its e-commerce platforms and enhancing its brand appeal through digital marketing.

Despite facing short-term setbacks, Under Armour believes that these changes will eventually restore growth. The ongoing strategic reset focuses on improving efficiency and expanding the company’s product line, which includes innovations in athletic footwear, performance gear, and more.

Guidance for the Coming Quarter

For Q2 2025, Under Armour provided guidance of $1.13 billion in revenue, which is below the $1.17 billion forecasted by analysts. This suggests that sales will likely continue to decline for the next quarter, with the company expecting a 4.5% drop in year-on-year sales.

However, the company’s adjusted EPS guidance of $0.02 for the next quarter surpassed Wall Street’s projections of a break-even result, offering a more optimistic outlook for profitability. Even though revenue may decline, the company’s focus on cost reduction and profitability could lead to stronger earnings in the near future.

Stock Market Reaction and Analyst Expectations

Despite a challenging quarter, Under Armour's stock rose by 2.3% to $6.36 following the announcement of its earnings. Investors appear to be responding favorably to the company’s ability to beat earnings expectations and its positive EPS guidance for the next quarter.

However, the overall trend for Under Armour's stock has been downward in recent years. The company’s revenue has consistently struggled, and its operating margins have remained under pressure. Despite efforts to improve its business, many analysts believe that Under Armour’s recovery may take time, as changing consumer habits and increasing competition continue to pose challenges.

Is Under Armour a Strong Investment?

The question for many investors is whether now is the right time to invest in Under Armour. While the company has shown progress in areas like adjusted earnings, EBITDA, and its shift to direct-to-consumer sales, its ongoing revenue decline and increasing operating costs mean that long-term growth is still uncertain.

Despite positive earnings guidance for the next quarter, Under Armour’s stock performance in the past few years has been weak, and there are still concerns over the company’s ability to regain its footing in the highly competitive athletic wear market. For investors looking for growth, the decision to invest in Under Armour will depend on whether they believe the company can successfully execute its turnaround plan in the coming quarters.

Also Read: Tesla Sees Big Sales Jump in March, But First Quarter Drop Raises Concerns

The inclusion marks a historic moment for the crypto industry, signaling that digital asset platforms are moving from the fringes of finance into the mainstream.

Coinbase will replace Discover Financial Services, which is being acquired by Capital One. The change takes effect before market open on May 19.

S&P 500 Listing Could Drive Further Investment

Joining the S&P 500 could significantly increase demand for Coinbase shares. Many index funds and institutional investors that track the S&P 500 are required to hold all its listed components. This means billions of dollars may flow into Coinbase as part of automatic portfolio adjustments.

If the current momentum continues, the stock could add more than $5 billion to its market value — pushing it to its highest price in over two months.

Growing Institutional Interest Fuels Market Confidence

Coinbase's rise comes at a time when institutional interest in cryptocurrencies is picking up, partly fueled by expectations of lighter regulation under current political leadership. The inclusion in the S&P 500 only further legitimizes digital assets in the eyes of traditional investors.

Though Coinbase reported a dip in first-quarter profit last week, analysts remain optimistic, pointing to a broader crypto market recovery as a potential growth driver.

Global Expansion and Strategic Acquisitions Boost Outlook

Coinbase has also been expanding beyond the U.S., targeting international markets and diversifying its revenue streams. Most recently, the company announced a $2.9 billion acquisition of Deribit, a leading crypto derivatives exchange, as it moves aggressively into the crypto options market — a fast-growing segment of the industry.

This acquisition is part of a broader strategy to attract institutional investors and secure long-term growth by becoming a full-service digital asset platform.

Despite Yearly Losses, Momentum Is Building

Although Coinbase shares are still down about 17% year-to-date in 2025, the latest developments could turn investor sentiment more positive. Its S&P 500 inclusion, alongside global expansion and strong brand recognition, positions Coinbase as a central player in the evolving financial technology landscape.

Key Takeaways:

• Coinbase will join the S&P 500 on May 19, replacing Discover Financial.

• Stock jumped nearly 10% in response, signaling strong investor enthusiasm.

• Institutional demand is expected to rise as index-tracking funds add COIN to portfolios.

• The move represents mainstream validation of crypto companies.

• Strategic acquisitions and global growth could support long-term performance.

Also Read: Wall Street Cheers US-China Tariff Truce as Big Tech Stocks Surge

Speaking at a press conference at Gracie Mansion on Monday, Adams called on both returning and expanding crypto businesses to plant roots in New York, stating, “This is the Empire State. We should be building empires — especially in the crypto space.”

The mayor’s remarks come as he ramps up his reelection campaign and doubles down on his earlier commitment to establish New York City as a global hub for blockchain-based finance and technology.

NYC’s First-Ever Crypto Summit Set for Next Week

In a concrete step toward that vision, Adams announced the city’s inaugural Crypto Summit, set to take place next week. The event will bring together municipal leaders, regulators, and crypto industry executives to discuss how digital assets can be integrated into city governance and economic development.

The summit comes on the heels of the White House Digital Asset Summit held in March and is expected to focus on:

• Policy collaboration between local government and crypto companies

• The use of blockchain to streamline government services

• Inclusion of underbanked communities in the digital financial system

• Job creation and economic growth through crypto innovation

Adams described the summit as a platform for serious dialogue — not hype — emphasizing his administration’s focus on “long-term value, not chasing memes or trends.”

Adams Softens Tone on BitLicense

The state’s crypto regulations remain one of the biggest hurdles for companies looking to enter the New York market. The BitLicense, issued by the New York Department of Financial Services (NYDFS), has long been criticized as one of the most restrictive licensing frameworks in the country.

Adams previously advocated for scrapping the BitLicense altogether, arguing it discourages innovation. However, on Monday, he struck a more balanced tone, stating that safety and oversight are necessary — but must not come at the cost of growth.

“It’s good to know the city will have safe regulations for investors,” Adams said. “But we must avoid overregulating to the point that we drive innovation away.”

The mayor’s updated stance suggests a willingness to work with state regulators rather than opposing them outright, signaling a more collaborative approach moving forward.

Legal Troubles Resolved, Adams Refocuses on Tech-Driven Growth

Earlier this year, corruption charges brought against Adams by federal prosecutors were dismissed with prejudice, clearing him of any wrongdoing and barring the case from being reopened. The case’s resolution, which followed resignations by several career prosecutors, has allowed Adams to refocus his political energy on economic development.

With the legal cloud lifted, the mayor is now putting renewed emphasis on tech, fintech, and crypto as key pillars of the city’s post-pandemic recovery.

Crypto as a Tool for Economic Inclusion in NYC

While major crypto firms may grab headlines, Adams highlighted a broader goal: using blockchain and digital asset tools to help communities that have been excluded from traditional financial systems.

“We’re creating an ecosystem that brings in talent and investment,” Adams said, “but also serves neighborhoods like the Bronx and Harlem — areas that deserve access to financial growth.”

The administration plans to work with crypto platforms and fintech startups to develop solutions that offer better banking access, faster payment systems, and financial education programs for underserved populations.

Policy, Adoption, and Public Trust

Adams’ push to position New York City as a digital asset capital comes at a time when crypto regulation is under intense national and global scrutiny. With rising interest from traditional finance, ongoing legal debates about crypto classifications, and a volatile market, the next phase of crypto growth will require strong public-private cooperation.

The success of the upcoming Crypto Summit may set the tone for that collaboration. If New York can strike the right balance between regulation and innovation, the city could offer a blueprint for integrating blockchain into modern urban governance.

As Adams put it: “We’re not just opening the door to crypto companies. We’re building a city where they — and our residents — can thrive.”

Also Read: NYC Mayor Eric Adams Might Face More Charges in Corruption Case

From Obscure Fund to Power Player

Founded with the goal of creating a “parallel economy” aligned with conservative values, 1789 Capital originally managed less than $200 million. But Trump Jr.’s involvement has supercharged its profile. The fund now boasts strategic investments in coveted private companies including:

• SpaceX – Elon Musk’s space company, now the top U.S. military launch provider.

• xAI – Musk’s artificial intelligence startup competing with OpenAI and Anthropic.

• Anduril – A defense tech firm recently awarded over $22 billion in U.S. contracts.

• Firehawk Aerospace – A military-grade 3D-printed rocket fuel company.

• Aeon Industrial and Axiom Space – Key players in defense and space innovation.

Access to Exclusive Investment Deals

Typically, private investments in companies like SpaceX or Anduril are reserved for ultra-wealthy insiders or institutional investors. But thanks to political connections, 1789 has secured a seat at the table. These opportunities are highly sought after, especially as Musk continues to win U.S. government contracts, including a $5.9 billion Space Force deal.

Investing in these companies isn’t just lucrative—it positions Trump Jr. as a gatekeeper to some of the most sensitive and strategically important businesses in America.

Selling Access? The Georgetown “Executive Branch” Club

Trump Jr. isn’t just investing; he’s also cultivating elite networks. Reports reveal that he and his partners launched a $500,000-per-member private club in Washington, D.C., called The Executive Branch. Located in Georgetown, this invite-only club offers high-level access to tech CEOs, business elites, and government insiders. Critics argue it’s essentially a private lobbying channel disguised as a social space.

Conflicts of Interest and Political Influence

1789’s investment success has drawn scrutiny from ethics experts, legal watchdogs, and former government officials. While no laws appear to have been broken, the close proximity of Trump Jr. to firms receiving federal funds has raised deep concerns about transparency and fairness.

“This is a flashing red light,” said Scott Amey, general counsel at the Project on Government Oversight. “If the president’s son is profiting from companies that benefit from federal contracts, it’s hard to believe this doesn’t influence decisions inside government agencies.”

Moreover, many of these deals are being made as the Trump administration aggressively cuts funding for other federal programs, raising eyebrows about the prioritization of defense spending and how those funds may indirectly benefit individuals close to the president.

Political Strategy: Building a “Parallel Economy”

Trump Jr. and his partners have branded 1789 Capital as a fund for “anti-woke” or “MAGA-aligned” ventures. This includes investments in politically conservative media like Tucker Carlson’s new outlet, and in startups that fit into the ideological narrative of American independence, national security, and deregulation.

This strategy resonates with many on the political right, especially as conservative entrepreneurs seek alternatives to Silicon Valley’s more progressive ecosystem.

Echoes of the Hunter Biden Debate

The controversy surrounding 1789 echoes previous Republican criticism of Hunter Biden, who was accused of profiting from his father’s political ties during Joe Biden’s presidency. Trump Jr. himself called out Hunter Biden during the 2020 campaign, accusing him of nepotism. Now, many point out the irony of the president’s own son engaging in similar financial pursuits under the guise of patriotism and entrepreneurship.

“If Hunter Biden had done half of what Trump Jr. is doing, Republicans would be calling for his head,” said a former Trump insider speaking anonymously. “It’s pure hypocrisy.”

Massive Fundraising Goals and Future Influence

1789 Capital isn’t slowing down. The firm has already raised about $500 million, and it aims to close a $1 billion fundby mid-2025, with another $3–5 billion fund in the pipeline for next year.

If these goals are met, 1789 would become a top-tier venture fund, with the ability to steer capital toward companies shaping America’s defense, tech, and even space policy—while potentially enriching its politically connected partners.

Donald Trump Jr.’s entry into venture capital is more than a business move—it’s a test of how deeply politics and private profit can intertwine in today’s America. As 1789 Capital continues to gain traction, the questions about ethical boundaries, access, and influence are only getting louder.

The rise of 1789 could become a defining story of this presidency—not for policy or public service, but for the unprecedented fusion of political power and financial opportunity.

Also Read: Eric Trump-Backed American Bitcoin to Go Public via Nasdaq Merger with Gryphon Digital

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has sent Tesla a formal request for more information, focusing specifically on how its Full Self-Driving (FSD) technology will perform in situations with reduced roadway visibility — such as heavy rain, fog, or nighttime conditions. The letter, made public on Monday, comes as Tesla prepares for a June launch of the service.

The inquiry is tied to an ongoing NHTSA investigation into multiple collisions involving Tesla vehicles that were reportedly operating in FSD mode during poor visibility. The agency wants to evaluate whether Tesla's autonomous system can reliably detect and respond to hazards when road conditions are less than ideal.

“NHTSA is seeking clarity on Tesla’s robotaxi development to assess the system’s capacity to appropriately respond to reduced visibility on the road,” the agency said in the statement.

Tesla has not yet responded publicly to the request.

CEO Elon Musk has repeatedly touted Tesla’s FSD technology as a cornerstone of its future, with robotaxis positioned as a major revenue stream. However, critics argue that the system — despite its name — still requires human supervision and has faced scrutiny for inconsistent performance under complex driving scenarios.

The pressure from regulators comes at a critical time, as Tesla faces increased competition in the autonomous vehicle space and intensifying calls for tighter federal oversight of self-driving technologies.

The NHTSA has not indicated whether the Austin deployment will be delayed, but the agency’s request could add pressure on Tesla to demonstrate its technology’s safety in real-world conditions before any public rollout.

With June fast approaching, how Tesla responds could influence not only its robotaxi timeline but also broader public and regulatory confidence in self-driving cars.

Also Read: Volvo Recalls 413,000+ Cars in the U.S. Over Rearview Camera Failure — See If Your Model Is Affected

On Monday, American Bitcoin confirmed it will go public through an all-stock merger with Gryphon Digital Mining, a Nasdaq-listed company. The deal gives the newly formed entity a clear path to the public markets while keeping 98% ownership in the hands of current American Bitcoin shareholders — including co-founder Eric Trump, his brother Donald Trump Jr., and crypto mining firm Hut 8.

The merger is expected to be finalized in the third quarter of 2025, positioning American Bitcoin as one of the highest-profile crypto listings in recent memory.

Gryphon Digital’s shares surged over 200% to $2.19 following the announcement, while Hut 8 climbed more than 11% to $15.45, reflecting strong investor enthusiasm for the Trump-backed venture.

Eric Trump, who will remain in a leadership role as chief strategy officer, said in a statement,

“Our vision for American Bitcoin is to create the most investable Bitcoin accumulation platform in the market.”

This move marks the Trump family's most significant step into crypto to date, following earlier ventures including a meme coin and their stake in World Liberty Financial, another crypto-linked company.

Former President Donald Trump has publicly stated his intention to make the United States a global leader in cryptocurrency innovation, promising friendlier regulations for the industry if re-elected. However, critics have raised concerns about ethics, transparency, and potential conflicts of interest surrounding the family’s growing crypto portfolio.

American Bitcoin’s model centers on accumulating Bitcoin as a core treasury asset, similar to strategies used by companies like Strategy Inc. and Upexi, which allow investors to gain crypto exposure through traditional equities.

"Buying a stock is a much more approachable way for people to invest in crypto assets without using wallets or exchanges,” said Allan Marshall, CEO of e-commerce firm Upexi, which recently made headlines for adding Solana to its balance sheet.

As institutional and retail interest in crypto-linked stocks grows, American Bitcoin aims to position itself as a key player in this trend, combining Bitcoin mining, asset accumulation, and political capital under one public brand.

Also Read: Trump Family Set to Make Millions From Abu Dhabi’s $2 Billion Crypto Deal with Binance

After months of economic uncertainty, the two global powers reached a 90-day agreement to scale back trade penalties that have weighed on markets for years. Under the deal, the U.S. will lower tariffs on certain Chinese goods from 125% to 10%, while China has agreed to mirror those reductions on American imports. One tariff, a 20% levy tied to the U.S.'s accusation that China contributes to the fentanyl crisis, remains in place.

Still, the broader easing has triggered a swift and optimistic reaction from Wall Street. Shares of the Roundhill Magnificent Seven ETF (MAGS)—which represents leading tech companies like Apple, Microsoft, Alphabet, Amazon, Meta, Nvidia, and Tesla—surged 6% in premarket trading following the announcement. That spike adds to a strong rebound over the last month, during which the fund has climbed 18% from its April 8 low.

This isn’t just a reaction to headlines. The Magnificent Seven are riding high on solid fundamentals. First-quarter earnings from Microsoft, Alphabet, and other tech giants not only exceeded expectations, they sent a clear message: demand for AI, cloud computing, and digital infrastructure remains strong. According to Barclays, these companies beat earnings estimates by an average of 8%—a performance that stood out even in a volatile market environment.

Meanwhile, data from Goldman Sachs shows just how far ahead the Magnificent Seven are compared to the rest of the market. These seven companies posted an average earnings growth of 28% last quarter, while the other 493 companies in the S&P 500 managed just 9%. That disparity underscores why investors are once again leaning into tech as a safe bet for future returns.

“Momentum is returning to tech, not just because of the trade truce, but because the fundamentals are backing it up,” said a senior equity strategist at a New York investment firm. “These companies are continuing to deliver, and with tariffs cooling off, there's one less thing for investors to worry about.”

The timing is critical. With election-year uncertainty, geopolitical risks, and concerns about global growth still looming, markets are hungry for stability. A de-escalation in trade friction between the world’s two largest economies provides exactly that—and tech stocks are the immediate beneficiaries.

That said, not all experts are ready to call it a green light for tech-heavy portfolios. Some analysts warn that a short-term rally could be followed by renewed volatility if trade talks stall or inflation pressures return. Others suggest investors consider spreading risk across sectors rather than going all-in on the biggest names.

Still, there's little doubt that the Magnificent Seven have reasserted their dominance, both in performance and in investor sentiment. With the AI race heating up and capital spending on innovation rising, the spotlight is firmly back on the giants of Silicon Valley.

As global markets process the implications of this tariff pause, all eyes are now on whether the truce will lead to a longer-term trade resolution—or if it’s simply a temporary break in an ongoing economic tug-of-war.

Also Read:  US–China Tariff Talks Enter Second Day Without Breakthrough as Trump Claims ‘Great Progress’

House Bill 594, recently passed by the state legislature, now awaits the signature of Governor Mike Kehoe. If approved, this bill would completely remove taxes on capital gains from digital assets, such as Bitcoin and XRP, as well as from traditional investments like stocks and real estate. This policy change would position Missouri as one of the most attractive destinations for investors seeking tax relief across a variety of sectors.

Under current law, Missouri taxes capital gains as ordinary income. This means that profits from the sale of assets, such as stocks or real estate, are taxed based on an individual’s income bracket, ranging from 0% to 4.7%. For higher-income investors, the tax burden can be substantial. For example, a person who made $350,000 in capital gains could be faced with a state tax liability of over $16,000. House Bill 594, however, would eliminate this tax entirely, making Missouri a compelling choice for investors looking to maximize their returns.

Currently, the cryptocurrency market is seeing significant activity, with Bitcoin trading above $104,000 and XRP valued at $2.38. As digital assets continue to grow, Missouri’s decision to remove the capital gains tax on profits from these and other assets could provide a major incentive for crypto investors to relocate or expand their operations within the state. Crypto holders, often facing hefty tax obligations when selling their digital assets, would benefit from a much more favorable tax environment in Missouri.

The Timing of Missouri's Proposal

Missouri's decision to introduce this bill comes at a time when tax reform discussions are heating up across the country. Just weeks before Missouri’s tax proposal, President Trump suggested a drastic shift in federal tax policy, which could potentially reduce income tax in favor of higher import tariffs. Although federal reform remains uncertain, Missouri’s proactive stance could give it an advantage in attracting both domestic and international investors, particularly in emerging sectors like blockchain and cryptocurrency.

At a time when several states are debating how to treat digital assets for tax purposes, Missouri’s approach stands out as one of the most comprehensive. By eliminating capital gains taxes, the state would not only attract crypto investors but also appeal to individuals involved in the stock market, real estate, and other asset classes. This move could set a new precedent for states looking to create tax-friendly environments for a range of industries.

Enhancing Missouri’s Competitiveness for Investors

Missouri’s potential tax overhaul marks a stark contrast to the current trend in many states, where capital gains taxes are often high and disincentivize long-term investment. By removing taxes on capital gains, Missouri would encourage investors to put more money into stocks, real estate, and digital assets, knowing their profits will not be taxed at the state level. This could spark new investments in both traditional and emerging industries.

Real estate investors, who often face significant capital gains taxes when selling properties, would also stand to gain from the bill. With no tax burden on their profits, Missouri could see more investment in real estate development, potentially driving economic growth, creating jobs, and revitalizing local markets. This change would also attract more entrepreneurs and startups, particularly those in the tech and cryptocurrency sectors, who are looking for ways to minimize their tax obligations and reinvest in their businesses.

Economic Implications of the Tax Elimination

If Missouri’s tax elimination is enacted, it could have far-reaching implications for its economy. The state could experience a rise in the number of investors, businesses, and tech companies that are drawn to its tax-free investment environment. This could spur innovation, attract talent, and create new business opportunities, particularly in tech-driven sectors like blockchain, AI, and digital finance.

Moreover, the state could benefit from increased economic activity in both the financial and real estate sectors. With more investors coming to Missouri to take advantage of the tax benefits, there could be a direct impact on local economies, as increased investments typically lead to job creation and increased demand for goods and services. Over time, Missouri could establish itself as a central hub for investment and innovation, especially in the areas of digital assets and technology.

Governor Kehoe’s Decision on the Bill

The future of House Bill 594 now lies in the hands of Governor Mike Kehoe. While he has not publicly expressed a stance on the bill, the decision he makes could set a precedent for tax policy across the country. If signed into law, Missouri would become the first state to eliminate capital gains tax on digital assets, stocks, and other investments, creating a unique and highly favorable environment for investors of all types.

The bill has already sparked interest among cryptocurrency advocates, stock traders, and real estate developers, all of whom stand to benefit from the removal of capital gains taxes. If Governor Kehoe moves forward with the bill, Missouri could see an influx of new investors and businesses, positioning the state as a leader in tax reform and economic growth.

Also Read: A Reddit User Predicted Bitcoin Would Hit $100K — But Missed the Chance to Profit. Here's What Happened.

The two-day meeting is the first time negotiators have met in person since tariff levels surged in recent weeks. While the White House has kept details under wraps, Trump hinted that a “total reset” in trade relations was possible, though he offered no explanation on what that might involve. His comments were made as delegations gathered at the residence of the Swiss ambassador to the United Nations in Geneva, where the discussions were hosted.

Chinese officials, meanwhile, have remained silent, but state-run media offered a clear message. Xinhua, the government’s official news agency, stated that China “will firmly reject any proposal that compromises core principles or undermines the cause of global fairness.” The language signals Beijing’s unwillingness to make concessions that would weaken its negotiating position.

Face-to-Face Talks Held in Tense Atmosphere

U.S. officials confirmed that talks resumed early Sunday morning, but like Saturday’s session, the meeting ended without any public statement from either side. The silence reflects how sensitive the negotiations have become—especially as tariffs remain at punishing levels. Last month, Trump raised total duties on Chinese goods to 145%, and China retaliated with tariffs up to 125% on U.S. products. These actions have left billions of dollars in trade stalled and supply chains disrupted.

At several ports, cargo remains unloaded as businesses wait for clear guidance on whether tariffs will be reduced or enforced long-term. The lack of resolution has added to the pressure on both governments to find a workable outcome.

Trump Signals Openness to Changes, But No Clear Path Forward

In a post last week on Truth Social, Trump hinted at flexibility by suggesting, “80% tariff seems right! Up to Scott!”—a reference to Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, who is leading the U.S. negotiating team. While the remark was vague, it suggested Trump is willing to adjust tariff rates based on the direction of the talks.

This negotiating round comes as the White House intensifies its focus on China’s role in fentanyl trafficking. A 20% portion of the tariffs was specifically aimed at pressuring Beijing to step up enforcement against the production and export of synthetic opioids.

The remaining 125% tariffs relate to long-standing trade disagreements dating back to Trump’s first term. Some goods now face combined duties exceeding 145%, effectively shutting them out of each other’s markets.

Beijing Stresses Firm Position as Talks Continue

China’s media statements during the talks sent a clear signal that Beijing is not looking for a quick deal. Xinhua’s editorial accused Washington of using the negotiation process as leverage and insisted that China would not accept “coercion or extortion” disguised as diplomacy.

Outside the Swiss ambassador’s residence, multiple black diplomatic vehicles were seen coming and going, but neither side stopped to speak with reporters. Observers said the quiet nature of the event underscored the high stakes and the reluctance of both sides to make public moves that could limit their flexibility in the talks.

Global Markets Watching for Any Sign of Movement

Though a major agreement remains unlikely, any step toward lowering tariffs—even a symbolic gesture—would be welcomed by investors and manufacturers affected by rising costs and uncertainty. U.S.–China trade topped $660 billion last year, and the sharp increase in tariffs has already triggered supply chain disruptions and price increases.

Jake Werner, a policy expert on East Asia, said the fact that both sides came to the table in Geneva was meaningful on its own. “The ability to sit down and talk after so many months of rising tension is a necessary step—even if the outcome remains unclear for now,” he said.

The talks concluded Sunday with no press conference or formal announcement. While Trump’s comments suggest a willingness to keep the door open, it remains to be seen whether both governments can agree on practical steps that move them closer to resolving one of the most serious economic confrontations in recent history.

Also Read: Top U.S. and Chinese Officials Meet in Geneva to Ease Rising Tariff Tensions

At the heart of the talks is OpenAI’s need for more financial flexibility. As the company behind ChatGPT and other cutting-edge AI tools, OpenAI has become a key player in the fast-growing AI industry. However, its current investment structure—heavily tied to Microsoft—could make it difficult to attract new investors or prepare for a future initial public offering (IPO).

Microsoft, which has invested over $13 billion in OpenAI, benefits from exclusive early access to OpenAI’s most powerful models. This integration supports major Microsoft products like Azure cloud services and Microsoft 365. The company wants to make sure that this access isn’t lost, even if OpenAI changes its ownership structure by going public.

The discussions are focused on reshaping the terms of the partnership so OpenAI can operate more like a traditional business. That would give it the ability to grow independently, raise capital from a wider pool of investors, and eventually list on the stock market—all while preserving Microsoft’s lead in incorporating OpenAI’s technology into its products.

This move comes at a time when AI competition is heating up globally, and both companies are under pressure to innovate quickly. OpenAI wants to stay flexible and financially strong as it develops next-generation AI, and Microsoft wants to remain at the forefront of AI-powered software and cloud services.

While the new agreement hasn’t been finalized yet, people familiar with the matter say both sides are motivated to find a solution that works long-term. If successful, the deal could pave the way for OpenAI’s future as a publicly traded AI powerhouse, while keeping Microsoft deeply embedded in the evolution of artificial intelligence.

Also Read: OpenAI Hits $300B Valuation After $40B Funding Round with SoftBank

Friday’s surge was fueled by renewed optimism around U.S.-China trade talks after President Trump suggested the U.S. may scale back tariffs on Chinese goods. Market confidence was already on the rise following a trade agreement with the UK earlier in the week — signaling a potential easing of global tensions that have rattled investors for months.

For Tesla, the timing of this trade optimism pairs well with a notable shift at the top. CEO Elon Musk, who has spent significant time focused on political matters during his role in the Trump administration, recently indicated plans to re-center his attention on Tesla’s operations. That move is seen as a positive by many investors who associate Musk’s day-to-day involvement with long-term innovation and stock growth.

Strong U.S. Momentum Offsets Slumping European Sales

Despite the bullish tone on Wall Street, Tesla’s fundamentals are sending mixed signals. In Europe, Tesla continues to struggle. Latest data from the UK shows Tesla registered only 512 new vehicles in April — down 62% year-over-year. Germany, home to Tesla’s Berlin Gigafactory, saw registrations fall 46% to 885 vehicles. Similar drops were recorded in France (-59%), Denmark (-67%), and Sweden (-81%), suggesting weakening demand across multiple key markets.

This follows a tough first quarter, where Tesla’s global deliveries fell short of analyst expectations. Even in the U.S., the company is pulling multiple levers to reignite interest — including launching a lower-cost, rear-wheel-drive version of the refreshed Model Y SUV. Starting at $46,630 before tax credits, the new variant comes with attractive financing, signaling Tesla’s push to recover sales momentum in Q2.

Model Y Inventory Build-Up Raises Concerns

While Tesla’s pivot to a more affordable Model Y may help in the short term, signs of soft demand remain. Reports suggest that "Launch Edition" units of the $59,900 Model Y are building up at showrooms — raising questions about buyer appetite in the current EV market.

Still, Tesla’s stock is riding a wave of sentiment, driven more by big-picture bets than immediate performance. Wall Street is closely watching Musk’s return to a hands-on role, upcoming developments in Tesla’s long-awaited robotaxi program, and broader shifts in U.S. trade policy.

Tesla Loses Battle Over ‘Robotaxi’ Trademark

In a lighter but symbolic turn of events, Tesla this week lost its bid to claim exclusive rights to the term "robotaxi" following a U.S. Patent and Trademark Office ruling. While it won’t impact operations, the decision underscores the competitive landscape Tesla faces as more automakers and tech firms race into autonomous vehicle development.

Strong Stock, Weak Sales: Can Tesla’s Rally Hold Without Europe?

Tesla’s stock surge this month is less about its core business performance and more about market optimism tied to Trump’s shifting China tariff stance and Elon Musk's renewed focus on the company. But the sales drop across Europe — especially in key EV markets like Germany, France, and Sweden — is a clear warning sign. If Tesla doesn’t turn around international demand soon, the current rally could lose steam quickly. Investors betting on the stock’s momentum should keep a close eye on upcoming second-quarter sales data and how well Tesla’s new pricing and financing strategies perform in the US market.

Also Read: Elon Musk Reduces DOGE Role to Refocus on Tesla; Stock Soars 7%​

On April 18 of that year, he made a bold prediction in a now-archived Reddit thread.
“Bitcoin will be valued at $100,000 a coin by 2025,” he wrote.

MMW: Bitcoin will be valued at $100,000 a coin by 2025
byu/oldie101 inMarkMyWords

At the time, not many took him seriously. Someone even replied with a sarcastic “Keep dreaming.” And for years, that post was buried and forgotten — until Bitcoin did exactly what he said it would.

On May 8, 2025, Bitcoin officially crossed the $100,000 mark. Suddenly, people started digging through old posts and stumbled on oldie101's prediction. It went viral. People were amazed. Some thought he must be a millionaire now.

But when the original poster showed up again in the comments, he had a surprising confession:
“Unfortunately, I didn’t HODL.”

In crypto slang, “HODL” means to hold on to your coins no matter what — through the ups and downs. oldie101explained that over the years, he bought and sold Bitcoin many times but never held on long enough to ride the wave to $100K.

Still, he didn’t sound bitter.
“Been saying that for the past 11 years. But life’s pretty good without the bitcoin, so can’t complain,” he wrote.

Bitcoin’s journey to $100K didn’t happen overnight. It first hit that mark in December 2024, just weeks after Donald Trump won the U.S. presidential election. Then, on January 20, 2025 — the day Trump was inaugurated — Bitcoin reached an all-time high of $108,786.

As of now, Bitcoin is hovering around $103,313, according to data from crypto exchange Kraken.

For oldie101, the prediction was right — but the timing didn’t quite line up with personal gain. Even so, his story is now part of crypto history. A rare example of someone who got it right, even if they didn’t cash in.

Also Read: Bitcoin to $1 Million by 2029? Why U.S. Crypto Analysts Say It’s Closer Than You Think

Last month, the U.S. government raised tariffs on Chinese imports to a combined 145%. China responded with a 125% tariff on American goods. These levels have made trading between the two countries nearly unsustainable, disrupting the $660 billion trade relationship they maintained just a year ago.

President Donald Trump hinted in a recent Truth Social post that he’s open to adjusting tariffs, writing, “80% Tariff seems right! Up to Scott.” His comment leaves room for negotiation, though the direction remains unclear.

Deeper Disagreements on Technology and Trade Practices

The conflict goes far beyond taxes. At the heart of the dispute are longstanding U.S. complaints about China’s trade policies. These include forced technology transfers, state subsidies for Chinese tech firms, and lack of intellectual property protections.

During Trump’s first term, the U.S. imposed earlier rounds of tariffs to push back against practices seen as unfair in emerging fields like artificial intelligence, autonomous vehicles, and quantum computing.

A limited agreement, known as the Phase One deal, was signed in early 2020. China pledged to purchase more American goods, and the U.S. paused additional tariffs. But many core disagreements were left unresolved. COVID-19’s global disruption made it even harder for China to meet its purchase commitments.

National Security and Drug Policy Play a Role

One of the recent tariff hikes specifically targets Chinese inaction on the synthetic opioid fentanyl, which has been a major contributor to the U.S. overdose crisis. Trump’s administration added a 20% charge in response, on top of the other tariffs related to technology and trade disputes.

The administration also continues to express concern over the U.S. trade deficit with China, which reached $263 billion last year.

U.S.-Swiss Trade Faces New Tensions

While in Geneva, U.S. officials are also meeting with Swiss President Karin Keller-Sutter. Trade between Switzerland and the U.S. has quadrupled over the past two decades, but tensions are rising.

Trump had announced a steep 31% tariff on Swiss imports but reduced it to 10% for the time being. Swiss officials are cautious but have not introduced retaliatory tariffs. They’ve warned, however, that higher U.S. duties could hurt Swiss industries such as watchmaking, specialty foods, and precision manufacturing.

Since last year, Switzerland removed all industrial tariffs, allowing nearly all U.S. goods to enter duty-free. The U.S. remains Switzerland’s second-largest trade partner after the European Union.

Early Steps Toward De-escalation

Although expectations for the Geneva meeting are low, any agreement to lower tariffs would signal movement in a conflict that has dragged on for years. Even modest progress could ease pressure on businesses and global supply chains heavily reliant on U.S.-China trade.

Also Read: EU Plans $113B in Tariffs on US Exports if Trade Talks Fail

In the first quarter, comparable sales at Texas Roadhouse’s company-owned restaurants increased by 3.5%, surpassing the 3.0% growth analysts had predicted. The company also reported that sales for the first five weeks of the second quarter have risen by 5%, driven by a 1.4% price increase implemented in April. Although analysts had forecasted a 4.1% growth for Q2, these early numbers indicate that Texas Roadhouse remains on a strong trajectory.

Strong Revenue Growth, Despite Slight Earnings Miss

Texas Roadhouse’s revenue for the quarter came in at $1.45 billion, reflecting a 10% year-over-year increase. While this figure slightly exceeded analysts’ expectations of $1.44 billion, the company’s earnings per share (EPS) of $1.70 came in just below the $1.76 forecast.

This growth in revenue showcases the company’s ability to generate strong returns even in the face of external pressures. With a broad appeal across a wide range of customers, Texas Roadhouse has remained a go-to choice for many diners, even as the economic outlook continues to shift.

Inflation and Tariff Costs Pose Ongoing Challenges

Although Texas Roadhouse has delivered solid results, rising commodity costs are a growing concern. The company has revised its forecast for 2025 commodity cost inflation to approximately 4%, factoring in the potential impact of tariffs. While this marks an increase from the previously expected range of 3-4%, the company has remained focused on managing costs through pricing adjustments and operational efficiency.

Texas Roadhouse’s decision to raise menu prices by 1.4% in April is a reflection of the company’s strategy to absorb some of the rising costs while continuing to deliver value to customers. The ability to strike a balance between increasing prices and maintaining customer loyalty will be crucial as the company faces potential headwinds from tariffs and inflation in the coming months.

Focus on Employees and Customer Experience as Cornerstones of Success

CEO Jerry Morgan credited Texas Roadhouse’s success to the company’s focus on both employee satisfaction and customer experience. He noted that operators have done an excellent job managing the challenges of the current economic climate while maintaining high customer traffic across the company’s brands.

Our operators have done a remarkable job of navigating through various challenges this quarter, helping us maintain growth in customer traffic,” Morgan said. “We’re focusing on creating a work environment where our employees are motivated and our guests feel welcomed.

This dedication to employee and customer experience has allowed Texas Roadhouse to maintain a competitive edge, even when facing economic uncertainty. By continuing to provide great service and quality food, the company has built a loyal customer base that drives consistent demand.

Stock Performance Shows Modest Rebound, but Risks Remain

Shares of Texas Roadhouse saw a modest increase of less than 2% in premarket trading following the announcement of the company’s first-quarter results. Despite the positive news, the stock is down about 4% since the beginning of the year. While the market’s volatility has certainly impacted the stock, the company’s strong fundamentals suggest that it is well-positioned for future growth.

Investors will be keeping a close eye on the company’s ability to manage rising costs and keep customers coming through the door. With a focus on controlling what it can, such as employee satisfaction and operational efficiency, Texas Roadhouse has shown that it can remain competitive despite external pressures.

Texas Roadhouse’s Strategic Adaptations Position It for Continued Growth

Texas Roadhouse’s ability to exceed expectations in a difficult environment highlights the effectiveness of its approach. By making smart pricing decisions and focusing on employee and customer satisfaction, the company has weathered the challenges of inflation and tariffs. Its continued success will depend on its ability to adapt to changing market conditions while maintaining its commitment to quality.

Also Read: Burger King Faces Lawsuit Over Whopper Ads Showing Bigger Burgers Than Delivered

According to new estimates by compensation consulting firm Johnson Associates, investment bankers focused on initial public offerings (IPOs) are expected to take the biggest hit, with bonuses projected to fall by as much as 20% compared to last year. That’s a stark shift from earlier forecasts that had predicted a 25% increase in IPO-related payouts.

“Hopefully in a few months we'll be proven wrong and the outlook will improve,” said Alan Johnson, managing director of Johnson Associates. “But I wouldn’t bet on it.”

Trump’s Tariffs Disrupt Financial Markets

The change in compensation expectations comes after President Donald Trump’s sweeping announcement of “reciprocal” tariffs on global trade partners. The announcement sent markets reeling and brought dealmaking — especially IPO activity — to a near standstill in recent weeks.

Although the stock market has since regained some ground, the uncertainty around the full scope of the new tariffs has caused many companies to pause their IPO plans. This slowdown is also expected to pressure the private equity sector, which relies on successful exits and public listings to generate returns.

Johnson Associates warned that the ripple effect of the tariffs and delayed IPOs could “clog up” the entire private investment pipeline, affecting returns, fundraising, and future hiring.

Sector-Wide Compensation Cuts Likely

The expected compensation decline isn’t limited to IPO bankers. Hedge fund managers, private equity professionals, M&A advisors, retail and commercial bankers, and even corporate support staff are all forecasted to see their paychecks shrink by up to 10% this year.

One of the few bright spots: traders. With markets experiencing increased volatility, equity traders and teams that sell trading strategies could see their bonuses rise by as much as 25%. Debt underwriters and professionals in secondary markets may also benefit slightly, according to the report.

2025 Bonus Forecast Turns from Optimistic to Uncertain

Last November, Johnson Associates had painted a more hopeful picture, projecting 2025 to be one of the best compensation years in the last five. That optimism has quickly faded.

Now, the outlook for the rest of the year depends heavily on geopolitical developments — especially how global trade disputes unfold. The Trump administration recently announced a trade agreement with the United Kingdom, its first since introducing the tariff plan. But several key negotiations with other nations remain unresolved.

At the same time, the Federal Reserve is holding off on further interest rate changes, signaling that it’s watching trade uncertainty closely as it weighs inflation and labor market risks.

Wall Street Faces a Tighter Job Market

Following sharp compensation cuts in 2022 and flat payouts in 2023, the current downshift could be the most significant decline since the market correction two years ago. And this isn’t just about bonuses.

“If this trend continues, we expect less hiring and more layoffs across the industry,” Johnson said.

In a climate where deal volume is slowing, IPO activity is paused, and geopolitical tensions are flaring, Wall Street’s high paydays — and jobs — are suddenly at risk.

Also Read: Trump’s Tax Cut Plan Risks Pushing U.S. Debt to $7 Trillion, Global Finance Experts Warn

The sentencing was handed down by U.S. District Judge John G. Koeltl, who said Mashinsky's crimes were “extremely serious,” resulting in personal profit of over $45 million at the expense of customers who trusted Celsius as a secure platform. Some customers lost their entire savings and faced severe emotional and psychological distress.

Celsius Network filed for bankruptcy in 2022 after the crypto market crash exposed risky investments made under Mashinsky’s leadership. At the height of its operations, Celsius claimed to manage nearly $20 billion in customer deposits, positioning itself as a safe, high-yield alternative to traditional banking by offering interest on crypto deposits. However, behind the scenes, much of the customer money was funneled into speculative bets and uncollateralized loans without transparent risk disclosure.

Prosecutors accused Mashinsky of manipulating public perception and inflating Celsius' financial stability. According to statements made in court, he continuously misled investors between 2018 and 2022, promising safety and security even as the company was operating at a loss. Assistant U.S. Attorney Allison Nichols described Mashinsky as someone who “preyed on hope,” luring people with misleading assurances that their money was safe.

The collapse of Celsius has left thousands of victims with little chance of full financial recovery, even as bankruptcy proceedings continue. During the sentencing, Mashinsky appeared visibly emotional, expressing regret and referencing his modest upbringing. He recounted his early life in Ukraine, immigration to Israel, service in the Israeli military, and eventual move to the United States. “I’m truly sorry,” he said, insisting he “never meant to hurt anybody.”

Despite his apology, the court emphasized the severity of the damage done. Several victims shared their experiences during the hearing, including Cameron Crewes, a member of the victims' committee, who noted that nearly 250 Celsius users passed away before they could receive justice or any compensation. “Many people have been wiped out,” Crewes said.

In previous court filings, Mashinsky’s defense argued that the Celsius collapse was the result of the broader downturn in the crypto market during mid-2022, not intentional wrongdoing. His legal team denied that his actions were predatory or driven by personal greed.

U.S. Attorney Jay Clayton, commenting after the sentencing, said Mashinsky enriched himself while ordinary investors bore the brunt of the losses. “He made tens of millions while his customers lost billions. America’s investors deserve better,” Clayton stated. “Digital assets do not excuse deception—fraud remains fraud.”

Mashinsky’s case stands as one of the most high-profile criminal proceedings to arise from the crypto industry’s recent turbulence and underscores the legal system’s growing scrutiny of digital asset platforms.

Also Read: Bitcoin to $1 Million by 2029? Why U.S. Crypto Analysts Say It’s Closer Than You Think

The defect spans several Volvo models, including the 2021 to 2025 XC40. While Volvo has not reported any injuries or accidents linked to the issue so far, the malfunction directly undermines the vehicle’s compliance with federal safety standards that require functional rear visibility systems in all new cars.

To correct the issue, Volvo plans to roll out a software update. Owners can either visit authorized dealerships or receive the fix through over-the-air updates, depending on their vehicle’s software capabilities.

Platform Overlap Ties Recall to Polestar’s Recent Issues

The timing of Volvo’s recall coincides with a nearly identical move by Polestar, the Swedish electric vehicle maker that shares its technical architecture with Volvo. Just last week, Polestar issued a recall for over 27,000 Polestar 2 units in the U.S., citing the same rear camera defect.

Both companies utilize the CMA (Compact Modular Architecture) platform, developed in partnership between Volvo Cars and its Chinese parent company, Geely. This commonality in design and software increases the likelihood that system-level bugs or hardware issues could affect vehicles across both brands.

While the Polestar 2 is no longer available for new orders in the U.S., the recall affects thousands of existing units still on the road. The overlap also raises questions about potential vulnerabilities in shared vehicle platforms and how swiftly automakers can respond with fixes.

Volvo to Cut Jobs in South Carolina Plant Amid U.S. Strategy Shift

In addition to the recall, Volvo Cars confirmed it will lay off approximately 5% of its workforce at its Charleston, South Carolina manufacturing facility. The move is part of a broader cost-cutting initiative aimed at reshaping Volvo’s U.S. operations, which have been under pressure from changing market dynamics and increasing tariff costs.

The Charleston plant, which produces models like the S60 sedan and is expected to handle production of the upcoming fully electric EX90 SUV, is a key pillar in Volvo’s North American strategy. However, the company’s restructuring signals a recalibration of its growth expectations in the U.S. as it faces shifting economic conditions and global supply chain challenges.

Just last month, Volvo withdrew its earnings forecast for the year, citing tariff impacts and a need to streamline operations. The recall and job cuts further underscore the company’s efforts to stay competitive in a tightening and increasingly regulated automotive landscape.

What U.S. Volvo Owners Need to Know

• Affected Models: Primarily 2021–2025 Volvo XC40, but other models may be involved. Full VIN lists will be available through NHTSA and Volvo’s official recall page.

• Issue: Rearview camera may fail to display image when reversing.

• Fix: Free software update available through dealership or over-the-air (OTA), depending on the model.

• Next Steps: Vehicle owners will be notified by Volvo beginning in mid-May. Those unsure about their vehicle’s status can check their VIN on the NHTSA recall lookup site.

Rearview camera systems have become a standard feature in modern vehicles, both for convenience and safety. A non-functioning camera reduces a driver’s situational awareness, especially in urban or high-traffic areas. While the fix is relatively straightforward, the scale of the recall — affecting over 400,000 vehicles — makes this one of Volvo’s more significant safety actions in recent years.

Moreover, the coinciding issues with Polestar raise larger concerns about the interconnected nature of automotive platforms and how faults in shared components can ripple across brands and markets.

Also Read: Volkswagen, Audi Recall 60,000+ Vehicles Over Gear Display Issue – Check Affected Models

The latest to voice this prediction is Andre Dragosch, Head of European Research at Bitwise Asset Management. He’s joined by others in the crypto space who believe the combination of shrinking supply and increasing long-term demand is enough to push Bitcoin into seven-digit territory over the next few years.

Bitcoin Supply Is Shrinking—Fast

Bitcoin’s design limits its total supply to 21 million coins. As of May 2025, more than 94% of that total has already been mined. And with the April 2024 halving now complete, only 450 new coins are being added daily.

But it’s not just about how many coins exist—it’s about how many are actually available. An estimated 20% of all Bitcoin is lost forever due to forgotten passwords or inaccessible wallets. And large portions of what remains are now in the hands of institutions like ETFs, company treasuries, and long-term holders who aren't selling anytime soon.

What’s left is a limited, thinning float—the number of coins actually trading hands. In financial markets, it’s this float, not total supply, that sets the price. If you want to buy but no one’s selling, the only way to get a deal done is by offering a higher price. That’s exactly what continues to happen with Bitcoin.

Long-Term Holders Are Shaping the Market

More and more, Bitcoin is being treated like digital gold. It's not just retail investors holding onto it. Institutional players are moving it into cold storage and treating it as a long-term store of value rather than a speculative trade.

That changes the game. As float decreases and ownership consolidates among patient investors, the upward pressure on Bitcoin’s price grows. And even modest increases in demand could push prices much higher.

This isn’t a new theory—but it’s gaining traction as Bitcoin proves itself through each halving cycle. The next one is due in 2028, and it will cut the new supply in half again, just like clockwork.

Can Bitcoin Realistically Hit $1 Million?

There’s no shortage of skepticism around bold price targets like $1 million. Some critics argue that such predictions are more about publicity than data. But even cautious analysts agree that the general direction is upward, especially with structural supply constraints and growing institutional demand.

It’s not that Bitcoin needs perfect conditions to hit $1 million. It just needs to avoid major disruptions—like a harsh regulatory crackdown or a global liquidity crunch. As long as adoption continues and supply keeps tightening, the long-term case stays strong.

Investing with the Right Mindset

Anyone buying Bitcoin today should think beyond short-term gains. It’s not about whether it will hit $1 million exactly—it’s about whether it’s likely to be worth more five or ten years from now.

Timing the market is nearly impossible, but holding through cycles of growth and scarcity has so far rewarded those with patience. Whether it takes five years or more, the conditions leading to higher prices are already in place.

Bitcoin may still be volatile, but its path is becoming clearer. With each halving, its supply tightens. With each wave of adoption, its demand rises. If you’re investing with a long-term lens, the idea of Bitcoin reaching $1 million doesn’t sound far-fetched—it sounds like the logical result of limited supply meeting sustained demand.

Also Read: How to Pay Off Student Loans Using Crypto in 2025 with DeFi and Payment Apps

This legal change has opened the door for tech platforms to rethink how homes are listed, sold, and marketed. These aren’t gimmicks—they’re alternatives built for sellers who want more flexibility and fewer middlemen. And while the traditional agent model still dominates, these startups are laying the groundwork for a more modern way to sell a home—with real savings.

Below are six startups helping sellers cut commission costs, connect directly with buyers, or rethink the whole home-selling process altogether.

1. Galleon: For Sellers Ready to Take the Lead

Core Idea: Self-service home listings, with optional upgrades
Cost: Free to list; add-ons start at $299

Galleon is a minimal, no-frills platform for sellers who want to control the sales process without an agent. Listings go live directly to buyers and agents. Sellers can opt for paid upgrades like professional photography, custom signs, and legal templates.

Unlike traditional platforms, Galleon doesn't take a cut of the sale. It’s aimed at informed homeowners who feel comfortable managing negotiations and paperwork.

Use case: A homeowner in a hot market listing a well-maintained property with confidence in their pricing and negotiation skills.

2. Listwise: Reverse Bidding for Real Estate Agents

Core Idea: Let agents bid to earn your listing
Cost: Free for sellers

Listwise changes how agents and sellers connect. Instead of sellers hiring the first agent they meet, the platform asks agents to submit proposals that include services offered, recent performance, and their commission rate.

This model introduces pricing pressure in an industry where fees have long been opaque. Early user data shows agents reducing commission rates by 1%–1.5% to win listings, potentially saving sellers $5,000–$10,000 per transaction.

Use case: Sellers who still want an agent but want competitive offers, better terms, and full transparency.

3. Off-Markt: The Soft Launch for Your Home

Core Idea: Create a pre-market listing to gauge buyer interest
Cost: Free

Off-Markt blends social media-style home profiles with soft market testing. Homeowners can post their property without formally listing it for sale. Think of it as a low-pressure way to collect interest, feedback, and even early offers—especially useful if you’re considering a move but aren’t ready to commit.

There’s no MLS listing, and buyers reach out directly. Some sellers use Off-Markt to connect with local buyers, then complete the sale through an attorney—bypassing both agents and commissions.

Use case: Homeowners exploring their sale options without going public too early.

4. Redy: Agents Pay Sellers for the Opportunity to Represent Them

Core Idea: Agents offer cash incentives to win listings
Cost: Free for sellers

Redy flips the traditional relationship: sellers receive competitive bids from agents, who may offer cash upfront or reduced fees to win the listing. It’s a demand-driven approach where agents actively compete for listings by putting skin in the game.

The average seller sees offers ranging from $1,000–$3,000 in incentives or rebates, along with reduced commissions. Some agents use Redy as a way to secure business in competitive markets where traditional referrals are drying up.

Use case: Sellers open to agent partnerships—but only on favorable, transparent terms.

5. Ridley: Tools and Legal Support for FSBO Sellers

Core Idea: Do-it-yourself home sales with structured guidance
Cost: $999–$1,999

Ridley targets FSBO (For Sale By Owner) sellers who want to manage their own sales but avoid legal risks and time-wasting errors. The platform provides an AI-driven listing assistant, contract templates, digital checklists, and legal support. A more expensive tier includes on-call help from real estate attorneys.

Founder Mike Chambers gained popularity on TikTok by showing how he sold his home commission-free—and Ridley builds on that playbook with structured tools for first-time FSBO sellers.

Use case: Sellers looking to bypass agents while still protecting themselves legally and financially.

6. Turbohome: A Flat-Fee Model That Refunds Buyer Commissions

Core Idea: Buyers pay a fixed fee, not a percentage
Cost: $5,000–$10,000 flat fee (paid by buyers)

Turbohome eliminates commission percentages altogether. Its agents are salaried employees, and buyers pay a one-time service fee. If the seller still offers a commission, that amount is refunded back to the buyer—effectively lowering their closing costs.

The model works well in high-value markets where 3% commissions can exceed $20,000–$40,000. Turbohome operates in California, Texas, and Washington and is expanding as commission transparency grows more important post-NAR settlement.

Use case: Buyers and sellers prioritizing fee clarity and cash savings, especially on homes above $750,000.

The average U.S. home sale still involves around $20,000–$30,000 in agent commissions. But starting July 2025, new legal rules will make it easier to negotiate—or skip—these fees altogether.

Each of these six startups represents a different path:

• Full control and self-listing (Galleon, Ridley)

• Smarter agent partnerships (Listwise, Redy)

• Alternative buyer access (Off-Markt, Turbohome)

Sellers no longer have to accept a one-size-fits-all process. In a post-NAR world, real estate is becoming a marketplace of options—where cost, control, and convenience are finally in the hands of homeowners.

Also Read: 30-Year Mortgage Rates Dip to 6.76%—Easing Pressure on Buyers

The lawsuit, filed by 19 consumers from 13 U.S. states, claims that Burger King's promotional materials—both in-store and online—depicted burgers that are significantly larger than what customers actually received. The Whopper, in particular, is at the center of the dispute, with plaintiffs alleging it appeared up to 35% bigger in ads and was shown containing more than twice the actual meat content.

Burger King must face a lawsuit claiming it misleads customers with advertisements that make its Whopper sandwich and other products appear larger than they are. https://t.co/1NYH0eLdM0

— Reuters Legal (@ReutersLegal) May 6, 2025

In a ruling issued Monday, U.S. District Judge Roy Altman in Miami said that the claims raised in the proposed class action were strong enough to move forward. He wrote that it was “plausible” that a reasonable customer could be misled by how the food was presented in Burger King’s advertising.

Burger King acknowledged that its marketing images are professionally styled to look more appealing, but argued that most people understand such photos are not exact representations of the real product. The company maintains that visual enhancements are a common advertising practice and shouldn’t be interpreted as deception.

But the court wasn't convinced. Judge Altman said the lawsuit describes exaggeration beyond typical marketing puffery and noted that Burger King allegedly began depicting larger versions of its food in ads after 2017. He also pointed out that this case differs from a similar lawsuit involving McDonald’s and Wendy’s that was dismissed in 2023, as Burger King's alleged overstatements were more extreme and systematic.

The plaintiffs’ attorney, Anthony Russo, welcomed the decision, saying that consumers deserve honesty, especially when marketing visuals influence purchasing decisions. “This is about fairness in advertising and setting a standard for what companies can and can’t do when promoting food products,” Russo said.

Burger King, owned by Restaurant Brands International—which also operates Tim Hortons, Popeyes, and Firehouse Subs—has not publicly commented on the ruling. The case will now proceed to the next phase, where the court will determine whether the company broke consumer protection laws.

The lawsuit, titled Coleman et al v. Burger King Corp., is being heard in the U.S. District Court for the Southern District of Florida under case number 22-20925. A similar lawsuit against Subway, involving sandwich size claims, is still pending in a New York federal court.

Also Read: Burger King $1 Billion Deal: Major Makeover and Acquisition Plans Revealed

According to the IIF’s latest global debt analysis, making the Trump-era tax reductions permanent could raise the national debt from the current level of approximately 100% of GDP to 130% by 2034. That would mean an estimated $7.2 trillion in additional government borrowing over the next decade—placing further pressure on U.S. Treasury markets and long-term interest rates.

While the Trump administration argues that the tax plan will boost take-home pay for millions of Americans and stimulate economic growth, the IIF notes that such projections do not account for the broader budgetary implications. “Investor attention is increasingly shifting toward U.S. borrowing levels, which could see significant changes unless credible new sources of revenue are introduced,” the report stated.

Trump is lobbying Congress to pass what he calls “one big, beautiful bill” to extend the cuts, promising it will create or protect over four million jobs and increase average household income by up to $5,000 a year. Originally targeting Memorial Day to pass the legislation, the timeline has been pushed back to July 4. The 2017 tax cuts are set to expire at the end of this year.

Republicans are working to finalize a plan that not only keeps the cuts in place but also aims to reduce the federal deficit. However, the IIF expressed skepticism about relying on tariffs and spending reductions to make up for lost revenue. It calculated that even if the administration implemented a 10% blanket tariff on imports and made deep cuts through the Department of Government Efficiency (Doge), the combined savings would still fall short—yielding only around $3.3 trillion by 2034.

“Despite claims that tariffs could generate up to $700 billion annually, there’s a real risk they could backfire,” the IIF warned, pointing to possible retaliatory trade measures from other nations and inflationary effects that would dampen consumer spending and revenue collection.

Furthermore, the IIF questioned the viability of Trump’s proposed “gold card” immigration program—which would grant permanent U.S. residency to foreign nationals who invest at least $5 million—saying it has “raised more questions than confidence” in terms of its fiscal benefit.

In response to mounting criticism, Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent has defended the administration’s approach. He argued that the combination of tax reform and regulatory rollback would drive long-term private investment and resilience in the U.S. economy. “Each time the American economy gets knocked down, it gets back up again—stronger than before,” Bessent said, describing U.S. financial markets as “anti-fragile.”

Nonetheless, the IIF's warning reflects growing concern among global investors that the U.S. may be approaching a critical tipping point. Without a concrete plan to control spending or raise revenues, the country could face rising borrowing costs, slower growth, and reduced investor confidence in the years ahead.

Also Read: Fed Chair Powell Faces Political Heat as Trump Blames Fed for Slowing Economy

The proposed measures are designed as a strategic counterweight in case talks with the United States break down. Although the EU continues to engage in negotiations aimed at resolving trade disputes and addressing key issues like subsidies, digital services taxation, and industrial policy, officials are reportedly growing increasingly concerned about the lack of meaningful progress.

Once shared, the draft tariff list will undergo a formal consultation process among EU member states, lasting roughly one month. During this time, national governments will review and potentially recommend adjustments before any final version is confirmed. The exact scope of the U.S. goods targeted has not been revealed, but similar past measures have included products ranging from agricultural items and consumer goods to industrial components and vehicles.

The potential tariffs would represent one of the largest retaliatory trade measures considered by the EU in recent years, reflecting both the scale of economic interests involved and the bloc’s desire to maintain leverage in negotiations with Washington. The outcome of these trade discussions could have wide-reaching implications not only for transatlantic relations but also for global supply chains and markets already facing pressure from inflation and geopolitical instability.

The European Commission, which handles trade policy on behalf of the EU, is expected to finalize the tariff list following member-state consultations. However, whether the tariffs are implemented will ultimately depend on the progress—or lack thereof—made in the ongoing talks with U.S. counterparts.

Also Read: Trump Says Trade Deals Will Be Finalized in 3 to 4 Weeks – Is This the End of Tariff Uncertainty?

Both methods come with distinct advantages and risks, and understanding how they work can help borrowers make better-informed financial decisions.

Using DeFi Loans to Access Liquidity Without Selling Crypto Holdings

Decentralized finance (DeFi) has become one of the most innovative sectors within the blockchain ecosystem. Built on platforms like Ethereum, DeFi allows users to borrow, lend, and earn interest on crypto assets without relying on banks or credit checks.

Here's how this can be applied to student loan repayment: if a borrower holds crypto—say $30,000 in Ethereum (ETH)—and has a $15,000 student loan balance, they can deposit their ETH into a DeFi protocol such as Aave or MakerDAO as collateral. In return, they can borrow up to 50–70% of the crypto’s current value in stablecoins like DAI or USDC. These stablecoins can then be converted into U.S. dollars and used to pay down the student loan.

Once the loan is repaid—including interest—the borrower’s original crypto collateral is released back to them.

Key Advantages:

• Asset retention: Borrowers don’t need to sell their crypto to access cash, which may be beneficial if they believe the asset will appreciate in value.

• No credit history needed: Loans are secured by crypto collateral, removing the need for traditional credit assessments.

• Potentially lower interest rates: DeFi interest rates can be significantly lower than those offered by private lenders or federal loan consolidation options.

Risks to Evaluate:

• Volatility and liquidation: Crypto prices fluctuate. If the value of the collateral falls below a certain threshold, the DeFi platform can automatically liquidate a portion—or all—of the collateral to protect against loss.

• Variable rates: While borrowing costs may be low initially, interest rates on DeFi platforms are subject to market conditions and can rise sharply during high activity periods.

• Smart contract vulnerabilities: DeFi relies on automated code. If a platform’s smart contract has bugs or is exploited, user funds can be compromised.

Borrowers considering this route must carefully assess their risk tolerance, understand platform-specific terms, and monitor market volatility closely.

Paying Student Loans Using Crypto Through Bill Payment Platforms

For those who prefer a more direct and simpler approach, some services allow users to pay student loan bills with cryptocurrency. BitPay, for example, converts crypto into U.S. dollars and sends payments directly to lenders, including major servicers such as Navient, Sallie Mae, and Nelnet.

The process involves downloading the provider's app, creating a wallet, and linking it to the borrower’s loan account. From there, users can select a cryptocurrency—ranging from Bitcoin and Ethereum to Litecoin and Dogecoin—to make a one-time or recurring payment.

Advantages of This Approach:

• Convenience: No need to navigate complex DeFi protocols or monitor collateral thresholds.

• Broad crypto support: Platforms often accept dozens of different cryptocurrencies.

• Compatibility: Payments can be made to nearly all major federal and private loan servicers.

Important Considerations:

• Permanent asset conversion: Unlike DeFi loans, which allow users to recover their crypto after repayment, this method involves selling crypto to make payments. Once converted to fiat, the digital asset is gone.

• Timing and tax implications: Selling crypto may trigger capital gains taxes, depending on how long the asset was held and the gain realized at the time of sale. Users should consult a tax professional before moving forward.

What is the Right Strategy?

Deciding whether to use DeFi or a crypto bill payment service largely depends on an individual’s financial goals, crypto portfolio, and risk appetite. DeFi may appeal to those who believe in the long-term growth of their crypto investments and want to avoid selling. Meanwhile, direct payment platforms offer simplicity and speed, without the need for blockchain knowledge or risk management.

It’s also important to factor in external variables—such as crypto market conditions, federal loan interest rate changes, and potential legislative shifts in student loan forgiveness programs—before committing to either strategy.

Cryptocurrency isn't just an investment vehicle—it can also function as a financial tool to manage debt. Whether you're using DeFi loans to unlock liquidity without selling assets or opting for straightforward payment platforms to convert crypto into loan payments, both paths offer unique benefits. But each comes with its own set of responsibilities and risks. Taking the time to evaluate your financial situation, the state of the market, and your long-term goals will be key to determining whether these emerging options align with your broader debt management plan.

Also Read: MoneyGram Launches Global API to Connect Cash and Crypto Through a Single Integration

The proposal, posted by Trump on Truth Social late Sunday, aims to penalize the import of foreign-made films in an effort to protect what he called a “dying” American film industry. No studios or production companies had publicly responded to the statement by the time of market open.

Trump Blames Foreign Incentives for Hollywood Decline

In his social media post, Trump accused foreign governments of luring away U.S. filmmakers through incentives, which he labeled a coordinated attack on the domestic entertainment sector. He described the situation as a national security concern, asserting that “Hollywood, and many other areas within the U.S.A., are being devastated.”

The statement sent shockwaves across a film industry already under pressure from pandemic-era losses, prolonged labor strikes, and changing viewing habits. While the former president’s message contained no formal policy details, it sparked immediate investor concerns about international productions and future content costs.

Global Blockbusters in Limbo as Production Locations Face Scrutiny

Trump’s remarks arrive at a sensitive time, just weeks after China signaled plans to scale back the import of Hollywood films in response to heightened U.S. tariffs on Chinese products. The threat of reciprocal action looms large for studios that rely on international box office returns.

A number of upcoming blockbusters could be caught in the crosshairs. Disney’s Marvel titles "Avengers: Doomsday" and "Spider-Man: Brand New Day" were filmed in London, while James Cameron’s "Avatar: Fire and Ash" was produced in New Zealand. Other notable productions include "Mission: Impossible — The Final Reckoning" from Paramount, shot across multiple countries, and Lionsgate’s "Ballerina," a John Wick spin-off filmed in the Czech Republic. Lucasfilm’s "Star Wars: Starfighter" is also set for production in the UK.

Unclear Policy Details Leave Studios and Investors Guessing

Despite the initial market reaction, analysts noted that it’s too early to determine how such a tariff would be implemented, if at all. Critical questions remain around the scope of the tariffs: Would they apply only to theatrical releases or also to streaming content? Would international co-productions be targeted? How would compliance be enforced?

Ben Swinburne, a media analyst at Morgan Stanley, cautioned that the lack of formal guidelines makes it difficult to assess the full impact. “100% tariffs on some or all of a film’s cost could lead to fewer projects, higher production expenses, and lower earnings across the board,” he wrote in a Monday note.

Netflix Seen as Especially Vulnerable in Global Production Landscape

Among the companies facing heightened risk, Netflix stands out. As the world’s largest producer of original film content, with movies accounting for roughly 25% to 30% of its total viewing hours, the company relies heavily on international production hubs for shooting, editing, and post-production.

Analysts warn that tariffs could interrupt global workflows and increase the cost of content, while also opening the door for foreign governments to retaliate with their own restrictions on U.S. platforms. “This could encourage other countries to block or tax American streaming services,” Swinburne added.

Industry Waits for Clarity Amid Rising Trade Tensions

For now, the entertainment world is left to watch and wait. Without a formal policy framework or legislative backing, Trump's proposal remains a political message rather than a regulatory change. Still, the volatility in media stocks signals just how seriously markets are taking the threat.

Studios and streaming platforms with cross-border operations may need to prepare for a more fragmented production landscape, especially as trade tensions continue to spill into the creative sector.

Also Read: Fed Chair Powell Faces Political Heat as Trump Blames Fed for Slowing Economy

This global service allows developers to enable cash deposits in more than 30 countries and cash withdrawals in over 170 countries, leveraging MoneyGram’s established infrastructure. The API is built to simplify how financial apps offer cash-to-crypto and crypto-to-cash services, removing lengthy onboarding processes and technical barriers.

Fast Integration, Global Reach

MoneyGram says the new tool is focused on speed and simplicity. Setting up a sandbox environment—a process that once took up to two weeks—can now be done in just five minutes. The API delivers instant credentials, SDKs, and detailed documentation, all available through developer.moneygram.com.

By using the Stellar blockchain and USDC from Circle, the platform links traditional finance with blockchain-based assets. This puts MoneyGram at the center of a growing movement to unify real-world cash systems with digital economies.

Introducing MoneyGram Ramps — a developer-first API bridging cash and #crypto.

Embed cash ↔️ crypto functionality in your app with just a few lines of code. With #MoneyGramRamps you can get started in minutes:

✅ No banking integrations required
✅ Instant API credentials and… pic.twitter.com/GZm8IS9SDn

— MoneyGram (@MoneyGram) May 2, 2025

Connecting the Old and the New

“This is a major step forward for financial access,” said Anthony Soohoo, CEO at MoneyGram. “We’re removing the complexity from the crypto integration process and enabling a fast, seamless connection between digital wallets and our global cash infrastructure.”

Soohoo added that MoneyGram’s broader goal is to build a world without financial borders by offering tools that allow startups and institutions alike to connect to the digital economy without high barriers or regulatory red tape.

Part of a Larger Strategy

The API rollout follows MoneyGram’s recent partnership with Mastercard on "Mastercard Move," a service aimed at improving cross-border payments and the real-time movement of money. Together, these initiatives reflect MoneyGram's growing push into fintech and digital assets.

This latest development positions the company as a key player in the digital finance space—not just as a money transmitter, but as a vital connector between the legacy financial world and the crypto economy.

Also Read: Maldives Set to Launch $9B Blockchain Finance Zone Backed by Dubai-Based Investor

President Donald Trump has renewed public calls for interest rate cuts, urging the Fed to act swiftly to prevent what he described as an unnecessary slowdown. The Fed, however, appears in no rush to move.

Trump Calls Powell “Too Late” as Fed Signals No Immediate Cuts

In a series of posts on Truth Social, Trump criticized Fed Chair Jerome Powell for being slow to respond to signs of weakening growth, calling him “Mr. Too Late.” The president accused the Fed of putting the economy at risk by keeping rates too high for too long.

Despite the criticism, Powell has maintained a cautious stance, repeating the central bank’s position that decisions will continue to be guided by incoming economic data. While markets are pricing in possible rate cuts later this year, there is no indication the Fed will shift policy in May.

GDP Contracts in Q1 After Tariff-Driven Import Surge Ends

The U.S. economy contracted during the first three months of 2025, marking the first quarterly decline in GDP in over three years. Analysts attributed the drop in part to a sharp pullback in business spending following a rush of imports in late 2024, when companies moved quickly to get ahead of new tariffs imposed by the Trump administration.

Economists warn the slowdown could deepen if tariff-related disruptions continue and consumer spending begins to weaken. However, the labor market has so far remained resilient. April’s job report showed steady hiring, offering a partial offset to GDP concerns.

Fed Stays Focused on Inflation, Despite Political Pressure

Inflation remains a key concern for policymakers. The Fed’s preferred inflation gauge rose 3.5% on an annualized basis in the first quarter, well above the 2% target. While some price pressures eased slightly in March, officials are wary of cutting rates too early and risking a resurgence in inflation.

Fed Chair Powell has acknowledged the recent slowdown in economic activity but emphasized the importance of price stability. Several regional Fed officials, including Governor Chris Waller, have suggested that rate cuts may only be appropriate if unemployment begins to rise meaningfully over the coming months.

Internal Fed Discussions Reflect Growing Divergence

Within the Federal Reserve, officials are divided on how soon to act. Some, including Waller, say they need to see a sustained increase in jobless claims before adjusting policy. Others are more focused on inflation and argue that maintaining current rates is necessary to prevent further price increases—especially with the ongoing effects of tariffs and supply-side constraints.

The internal debate reflects the complexity of the current environment: inflation remains elevated, but early signs of economic softening are becoming harder to ignore.

No Policy Shift Yet, But Pressure Is Building

The Fed is not expected to change its benchmark rate at this month’s meeting, but the tone of Powell’s remarks will be closely watched for any sign of changing views. Economists say a second consecutive quarter of GDP contraction, or a noticeable uptick in unemployment, could prompt the Fed to begin cutting rates as soon as June.

Until then, officials are likely to stay the course. “They’re in a wait-and-see mode,” said Luke Tilley, chief economist at Wilmington Trust. “But the clock is ticking.”

Also Read: Fed Chair Jerome Powell Future in Doubt as Trump Eyes New Leadership

From Tourist Paradise to Fintech Frontier

Best known for its high-end resorts and marine tourism, the Maldives is now betting on financial technology as its next growth engine. The government has entered into a joint venture with MBS Global Investments to establish a dedicated financial zone focused on blockchain services and digital asset infrastructure.

The project, called the Maldives International Financial Centre, will cover approximately 830,000 square meters and is expected to accommodate 6,500 residents. Once operational, it could generate up to 16,000 jobs, offering a significant boost to employment and domestic income streams.

Investment Value Surpasses National GDP

The scale of the investment is unprecedented for the Maldives. The proposed capital injection of $8.8 billion exceeds the country’s entire gross domestic product, which stands at roughly $7 billion. More than $4 billion has already been secured through preliminary equity and debt arrangements, according to officials involved in the deal.

The financing will be rolled out over five years, with MBS Global Investments—the family office of Sheikh Nayef bin Eid Al Thani of Qatar—taking the lead. The group currently manages around $14 billion in assets globally and is positioning this project as a cornerstone of its international expansion strategy in fintech.

Government Seeks Financial Relief and Long-Term Diversification

For the Maldives, this deal comes at a critical time. The country is facing a heavy burden of external debt, much of which is due for repayment in the next two years. Finance Minister Moosa Zameer acknowledged that the current debt cycle poses “the biggest challenge” for the administration and that new revenue models are essential for national stability.

"This is more than an investment; it’s part of a larger effort to reduce our economic overdependence on tourism and fisheries," Zameer stated during recent remarks.

By anchoring its future in digital finance, the government aims to create a diversified, service-based economy that can weather global travel disruptions and shifting commodity prices—factors that previously left the country vulnerable during crises like the COVID-19 pandemic.

A Strategic Pivot in the Indian Ocean Region

If the plan proceeds as envisioned, the Maldives could emerge as a strategic digital finance node between Asia, the Middle East, and Africa. The financial center is being positioned as a free zone with policies favorable to international firms operating in crypto trading, tokenized assets, blockchain innovation, and other fintech sectors.

Such zones have found success in hubs like Dubai and Singapore—models the Maldives appears to be emulating with its own regulatory framework now in development.

Rebranding an Island Economy

While tourism will remain vital, the country is openly rebranding itself as a forward-facing economy with ambitions to participate in the global digital financial ecosystem.

In effect, the Maldives is placing a long-term bet: that digital infrastructure and crypto-friendly regulation can create a new economic pillar—one resilient enough to sustain the nation through future shocks, and attractive enough to bring in the next wave of international investors.

Also Read: Gold-Backed Crypto Surges to 3-Year High as $80M Minted in a Month, Outpacing Central Bank Demand

“I think the good parts are the Trump economy, and the bad parts are the Biden economy,” Trump stated.

Since returning to the White House in January, Trump has pushed through a slate of aggressive trade measures aimed at reviving domestic production. These include a 145% tariff on Chinese imports, a universal 10% tariff across most goods, and the suspension of the de minimis threshold that previously exempted low-cost shipments from duties. While these moves are popular among manufacturers and some labor unions, consumers and small businesses are beginning to feel the squeeze.

Cost Pressures Persist, But Trump Insists Change Takes Time

Grocery bills have continued to climb, with data showing prices up 2.41% in March 2025 compared to the same month last year. That marked the sharpest increase since mid-2023, pushing more households to reevaluate spending habits.

Trump, however, said the situation is starting to improve. “We got the costs down. It takes time, but it’s happening,” he said.

Still, the president offered a pointed message to consumers about adjusting expectations. Asked about the strain on household budgets due to tariffs, Trump said Americans may have to reconsider what counts as essential.

“I don’t think a baby needs 30 dolls. Maybe three or four. That’s just common sense,” Trump said, suggesting the era of cheap imported goods is coming to an end.

Market Volatility Underlines Public Concerns as Trump Points to ‘Transition Period’

Since Trump resumed office, the S&P 500 has fallen 6% overall. However, there have been sharp swings, including a 9.5% surge in early April—its strongest single-day gain in nearly two decades—after Trump temporarily eased some tariffs. The back-and-forth has made it harder for businesses and investors to plan ahead.

Trump downplayed concerns about the volatility, describing it as part of a larger adjustment phase. “Sometimes you have to take medicine to fix something,” he said, referencing the long-term aim of rebuilding domestic manufacturing, even if it comes with short-term market pain.

Recession Warnings Grow as Business Owners Brace for Higher Costs

Major financial institutions are growing more cautious. JPMorgan recently raised its forecast for a recession to 60%, and Goldman Sachs has set the probability at 45%. Manufacturing orders are slowing, and logistics costs are rising—signs that Trump’s tariffs, while politically popular among some blue-collar constituencies, could be cooling broader economic activity.

Small business owners are particularly vulnerable. Unlike major car manufacturers—who have been granted delayed tariffs and reimbursement allowances—independent retailers and importers have received no comparable support. When asked whether he would extend relief to smaller enterprises, Trump responded, “They’re not going to need it.”

That remark has sparked frustration among some small business associations, who say they’re facing shrinking margins and consumer resistance to higher prices.

Tariff Policy May Become a Long-Term Fixture, Trump Signals

Pressed on whether his tariffs are temporary or permanent, Trump indicated they may be here to stay. “Why would anyone build in the U.S. if they thought tariffs were going away?” he said. His message to manufacturers is clear: set up production here, or face penalties on imports.

This approach has drawn praise from some domestic producers who see tariffs as leveling the playing field. But trade groups warn it could lead to higher costs across the supply chain, especially for industries that rely on globally sourced parts.

Trump Escalates Pressure on the Federal Reserve, Calls for Faster Rate Cuts

Trump also used the interview to renew his criticism of Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell, accusing him of acting too slowly on interest rates. He called Powell “a major loser” and said his delay in cutting rates is hurting U.S. growth.

Despite the harsh words, Trump said he won’t move to remove Powell before his term ends in 2026. “I’ll get to change him very quickly anyway,” Trump said, implying a new direction in monetary policy once Powell’s term expires.

Although federal law protects the Fed chair from dismissal without cause, Trump’s comments have raised speculation about his preferred successor and how closely he intends to steer central bank policy if elected to a second full term.

Manufacturing Push Marks Shift from Consumer-Driven Economy

Trump’s current strategy appears to be a clear departure from previous administrations that focused on consumption and low prices. Instead, he is pushing for a supply-side realignment, centered around domestic manufacturing, higher tariffs, and reshoring critical industries. His team argues that this will bring long-term stability and job creation, even if short-term costs remain high.

However, this shift comes at a time when consumer spending is slowing, retail sales are uneven, and wage growth is not keeping pace with inflation in key sectors like housing, food, and energy.

The White House says this is the necessary price to reverse decades of offshoring. Economists remain divided—some agree the strategy may boost industrial investment, while others warn it risks reducing global competitiveness if not paired with innovation and workforce training.

Also Read: Apple Global Manufacturing Strategy Faces Fresh Pressure from U.S. Tariffs

According to recent figures from rwa.xyz, over $80 million worth of tokenized gold assets were minted in the last 30 days. That growth pushed the total market capitalization for these blockchain-based gold assets to $1.43 billion, marking a 6% month-over-month increase. Transfer volumes also jumped significantly, reaching $1.27 billion in April—a 77% rise compared to the previous month. This signals increased usage and liquidity for these tokens.

These assets, often issued by platforms like Paxos (PAXG), Tether Gold (XAUT), and others, are pegged to real gold stored in vaults, offering investors a modern alternative to traditional physical gold ownership.

Central Banks Reduce Purchases While ETFs and Digital Assets Expand

The World Gold Council’s Q1 2025 Gold Demand Trends report revealed that global gold demand rose to 1,206 tonnes, up 1% year-over-year, making it the strongest first quarter since 2016. However, the makeup of that demand has shifted notably.

Central bank purchases dropped to 244 tonnes, compared to 365 tonnes in Q4 2024. This marks a 33% quarterly decrease in institutional buying. While central banks remain net buyers overall, the pace of accumulation has slowed.

At the same time, gold exchange-traded funds (ETFs) saw strong inflows. Investment demand surged to 552 tonnes, more than doubling compared to the prior quarter. These inflows are helping maintain upward pressure on gold prices even as central bank activity cools.

Gold Prices Remain Elevated Despite Short-Term Dip

Prices for gold have continued to perform strongly in 2025. The average quarterly price rose to $2,860 per ounce, representing a 38% year-over-year increase. Despite a minor pullback of 2.35% last week, spot gold remains high, trading around $3,240 per ounce.

This pricing strength has been supported by both traditional demand and growing interest in tokenized forms of gold. As geopolitical and economic uncertainties persist—especially in relation to inflation, U.S. interest rates, and geopolitical tensions—investors are seeking stable, value-retaining assets.

Jewelry Sales Decline, While Retail Investment Stays Resilient

Not all segments of the gold market are growing. Jewelry demand fell to pandemic-era lows, particularly in Western markets, where discretionary spending has declined due to persistent inflation and rising costs of living. However, bar and coin demand remained relatively stable.

China, in particular, saw strong demand from retail investors seeking physical gold, even as institutional trends lean more digital. High domestic savings rates and concerns about the local economy continue to drive Chinese investors toward gold.

Tokenized Gold Emerges as a Serious Alternative

Tokenized gold isn’t just a niche corner of the crypto space anymore. It’s quickly gaining recognition as a legitimate form of gold investment—combining the trust of physical asset backing with the speed, transparency, and accessibility of blockchain technology.

These digital tokens allow for fractional ownership, 24/7 trading, and faster settlement compared to traditional gold investments. With growing minting volumes and rising market capitalization, tokenized gold may be poised to become a larger player in both the crypto and precious metals sectors.

The growing appeal of these assets may be especially attractive to investors who want gold exposure but without dealing with vault storage, shipping logistics, or ETF management fees.

Also Read: Coinbase Adds Fee-Free Access to PayPal’s PYUSD Stablecoin — Could It Challenge USDC and Tether?

The company confirmed it is facing a $900 million hit in the current quarter due to tariffs, primarily related to Chinese imports. While smartphones and computers were technically exempted from these tariffs under current policies, Apple has had to adjust by moving a significant portion of iPhone production from China to India — a costly and logistically challenging shift.

Tariff Burden Hits Apple Harder Than Other Tech Companies

What sets Apple apart is its dependence on hardware for the majority of its revenue. Unlike Meta, Google, or Microsoft — which generate significant income through advertising, software, or cloud services — Apple’s core business relies heavily on physical products built overseas.

This structural difference makes the company far more exposed to import duties, particularly when tariffs are imposed or adjusted without much notice. Even minor policy changes can ripple across Apple’s operations and impact its quarterly earnings.

In contrast, companies like Google have said it’s still too early to determine any serious tariff effects, while Amazon has only slightly adjusted its operating income projections. Apple doesn’t have the same flexibility, making it a case study in how global trade policies directly affect companies with international manufacturing pipelines.

Manufacturing Moves to India and Vietnam Aren’t a Long-Term Fix

Apple’s shift to manufacturing iPhones in India and other products in Vietnam was a strategic response to U.S.-China tensions. However, while these countries currently benefit from temporary tariff pauses, they’re not immune to future trade actions. The U.S. is still in talks with both governments over broader trade terms, and duties could be reintroduced.

According to analysts, the potential for tariffs on India and Vietnam is a lingering threat that limits Apple’s ability to predict costs or scale manufacturing smoothly. This creates ongoing uncertainty for investors and operational headaches for the company’s supply chain planners.

Jefferies analyst Edison Lee noted that the current revenue projections for the June quarter assume no new tariffs on India or Vietnam and a 20% cap on Chinese tariffs. If those assumptions fail, profit margins could be squeezed further.

Possible Tariffs on Semiconductors Could Deepen the Impact

Beyond manufacturing locations, another concern is the Trump administration’s Section 232 investigation, which could lead to tariffs on semiconductors — a key component in Apple devices. If new duties are added on these chips, Apple may have to pay more for essential parts used in iPhones, Macs, and Apple Watches.

A rise in semiconductor costs would leave Apple with two options: absorb the costs and reduce profit margins, or raise retail prices — which could hurt demand. Jefferies estimates show that for every 1% increase in global tariffs, Apple’s pre-tax profit could fall by 1.5% in the next fiscal year, assuming prices stay the same.

This pressure could weigh heavily on Apple’s pricing strategy, especially in a market where consumer spending is already under pressure due to inflation and economic uncertainty in several regions.

Concerns About iPhone Sales Heading Into the June Quarter

Apple didn’t provide a detailed breakdown of product-specific revenue guidance, which some analysts view as a red flag. UBS analyst David Vogt said the forecast of “low to mid-single-digit growth” for the June quarter fell short of expectations and might suggest weakening demand for iPhones — particularly if higher costs from tariffs force Apple to limit production or delay launches.

The lack of clarity has led some market watchers to revise their expectations for Apple’s year-end performance. While services revenue remains a bright spot, any dip in iPhone or Mac sales could significantly impact the company’s bottom line.

Key Takeaways:

• $900 million in projected tariff costs this quarter signals how directly policy decisions can impact corporate earnings.

• Apple’s reliance on overseas production for most of its hardware means it remains more sensitive to global trade rules than its peers.

• Strategic shifts to India and Vietnam may offer only short-term relief if trade deals fail to materialize.

• Semiconductor tariffs — still under review — could raise hardware costs further.

• iPhone sales, the company’s largest revenue driver, are facing new headwinds heading into mid-2025.

Apple’s attempt to move production outside China hasn’t offered much protection. Even as it expands manufacturing in India and Vietnam, those regions are now facing trade tensions of their own with the U.S. This shows how hard it is for global brands to avoid being caught in the middle of policy changes — especially when new tariffs or investigations can surface with little warning. For Apple, the question isn’t just where to manufacture, but how quickly it can adapt to each new round of trade uncertainty.

Also Read: China Removes Tariffs on Some U.S. Goods, But Denies Trump’s Trade Talks Claims

The initiative is part of PayPal’s effort to improve the functionality and reach of PYUSD across payment platforms and within decentralized applications — including decentralized finance (DeFi) protocols — where stablecoins are already an essential tool.

This development signals a more active push by PayPal into the crypto economy, and could potentially disrupt the dominance of long-established players like Tether (USDT) and Circle’s USDC.

PayPal’s Stablecoin Gets a Second Wind Through Coinbase

PayPal released PYUSD in 2023, but adoption has been slower than expected. In a market where USDT and USDC account for the majority of stablecoin transactions, PYUSD has so far lagged behind in both volume and visibility.

That may change with this Coinbase rollout. While PayPal already offers crypto capabilities within its own app, integrating directly with Coinbase opens access to millions of active crypto traders and developers.

For PayPal, it’s a chance to establish PYUSD as a credible option for blockchain-based payments. For Coinbase, it’s a step toward further integrating stablecoins into the broader digital asset ecosystem.

DeFi Integration Could Strengthen PYUSD’s Use Case

Both companies indicated they will collaborate on bringing PYUSD into DeFi use cases — an area where stablecoins play a vital role in lending, borrowing, staking, and on-chain trading.

Currently, DeFi platforms rely heavily on USDC and DAI. If PYUSD becomes compatible with major protocols and smart contracts, it could gain a much-needed edge. However, DeFi adoption is still limited by technical complexity, lack of user protection, and legal uncertainty.

To succeed, PYUSD must be more than a payments token — it must prove useful within smart contract ecosystems where stablecoin reliability is essential.

PYUSD May Offer Yield — But Comes With Trade-Offs

PayPal has shared plans to offer a 3.7% yield on PYUSD holdings later this year. While that might appeal to users looking for passive income, it's important to recognize the difference between yield on a stablecoin and interest in a traditional bank.

Unlike savings deposits, stablecoins are not FDIC-insured, and returns are usually linked to how the issuer manages underlying assets. If there’s a misstep, there’s no government safety net.

That said, PayPal says PYUSD is fully backed by U.S. dollar deposits and short-term treasuries, a model similar to USDC’s. This approach offers more transparency and reduces the risk of losing the 1:1 peg, but does not eliminate it entirely.

This Deal Could Nudge Crypto Further Into the Mainstream

Stablecoins serve as a bridge between traditional finance and digital assets. Their stability makes them useful for payments, trading, and cross-border transactions — especially when paired with platforms that have massive user bases.

PayPal processed nearly $1.7 trillion in payments in 2024, with more than 425 million active accounts. Tapping into even a fraction of that audience with PYUSD could shift the stablecoin landscape significantly.

By removing fees and simplifying access through Coinbase, both companies are making stablecoin usage more convenient for regular users, developers, and businesses.

The Coinbase-PayPal partnership around PYUSD might not move the market overnight — but it’s a significant step toward making stablecoins a real part of daily payments and decentralized finance.

For crypto investors, it signals that major players are still building — even in uncertain market conditions. And for the industry, it’s a reminder that the future of crypto may not lie in wild speculation, but in quiet infrastructure upgradeslike this one that bring blockchain closer to the mainstream economy.

Also Read: Coinbase Removes Fees for PayPal's PYUSD to Boost Crypto Payments

The deal was unveiled at the high-profile Token2049 conference in Dubai, an event that attracts thousands of crypto enthusiasts, developers, and financial insiders. With the UAE positioning itself as a global crypto hub, this announcement has added another layer of complexity to the ongoing debate about the intersection of politics, cryptocurrency, and foreign influence on the U.S. financial system.

What Is USD1? Understanding the Trump Family’s Stablecoin

For the uninitiated, USD1 is a stablecoin—a type of cryptocurrency designed to maintain a stable value by being pegged to a traditional asset, like the U.S. dollar. In this case, World Liberty Financial developed the coin to support transactions in the digital currency space while ensuring a level of stability rare in the often-volatile crypto market. Stablecoins are widely used in crypto exchanges for trading and investment purposes, and by using USD1, MGX and Binance may signal trust in this new financial instrument — and potentially a new way of stabilizing and scaling digital assets in the market.

Eric Trump’s choice to back this crypto investment with USD1 has raised eyebrows, as it not only involves his family’s direct financial interests but also creates a link between the Trump Organization and a major foreign government-backed fund. This is a rare instance where a political family’s business dealings intersect so directly with a foreign-backed financial operation in the burgeoning cryptocurrency industry.

The Role of MGX and the UAE’s Growing Crypto Influence

MGX, which is led by Sheikh Tahnoon bin Zayed Al Nahyan, the brother of the UAE’s president, has been making waves in the global finance world. The UAE has become increasingly influential in cryptocurrency and blockchain technology, with Dubai positioning itself as a global leader in crypto innovation. This latest venture in Binance fits into the UAE’s broader strategy of embracing digital currency as part of its economic diversification plan.

The decision by MGX to back Binance with a Trump family-backed stablecoin adds fuel to the debate on how foreign nations—particularly those with vast sovereign wealth—are shaping global markets, sometimes in ways that might blur the lines of traditional financial governance.

Binance Under Scrutiny: Does This Deal Add Risk?

While the partnership between MGX and Binance may appear financially lucrative, it’s not without controversy. Binance, which has been under U.S. regulatory oversight since 2023 due to violations of money laundering laws, remains a target for scrutiny from lawmakers and regulators. With the involvement of a foreign government and the Trump family’s financial ties to this deal, many are questioning whether this partnership risks exacerbating concerns over transparency, regulation, and the need for stronger oversight in the crypto space.

Zach Witkoff, co-founder of World Liberty Financial, who was present at the event in Dubai, expressed confidence in the venture, stating, “This is just the beginning,” hinting at further expansion of the Trump family’s business interests in the growing digital economy. While the partnership may signal innovation, the lack of regulatory clarity in crypto markets could pose long-term challenges as the deal progresses.

Elizabeth Warren Criticizes the Deal, Calling It 'Corruption'

Senator Elizabeth Warren (D-MA) wasted no time weighing in on the announcement, describing the deal as a direct example of financial corruption. In a statement, she said, “A shady fund backed by a foreign government just announced it will make a $2 billion deal using Donald Trump’s stablecoins.” She raised concerns about the implications of such dealings, calling out potential conflicts of interest as the GENIUS Act, which aims to regulate stablecoins, continues to make its way through Congress.

Her remarks reflect the growing scrutiny of stablecoin regulation and the influence of political families in shaping legislation that could have long-term benefits for their private interests. The GENIUS Act could make it easier for entities like World Liberty Financial to continue operating in the crypto space, potentially sidestepping some regulatory safeguards and giving private families more leeway to profit from these new technologies.

How the Trump Family Could Influence Crypto Markets

Eric Trump has consistently voiced his father’s desire to make the U.S. the global leader in crypto policy, an ambition that seems to be materializing in this crypto-backed venture. He previously stated that his father “wants America to be the crypto capital of the world,” and it’s clear the Trump family is already positioning itself at the forefront of this revolution.

By backing USD1 as the stablecoin behind such a high-profile investment, the Trump family stands to profit not only from their direct involvement in the stablecoin market but also from the global reach of the MGX-Binance deal. The connection between the Trump family’s financial interests, foreign-backed funds, and the crypto market will undoubtedly continue to spark debates about regulation, transparency, and the ethical lines of financial dealings.

A New Era of Crypto, Politics, and Finance

This deal represents more than just a financial transaction—it marks the intersection of politics, global finance, and emerging digital currencies. As MGX, Binance, and the Trump family advance into the crypto space together, questions about the regulation and governance of cryptocurrencies will only intensify. As lawmakers grapple with these challenges, the Trump family’s role in the crypto world is likely to remain a topic of debate, not just for financial experts but also for those concerned about the influence of private interests on public policy.

Also Read: Trump’s Cryptocurrency Launch Gains Huge Attention Before His Inauguration

Among those now being mentioned more frequently are Kevin Warsh, a former Fed governor with past ties to Republican administrations, and Chris Waller, a current member of the Fed’s Board of Governors. Both have recently spoken on the state of the Fed, offering different views on its responsibilities and independence.

Kevin Warsh Calls for a Rethink of the Fed’s Role

In an April 25 speech in Washington, Kevin Warsh addressed concerns about how the Federal Reserve has been operating. He argued that the institution has stepped beyond its core mandate, describing many of its recent challenges as outcomes of internal misjudgments rather than external pressure.

Warsh said the Fed needs to realign itself with its original purpose, noting that its credibility has taken a hit. He stressed that the Fed’s independence is vital but should be based on responsible conduct rather than repeated declarations. “Independence is often cited when the Fed faces criticism, but that alone doesn’t justify its actions,” he remarked.

His comments reflected a viewpoint that the central bank should focus more strictly on price stability and employment, avoiding broader goals that risk diluting its effectiveness. Warsh is considered a strong candidate if political leadership changes hands before Powell’s term expires.

Chris Waller Highlights the Importance of Staying Focused

In a separate interview aired April 24, Fed Governor Chris Waller addressed the issue of political criticism head-on. Speaking calmly about the realities of central banking, Waller acknowledged that any person in the Fed chair role will face scrutiny, especially from political leaders.

“You know going into this job that criticism is part of the role,” Waller said. “If you’re not prepared for that, it’s probably not the right position.”

He underscored that despite external pressure, the Fed’s approach to policy must remain based on data and independent judgment. Waller emphasized the importance of keeping monetary decisions free from political interference, noting that this tradition must continue with whoever takes over next.

Trump’s Statements Put the Spotlight Back on the Fed

President Trump’s growing dissatisfaction with Powell has added urgency to the leadership discussion. At a recent rally in Michigan, he said, “I have a Fed person who is not really doing a good job,” and in follow-up comments, he said the Fed should lower interest rates.

Trump also hinted online in April that Powell should be removed before the end of his term, briefly raising concerns among investors. Although the White House reportedly looked into the possibility, Trump later said he wouldn’t attempt to remove Powell.

Even after softening his position, Trump continued to criticize the Fed’s decisions—especially its stance on interest rates—despite a strong jobs report suggesting that the current policy remains effective.

Fed Meeting Ahead as Public Interest Increases

The Federal Reserve’s next policy meeting is scheduled for the coming week, with Chair Powell set to address the media afterward. Market analysts expect the Fed to leave interest rates unchanged as officials continue monitoring inflation trends and labor market data.

With the central bank’s decisions under closer watch and its leadership now the subject of open debate, the institution finds itself in a period of heightened visibility. The remarks from Warsh and Waller offer an early look at the priorities and philosophies that may guide the next chair—whoever that may be.

Also Read: Trump May Replace Fed Chair Jerome Powell: Kevin Warsh and Waller Top List

The ruling, led by Ireland’s Data Protection Commission (DPC), found that TikTok failed to protect European users' data when it was accessed by employees in China. Regulators said the platform didn’t meet EU-level standards and didn’t fully inform users that their data might be available to teams based in China — a key violation of GDPR transparency rules.

Most of the fine — around $550 million — relates directly to these unlawful data transfers, with an additional $50 million tacked on for failing to clearly communicate where the data was going and who could access it.

TikTok responded quickly, saying it disagrees with the findings and will appeal. The company stressed that it has taken steps to strengthen data protections, pointing to “Project Clover,” an initiative aimed at improving how European user data is stored and accessed. Christine Grahn, TikTok’s Head of Public Policy in Europe, added that TikTok has never handed over user data to Chinese authorities and maintains that it follows strict legal procedures.

Still, regulators are pushing back. They said TikTok didn’t do enough to account for Chinese surveillance laws — like those covering anti-terrorism and counter-espionage — when evaluating the risk of data access from China. That lack of due diligence, they argue, puts users’ privacy at risk.

The fine comes with a warning: if TikTok doesn’t fix these issues within six months, the company could face restrictions on future data transfers to China, which could have a major impact on its European operations.

This isn’t TikTok’s first run-in with regulators. In 2023, it was fined $368 million for mishandling children’s data. That same year, Meta was fined a record $1.3 billion for similar data privacy violations related to Facebook.

The EU is clearly sending a message: companies doing business with European users need to respect the rules, or face consequences. For TikTok, this could mean not just financial penalties, but a real test of its global strategy at a time when trust, transparency, and data safety are more important than ever.

Also Read: TikTok: From Fun App to National Security Concern - A Complete Timeline

The company reported $392.4 million in revenue for the quarter, a 61% increase compared to the same period last year. This marks the third consecutive quarter in which Reddit’s year-over-year growth has exceeded 60%, a sign of continued momentum across its platform. CEO Steve Huffman attributed the growth to higher engagement and stronger visibility in search results, particularly through Reddit’s growing presence in Google Search.

In February, Reddit’s stock dropped sharply after Huffman noted traffic fluctuations caused by changes in Google’s search algorithm. Speaking to investors this week, he acknowledged that similar disruptions may occur again, as the online search landscape is still undergoing significant changes. Despite this, he said the company remains focused on long-term growth and sees these shifts as manageable.

Huffman also addressed the broader impact of AI on how people search online. He noted that while AI tools are beginning to reshape user behavior, Reddit continues to serve a different purpose by offering real, user-generated discussions. He described Reddit as a place where people look for honest opinions and diverse viewpoints—qualities that automated answers often lack.

He added that Reddit’s role as a source of shared knowledge and discussion has remained consistent through many changes in technology and culture, including the rise of smartphones and the pandemic. Huffman said the company is prepared to navigate whatever changes lie ahead and believes its communities will remain valuable to users in any digital environment.

Reddit’s earnings report comes during a busy earnings season and shows the platform’s ability to maintain steady growth, even as it faces challenges in how people find and use online content. With strong quarterly performance and stable leadership, Reddit appears focused on building long-term value in a rapidly evolving digital space.

Also Read: 3 High-Growth Tech Stocks That Could Outperform Cryptocurrencies

According to Freddie Mac, the average rate for a 30-year fixed mortgage fell to 6.76%, down from 6.81% last week. Rates on 15-year fixed mortgages also ticked down to 5.92% from 5.94%.

The drop in rates comes as the bond market shows signs of calming down. The yield on the 10-year Treasury note—often a key driver for mortgage rates—has dropped to about 4.2%, compared to 4.31% a week ago. This easing has helped bring a little more stability to mortgage pricing.

Why Rates Are Easing Now

Mortgage rates had been unpredictable in recent weeks, especially after President Trump announced a new round of tariffs in early April. But now, with the markets waiting to see what the Federal Reserve does next, things are settling a bit.

Kara Ng, a senior economist at Zillow Home Loans, says the lower rates might help some buyers who are stretching their budgets. “This slight drop could be just enough to help someone close to their limit buy a home,” she said. “For those ready to move forward, conditions are improving a little.”

Fed Expected to Hold Rates Steady

The Federal Reserve is widely expected to keep interest rates unchanged during its meeting next week. While the Fed doesn't directly set mortgage rates, its decisions—and the market’s expectations about them—play a big role.

Economic data is mixed. A report released Wednesday showed the U.S. economy shrank during the first quarter, but inflation came in hotter than many expected. This combination makes it hard to predict the Fed’s next steps.

Home Loan Activity Still Sluggish

Even with this week’s small rate drop, borrowing costs remain high compared to earlier this year. That’s keeping many would-be buyers on the sidelines during what is typically a busy season for real estate.

Applications for home purchases fell by 4% last week, according to the Mortgage Bankers Association. Refinancing activity also dropped 4%, showing that many homeowners aren’t finding current rates attractive enough to make a switch.

With mortgage rates still well above recent lows, buyers are proceeding cautiously. But for those close to making a move, this week’s decline could offer a little extra breathing room.

Also Read: Starter Homes in 233 U.S. Cities Now Cost $1 Million or More

What Is Yodlee and Why Is It Everywhere?

Yodlee has been around since 1999, and unless you're deep into fintech, you probably haven’t heard of it. Still, odds are you've already used it — maybe without realizing it. That’s because Yodlee connects apps and banks, making it possible for different financial platforms to access your account details (with your permission) and present your information in one place.

Owned by Envestnet since 2015, Yodlee plays a key role in helping apps and websites:

• Show your account balances

• Track spending and savings

• Link your credit cards or loans

• Build budgets

• Monitor investments

• Analyze your financial health

• Help manage debt

• Estimate your net worth

If you’ve used apps like Personal Capital or services from Chase and American Express, chances are Yodlee was the bridge connecting your data behind the scenes.

How Safe Is Yodlee?

Sharing your bank login info with a third-party service can feel risky — and that’s a valid concern. But Yodlee has a few serious measures in place to protect your privacy and your financial information:

• Your data is scrubbed of personal details when used for market insights.

• Independent security firms audit Yodlee’s systems regularly.

• A dedicated cybersecurity team works around the clock.

• 24/7 monitoring means suspicious activity is flagged quickly.

Still, no system is perfect. If you use an app that connects through Yodlee, it’s smart to read that app’s privacy policy. Know what you’re agreeing to, what data is being shared, and how you can revoke access if you ever decide to stop using the service.

Who Uses Yodlee?

Yodlee powers about 85% of the online tools that help people manage their personal finances. It’s trusted by banks, startups, and global fintech platforms alike. Some of the more familiar names include:

• American Express: Uses Yodlee for account linking and identity checks.

• Chase: Allows customers to connect their accounts to hundreds of apps via Yodlee.

• PayPal: Uses it to verify bank accounts and reduce fraud risk.

• Personal Capital: Relies on Yodlee to sync your financial accounts for easy tracking.

• Yahoo Finance's My Money: Uses it to help users view their net worth and spending habits.

Each company decides how it uses Yodlee’s services, so the features may look different depending on the app or site.

You may never see Yodlee’s name pop up in your favorite finance app — but it's likely running in the background. It helps apps pull together your bank accounts, investments, and credit cards so you can see your money clearly in one place. And while the platform is considered secure and widely used, it’s always a good idea to stay informed and cautious when giving access to your financial data.

Also Read: Get Free Crypto by Scanning Your Eyeballs—Sam Altman’s World Project Now Live in the U.S.!

In the past 24 hours, DOGE traded between 16 and 17 cents, mirroring the broader stability in the cryptocurrency market. Elon Musk, a vocal proponent of Dogecoin, has historically influenced the token’s value through his statements and business decisions.

According to a report by The Wall Street Journal, Tesla’s board had reached out to executive search firms over the past month, exploring potential successors to Musk. The move was reportedly prompted by concerns over Musk’s growing involvement with political matters, particularly his ties to the Trump administration. Board members reportedly asked Musk to commit publicly to dedicating more time to Tesla.

Tesla, however, firmly rejected the report. “This is absolutely false (and this was communicated to the media before the report was published),” the company posted on its official X account early Thursday. “The CEO of Tesla is Elon Musk, and the Board is highly confident in his ability to continue executing on the exciting growth plan ahead.”

Musk also responded personally, labeling the report a “deliberately false article.”

Tesla continues to accept Dogecoin for select merchandise purchases — the only cryptocurrency the company supports. Since early 2022, users have been able to connect their DOGE wallets directly to Tesla’s website and make payments to the automaker’s dedicated Dogecoin wallets. Despite the CEO speculation, Dogecoin’s price action remained calm, indicating investor confidence in Musk’s leadership and continued crypto engagement.

Also Read: Elon Musk and His Companies Face $2.37 Billion in Potential Federal Penalties, Senate Report Reveals

A cryptocurrency initiative co-founded by OpenAI CEO Sam Altman has officially launched in the United States, bringing its unique eyeball-scanning technology to the public. The project, developed by Tools for Humanity and previously known as Worldcoin, has now rebranded to "World" and is making its U.S. debut with iris-scanning devices and a cryptocurrency reward system.

Residents in cities including Atlanta, Austin, Los Angeles, Miami, Nashville, and San Francisco can now visit designated locations to have their irises scanned through a specialized device known as the "orb." Participants who verify their human identity through this biometric process are granted a digital identity, referred to as a World ID, and receive WLD, the project's native cryptocurrency. These services are accessible via the official World app.

The U.S. rollout marks a significant milestone for the project, which initially avoided launching domestically due to regulatory uncertainties. When Worldcoin debuted in July 2023, its creators opted to exclude the U.S. from the token distribution, citing legal ambiguity. In a joint statement at the time, Altman and Tools for Humanity CEO Alex Blania expressed hopes that the evolving regulatory environment would eventually allow broader participation.

That time appears to have arrived. With President Donald Trump back in office and former SEC Chair Gary Gensler having stepped down, the U.S. crypto regulatory landscape has shifted. Multiple crypto firms—including OKX and Nexo—have returned to the American market in recent months, crediting a more innovation-friendly atmosphere under the new administration. Nexo cofounder Antoni Trenchev praised the Trump administration’s approach, stating that the U.S. had once again become a hub for crypto innovation.

Under the current government, key regulatory agencies like the SEC and the Commodity Futures Trading Commission have scaled back their enforcement efforts targeting digital assets. The Justice Department has also shuttered its crypto-specific investigation unit. Notably, the SEC has dropped several high-profile cases involving major crypto firms such as Coinbase, Ripple, Uniswap, and Kraken.

Founded in 2019, World has positioned itself as one of the most ambitious ventures in the blockchain space. By using custom biometric hardware to verify users’ identities, the project aims to establish a global framework for proving human authenticity online—particularly critical as artificial intelligence becomes more sophisticated. At the same time, World seeks to distribute a decentralized currency as a basic financial right.

Despite raising hundreds of millions in funding, World has faced pushback from regulators and privacy advocates around the globe. With approximately 12 million people enrolled so far, the company has set its sights on scanning billions of individuals. Whether this recent U.S. expansion leads to widespread adoption remains to be seen. The intersection of digital identity, privacy, and cryptocurrency is still a topic of active debate—and World is placing itself at the center of that conversation.

World Project FAQs

Also Read: Adobe Rolls Out 'Do Not Train' Tag to Block AI From Using Your Photos

At the center of the legal dispute is Trump’s use of the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (IEEPA), a 1977 law originally designed to give presidents specific powers during true national emergencies. Trump has relied on IEEPA as the legal foundation for his aggressive tariff strategy, declaring multiple national emergencies tied to immigration, drug trafficking, and trade deficits.

Basis of the Legal Challenge

IEEPA doesn’t explicitly authorize the president to impose tariffs, nor does it prohibit them. However, critics argue that Trump’s interpretation stretches the law beyond its intent. The legal requirement to declare a national emergency has become a key issue, with at least eight such declarations already made this year to justify the tariffs.

Trump’s most recent move, the “Liberation Day” tariffs announced in April, cited persistent trade deficits as an emergency—a claim that many legal scholars and economists find unconvincing. According to legal analyst Scott Anderson of the Brookings Institution, “The administration’s broad use of IEEPA strains the definition of a national emergency and invites legal scrutiny.”

Lawsuits Aim to Narrow Presidential Authority

Seven lawsuits have been filed so far, including ones led by the states of California and Oregon. These cases argue that:

• IEEPA does not grant authority to impose tariffs,

• The declared emergencies are not genuine, and

• The president is overstepping constitutional limits.

While legal experts say these are complex claims with no guaranteed outcome, plaintiffs may gain traction by showing that the tariffs are not reasonably linked to actual emergencies.

Behind the scenes, several of the suits are supported by well-funded organizations able to pursue the cases through lengthy court battles. The involvement of state governments brings more weight to the legal pushback, as it places public resources behind efforts to protect individuals and businesses impacted by the tariffs.

Business Concerns and Economic Fallout

Many in the business and economic community argue that the real harm comes not from trade deficits, but from the tariffs themselves. Before Trump resumed office, the U.S. economy was relatively strong, and the trade deficit was largely seen as a reflection of global market dynamics rather than a crisis.

Trump views the $1.2 trillion goods trade deficit as a failure that must be corrected. However, most economists see it as part of normal trade flows—where Americans buy foreign goods and foreign investors, in turn, reinvest those dollars in the U.S. economy.

Since the latest tariffs were introduced, the average import tax has jumped from 2.5% to 27%, contributing to rising costs and a notable increase in recession risks. Forecasts show that the odds of a U.S. recession have risen to over 60%, up sharply since Trump took office again.

Legal Outcomes Could Vary

Courts are expected to examine whether Trump’s declared emergencies justify such sweeping economic measures under IEEPA. They are less likely to weigh in on the broader economic effects and more likely to focus on the legal and procedural foundations of the tariffs.

If a judge rules against the administration and issues an injunction, some tariffs could be paused as early as this summer. Such a ruling would represent a significant obstacle for the White House. In response, the administration would likely request fast-track consideration by the Supreme Court.

If the courts uphold Trump’s actions, the plaintiffs could appeal. However, the Supreme Court is not required to hear the case, particularly if lower courts support the administration’s position.

Some outcomes may only apply in specific regions or to specific plaintiffs, creating a fragmented set of trade rules that could complicate the business environment even further.

Legal Pressure May Reshape Trade Strategy

Even if some tariffs are overturned, Trump may continue using IEEPA—but in a more restrained and targeted way. Legal experts believe the administration could attempt to build more detailed emergency declarations that better connect to the trade measures being applied. This would make future tariffs more legally defensible.

The legal pressure is growing. The outcome of these lawsuits will not only affect billions in trade but could also set long-term limits on how far any president can go when invoking emergency powers for economic policy.

Also Read: Trump’s Tariffs Backfire as Apple and Big Tech Bet on India Over the U.S.

1. Return of Capital Inflows into Spot Bitcoin ETFs

One of the primary factors behind Bitcoin’s price increase is the return of significant capital flows into spot Bitcoin Exchange-Traded Funds (ETFs). These funds directly hold Bitcoin and are often seen as a reliable indicator of investor sentiment.

In recent weeks, Bitcoin ETFs have experienced a substantial surge in investments. On April 25, for example, the iShares Bitcoin Trust saw nearly $1 billion in inflows. Between April 21 and April 25, the total inflow into spot Bitcoin ETFs reached approximately $3 billion. This surge in investment suggests a renewed confidence in Bitcoin and has played a crucial role in driving up its price.

2. Shift in Investor Perception: Bitcoin as a Long-Term Asset

Another significant factor behind Bitcoin’s price rise is a shift in how investors perceive the cryptocurrency. Once regarded primarily as a speculative and volatile asset, Bitcoin is increasingly being viewed as a long-term store of value, similar to gold.

As global economic uncertainty continues to rise, many investors are seeking ways to protect their wealth from inflation and market volatility. Gold has traditionally served as a safe-haven asset in such times, but Bitcoin is now being considered by some as a modern alternative, often referred to as “digital gold.” With its inherent scarcity, decentralized nature, and fixed supply, Bitcoin is gaining appeal as a hedge against economic instability.

3. Supply Constraints Pushing Up Demand

The third factor contributing to Bitcoin’s recent price surge is the ongoing supply shortage. Bitcoin’s total supply is capped at 21 million coins, and a significant portion of these coins is already lost or inaccessible. Estimates suggest that between 3 and 4 million Bitcoins are permanently out of circulation, further limiting the available supply.

This restricted supply has led to an increase in demand, particularly from institutional investors, including those managing Bitcoin ETFs. As these investors continue to purchase Bitcoin, they are drawing from the limited supply available on cryptocurrency exchanges, which in turn drives up the price.

Can Bitcoin Sustain the Rally?

The combination of renewed inflows into Bitcoin ETFs, a shift in investor mindset, and a constrained supply of Bitcoin has helped push its price above the $95,000 mark. These factors suggest that the cryptocurrency’s current rally may be sustained in the near term.

The key question is whether Bitcoin can maintain its momentum and continue to rise. If the trends of strong ETF inflows and increased demand persist, Bitcoin could potentially reach new highs, surpassing the $100,000 mark. Investors and market analysts will be closely monitoring the situation as Bitcoin continues to demonstrate its potential as both a speculative asset and a store of value in times of economic uncertainty.

Also Read: Lost Money in Crypto Bankruptcies? 3 Essential Steps to Recover Your Funds

While there are no guarantees that all your losses can be recovered, following a clear process can improve your chances of getting something back. Below are the necessary steps you need to take to protect your investments, gather the right documentation, and possibly recover funds.

Step 1: File a Bankruptcy Claim Immediately

Once a crypto platform enters bankruptcy, a legal process is initiated to determine how its remaining assets will be distributed. As an investor, you must file a claim in order to participate in this process, even if you're unsure of your standing or the exact amount you lost.

In many crypto bankruptcies, users are classified as unsecured creditors. This places them at the back of the line after creditors with higher priority, making it essential to act quickly. Some companies provide dedicated portals for submitting claims, such as those set up by FTX, Celsius, and Voyager Digital.

Key Filing Considerations:

• Check the Official Claims Portal: For each crypto platform in bankruptcy, the court-appointed trustee typically sets up a claims portal where users can file their claims. Ensure you are filing through the official channel.

• Adhere to Filing Deadlines: Bankruptcy filings are time-sensitive, with some platforms having short deadlines for claim submissions. Don’t risk losing your chance by waiting.

• File Even if You’re Unsure: If you’re uncertain about the amount or the proper documentation, it’s still important to file your claim. The process can be corrected later, but failing to file may mean missing out completely.

Step 2: Document Every Transaction and Interaction

Good record-keeping can significantly strengthen your case. As seen in the 2022 collapse of FTX, many investors failed to track their crypto holdings as the platform’s bankruptcy progressed, which hurt their chances of recovering their funds.

To improve your odds, document all your transactions, deposits, withdrawals, and any communication from the platform. This will provide concrete evidence of your claims when the time comes for the bankruptcy proceedings or legal actions.

What to Keep:

• Transaction Records: This includes transfers to and from the platform, wallet addresses, and the amounts involved. This data will be critical when making a claim.

• Email Confirmations: Any official notifications you received, such as deposit or withdrawal confirmations, account updates, and policy changes, should be saved.

• Account Screenshots: Save screenshots of your platform accounts showing your balance, deposits, withdrawals, and transaction history.

• Cross-Check Statements: If the platform or trustee provides any official account summaries, compare them with your records and report any discrepancies immediately.

A thorough documentation trail can not only assist in bankruptcy claims but also become an invaluable resource in potential legal actions or for tax filings down the line.

Step 3: Consult Legal and Financial Experts

The complexities of crypto bankruptcies, especially when they involve international jurisdictions and evolving regulations, make it essential to seek professional help. Crypto regulations, though expanding, remain underdeveloped in many regions, and the process of recovering funds from a bankruptcy can be more complicated than traditional financial structures.

Legal and financial professionals with expertise in bankruptcy law and crypto assets can offer crucial insights, guide you through claims filing, and help you understand your rights as an investor.

Why Consult Professionals:

• Legal Support for Claims: If you’re unsure how to proceed with the claims process, a lawyer specializing in bankruptcy and digital assets can ensure you meet all requirements and deadlines.

• Class-Action Suits: If your losses are substantial, joining a class-action lawsuit might be an option. Legal professionals can advise you on whether this is the right course of action for your situation.

• Avoiding Scams: After a crypto platform’s collapse, scams promising quick recovery are rampant. Experts can help you identify and avoid fraudulent recovery services.

• Tax Considerations: Professionals can help you understand the tax implications of lost crypto assets. In some cases, losses can be offset against gains in future years.

If you’ve lost a significant amount, seeking legal advice from professionals with experience in crypto and bankruptcy law could prove invaluable. Additionally, watch out for "recovery scams" where fraudsters prey on vulnerable investors.

Understanding Crypto Ownership in Bankruptcy

One of the key questions for many investors is who owns the crypto held on the platform in the event of bankruptcy. The answer depends on how the platform holds the assets. In many cases, if the platform manages the crypto, users may be classified as unsecured creditors, which means they rank behind other creditors, such as those holding secured claims.

This hierarchy of creditors can significantly affect the amount of repayment you’ll receive. If the platform is deemed to own the crypto, there’s a higher likelihood that you will only recover a small fraction of your initial investment.

Tax Considerations When Dealing with Crypto Bankruptcies

Another important factor is how the bankruptcy will affect your taxes. In the U.S., the IRS does not allow tax deductions for losses during ongoing bankruptcy proceedings. Therefore, you won’t be able to claim a loss until the platform’s assets are deemed worthless and the bankruptcy is finalized.

Once the bankruptcy is resolved, and the assets are considered to have no value, you may be able to offset your losses against other gains or even ordinary income, up to $3,000. Any losses exceeding that amount can be carried forward to future years.

Steps for Tax Filing After Bankruptcy:

• Gather Documentation: Keep all records related to your crypto account, including transaction histories, account balances, and any formal notifications regarding the bankruptcy.

• Tax Loss Offsetting: Once your assets are written off as worthless, consult with a tax advisor to determine how to handle the losses. You may be able to offset your losses against gains in the same year or carry them over to future tax years.

Though the road to recovery can be lengthy, having accurate records and working with legal or financial professionals can help you navigate this difficult situation more effectively.

Act Quickly and Stay Diligent

Dealing with crypto platform bankruptcies can feel like navigating a maze, especially with the volatility and unpredictability that characterizes the industry. However, taking prompt action and staying organized can improve your chances of recovering some of your lost assets. The process may not be quick or straightforward, but understanding your rights, filing timely claims, and gathering the necessary documentation are essential steps in ensuring you’re not left empty-handed.

Crypto regulations are still evolving, which means there may be changes in how bankruptcy proceedings affect consumers and investors. Keeping track of legal updates and working with experts in crypto law will help you avoid unnecessary delays and potential setbacks. Be cautious of scams that target vulnerable investors, and be sure to explore every possible route to recover your losses. The more proactive and informed you are, the better equipped you’ll be to navigate this complex situation and safeguard any remaining assets.

Also Read: 3 Cryptos to Buy Now Before Prices Soar — Don’t Miss Out!

According to the latest release from China’s National Bureau of Statistics, the official manufacturing Purchasing Managers’ Index (PMI) dropped to 49.0 in April—its lowest level in 16 months. A reading below 50 signals contraction. A separate report from Caixin, which tracks private-sector firms more closely, showed a dip to 50.4 from 51.2 in March, reflecting softening conditions across small and mid-sized manufacturers .

The drop comes just weeks after Washington sharply raised tariffs on a broad range of Chinese imports, with duties now reaching up to 145% on some goods. In retaliation, Beijing imposed duties as high as 125% on selected U.S. products, while also tightening export controls on critical minerals used in high-tech industries such as electric vehicle batteries and semiconductors .

Business Slowdown Spreads to Port Operations and Global Logistics

The economic effects are spreading beyond China’s factories. At major shipping hubs like the Port of Los Angeles and Long Beach, inbound container volumes from China are expected to fall by more than one-third in May. Terminal operators have already canceled roughly 25% of scheduled vessel arrivals, according to shipping officials, which is putting pressure on warehouse operations and transport jobs across the West Coast .

Retailers in the U.S. who rely heavily on Chinese imports are now facing difficult decisions. Many had accelerated purchases in March to beat the tariffs, leading to a temporary surge in Chinese exports—up 12.5% year-over-year that month. But with new duties in full effect, companies like Walmart and Target are now re-evaluating sourcing strategies and supply timelines .

Retailers absorbing short-term cost increases may not be able to hold off price hikes for long. Several U.S. trade groups warn that everyday goods—ranging from shoes and apparel to electronics—will soon reflect higher import costs at checkout counters.

U.S. Consumers Start to Feel the Impact

Higher tariffs are already pushing up prices across several product categories. Based on current cost projections:

• Imported shoes from China could see an 80% price increase compared to early last year

• Apparel is rising by 60–70% depending on the material and brand

• Smartphones, tablets, and laptops could cost 15–25% more by summer

Families and small businesses will likely be hit hardest, particularly those already struggling with inflation in groceries, rent, and utilities. The added strain from tariff-induced cost increases could lead to reduced spending in other parts of the economy.

Growth Forecasts Trimmed on Both Sides of the Pacific

China’s economy grew by 5.4% year-over-year in the first quarter of 2025, buoyed in part by companies rushing orders ahead of the tariff hike. However, several financial institutions have since downgraded their forecasts for the rest of the year. Capital Economics now expects China to grow only 3.5% in 2025—well below the government’s target of “around 5%.”

The U.S. is facing its own set of economic headwinds. The International Monetary Fund (IMF) recently lowered its global growth estimate for 2025 to 2.8%, down from 3.3% projected in January. The slowdown is being attributed in part to prolonged trade tensions, which are not only disrupting traditional supply chains but also deterring new investment .

Businesses Adjust to the New Trade Reality

Amid the uncertainty, manufacturers and importers are making changes to reduce their dependence on U.S.-China trade routes. Many firms are shifting production to Vietnam, India, and Mexico—countries less directly exposed to current tariff regimes. Others are renegotiating contracts and exploring ways to adjust product specifications in order to qualify for lower-duty classifications.

Shipping companies, meanwhile, are bracing for long-term disruptions. Some freight forwarders have begun advising clients to plan orders three to four months in advance, citing customs clearance delays and volatile shipping rates.

While officials in Beijing continue to express confidence in their ability to cushion the economy, the April data makes clear that trade pressures are starting to filter through to production lines, labor markets, and investment decisions. Analysts note that while China still maintains several stimulus options—such as tax rebates and lending support—external demand will remain a major concern in the second half of 2025.

Also Read: U.S. Tariffs Spark Market Fears as Trade War Grows with Canada, Mexico, and China

The e-commerce company responded Tuesday after Punchbowl News cited an unnamed source claiming that Amazon was preparing to disclose how much of each product’s price was due to tariffs. In a swift rebuttal, Amazon said that its Haul storefront — a new budget-focused product line targeting items under $20 — briefly considered the idea but never moved forward with implementation.

“There was internal discussion, but it was never approved and is not going to happen,” said Tim Doyle, an Amazon spokesperson, in a statement.

Haul, launched last year, is Amazon’s competitive answer to fast-growing Chinese platforms like Temu and Shein, which have made significant inroads in the U.S. market by offering low-cost consumer goods.

Despite Amazon's clear denial, the Trump administration weighed in, treating the report as an official action. White House Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt accused Amazon of making a “political statement” and went so far as to frame it as “un-American,” referencing the company’s alleged ties to Chinese interests. She did not provide details about any formal discussions between Amazon and the administration.

The strong reaction drew attention to growing political scrutiny over U.S. trade policy and how companies communicate price impacts to customers. While the tariffs imposed by the Trump administration are aimed at recalibrating trade relationships, businesses and consumers alike have felt the pressure through rising prices. Economists have also raised concerns that the prolonged and unpredictable nature of these tariffs could exacerbate inflation and limit spending power.

Meanwhile, some of Amazon’s rivals — including Temu and Shein — have already adjusted their pricing to account for increased costs, passing the burden on to shoppers.

As for Amazon founder Jeff Bezos, his presence at President Trump’s inauguration was noted as a gesture of neutrality in earlier years. Whether that relationship has changed remains uncertain, as officials declined to comment.

The speculation over tariff transparency and Amazon’s quick dismissal highlights how sensitive the pricing conversation has become, especially when mixed with political narratives and trade policy shifts.

Also Read: Amazon’s New AI Tools Make Shopping and Health Advice Easier Than Ever!

The offer comes as both nations look to speed up a deal that could open new markets for Indian exports and reduce the threat of the U.S.'s proposed reciprocal tariffs. The MFN clause would guarantee that the U.S. won’t be left behind in future trade negotiations, ensuring equal access to trade benefits India may offer to other partners. This proposal is viewed as a step toward solidifying India's economic position while ensuring the U.S. remains a key partner in its trade strategy.

Why India Is Willing to Offer More

India’s willingness to offer this kind of preferential treatment is not a small concession. The MFN clause has been used sparingly by India in the past, but in this case, officials believe it’s essential for creating a sustainable and long-term agreement. The goal is clear: by offering the U.S. the most favorable treatment, India is ensuring that the terms won’t be eroded by future deals with other countries.

An Indian government official shared, “This clause is important for India as it protects the integrity of the deal we’re building with the U.S. It ensures that we maintain strong terms even as we negotiate with other nations."

The MFN clause essentially guarantees that no other country will have better tariff terms with India than the U.S., putting America on equal footing with other trading partners. This is seen as a win-win for both sides, as it secures favorable terms for the U.S. while also ensuring India maintains control over its trade deals.

Trade Talks: India’s Flexible Approach

India’s approach to the trade negotiations with the U.S. has been one of flexibility and compromise. While India is committed to securing a deal, it’s also keen to ensure that the terms align with its long-term interests. To that end, India has offered to significantly reduce tariffs on key U.S. exports like frozen meat, poultry, and fruits, many of which currently face high tariffs ranging from 30% to 100%. India is proposing to lower these duties to a more manageable 0%-5% range.

This move is part of India’s broader strategy to offer concessions on nearly 90% of tariff lines, which could be implemented almost immediately. The remaining items, particularly agricultural goods and military equipment, may be dealt with in later phases of the negotiation.

One of the Indian officials mentioned, "India is offering substantial tariff reductions on U.S. goods in a way that benefits both sides. This is an opportunity for the U.S. to expand its exports into India and for us to boost our own economic growth."

What India Wants in Return

While India is extending these offers, it’s also ensuring that its interests are protected. One of the country’s main priorities is securing better treatment for labor-intensive sectors like textiles, toys, and leather goods. These sectors provide millions of jobs and have a significant role in India’s export economy. In return for offering concessions on U.S. exports, India wants to see favorable tariff treatment for these sectors, which are critical to its industrial growth.

India is also asking for long-term assurances from the U.S. on key industries, especially pharmaceuticals and industrial components. By securing preferential treatment in these sectors, India aims to become an essential part of the U.S. supply chain, contributing to both its manufacturing capabilities and pharmaceutical market needs.

India's Strategic Positioning for the Future

In these negotiations, India is also mindful of its position as a global player. The country is actively positioning itself as a reliable partner in the global economy, especially in light of the ongoing trade war between the U.S. and China. India’s trade offer is viewed as an opportunity to fill the gaps left by China, particularly in areas like pharmaceuticals, industrial machinery, and textiles.

Furthermore, India is keen to take advantage of trade opportunities that emerge from China's shifting stance in the global market. By positioning itself as a strong and reliable trade partner, India is hoping to become a preferred supplier to the U.S. in industries that were previously dominated by China.

What’s Next for India-U.S. Trade Talks?

With both sides eager to wrap up discussions, India and the U.S. are on the verge of an agreement that could reshape their economic relationship for years to come. If the deal moves forward, India’s offer of the MFN clause could set a new precedent for trade agreements, signaling that India is open to flexible and long-term partnerships.

As negotiations continue, both nations remain focused on ironing out the details, particularly around agriculture and technology-related sectors. India has shown that it is prepared to be flexible and responsive to U.S. concerns, making it clear that it values the relationship and is willing to adjust terms for mutual benefit.

In the coming weeks, these negotiations could lead to a groundbreaking deal between two of the world’s largest economies. The outcome of this deal will not only impact the U.S. and India but could also set the stage for future trade agreements in the region.

India’s proposal to include a “forward most-favoured-nation” clause in its trade deal with the U.S. marks a significant shift in the country’s approach to trade. By offering the U.S. the best terms available, India is ensuring that it remains a key partner for Washington while securing long-term economic benefits. With substantial tariff reductions, improved access to key sectors, and strategic positioning for future trade growth, India is positioning itself as a leader in the global trade arena. As talks progress, both nations will be looking to finalize terms that benefit them now and in the years to come.

Also Read: Modi US Visit 2025 Focuses on Trade Defense and Energy Talks with Trump

Under the leadership of CEO Alex Chriss—who stepped in late last year—PayPal is pulling back from growth-at-any-cost tactics and focusing on profitability through smarter execution.

“We had a great start to the year and our strategy is working,” Chriss said. “This is our fifth straight quarter of profitable growth.”

Earnings Top Expectations as Spending Cuts Pay Off

For the first three months of 2025, PayPal reported adjusted earnings of $1.33 per share, beating analysts' projections of $1.16. Revenue inched up to $7.79 billion, while total payment volume rose 4%.

Behind the numbers, a sharper focus on cost control played a big role. The company cut operating expenses by 4%, bringing them down to $6.26 billion. These savings are being redirected toward automation, product enhancements, and more targeted investments.

This financial discipline has helped PayPal maintain its profit guidance for the full year, aiming for adjusted earnings between $4.95 and $5.10 per share—even as trade tensions continue to create business uncertainty.

Branded Checkout Shows Momentum as New Features Roll Out

One of PayPal’s biggest priorities remains its branded checkout services, which include the PayPal wallet and Venmo. This area has been under pressure from competitors like Apple and Google, but the latest results show signs of improvement.

In Q1, branded checkout volume rose 6%, excluding the impact of leap year timing—slightly better than last year’s 5% gain.

PayPal is also launching updates to its checkout platform, including Fastlane, a new guest checkout experience designed to make online payments faster and more seamless. The company says the improved interface is already showing better user engagement and higher merchant satisfaction.

Venmo Still Growing, But Monetization Takes Time

While Venmo remains a widely used app, its ability to generate revenue has lagged. PayPal is working to change that by pushing Venmo further into business transactions and e-commerce.

Upcoming updates are expected to help small businesses accept payments through Venmo and allow the app to handle more recurring transactions, such as subscriptions or service-based invoices.

The goal, according to company insiders, is to turn Venmo into more than just a peer-to-peer payment tool and make it a dependable revenue stream over the long term.

Investor Pressure Persists Despite Strong Start

Even with a solid quarter in the books, PayPal’s stock dipped 1% in pre-market trading and is down 24% since the start of the year. Much of that pressure comes from concerns about slowing branded growth and the increasing reach of Apple Pay and Google Pay.

Still, some analysts say PayPal is finally finding its footing. The company is avoiding major risks and instead tightening up operations, improving product experience, and aiming for more consistent performance.

“We’re not chasing quick wins anymore,” said one person close to the leadership team. “This is about fixing what matters, not just adding features.”

Also Read: Coinbase Removes Fees for PayPal's PYUSD to Boost Crypto Payments

In one of his earliest actions after returning to the White House, Trump signed an executive order to create a Strategic Bitcoin Reserve, officially treating Bitcoin as a major national asset. The move places Bitcoin in the same legal and economic category as traditional commodities like oil and gold, ending years of regulatory uncertainty.

Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick, speaking about the rollout, credited David Sacks with playing a major role in accelerating the plan. Lutnick emphasized that recognizing Bitcoin as a commodity provides clarity to investors and businesses, allowing for more confident participation in the crypto sector.

Expansion Beyond Bitcoin: Ethereum, Solana, XRP Brought Into Focus

The Strategic Bitcoin Reserve already holds 200,000 BTC, mainly consisting of Bitcoin seized in past enforcement actions. In addition to Bitcoin, a second reserve is being built to include other established cryptocurrencies such as Ethereum, Solana, and XRP.

Officials say these reserves are intended to strengthen America's financial position and to ensure that the U.S. remains competitive in digital asset innovation, especially as rival nations continue to ramp up their crypto strategies.

Executive Orders Supporting Public Blockchains and Mining Activity

Beyond creating crypto reserves, Trump signed executive orders supporting the use of public blockchain networks for both private and government purposes. His administration also gave new protections to cryptocurrency mining operations within U.S. borders, making it clear that mining would be viewed as a legitimate part of the national energy and economic policy.

Separately, Trump signed an order that prohibits the development of a U.S. central bank digital currency (CBDC). The administration said that creating a government-backed digital dollar could give too much control over individual financial transactions, a direction Trump strongly opposes.

Trump and Melania’s Private Crypto Initiatives Draw Attention

Trump and First Lady Melania Trump have also taken personal steps into cryptocurrency markets, launching the TRUMPand MELANIA meme coins shortly before the inauguration. Their participation in crypto projects such as World Liberty Finance has generated debate, with critics raising concerns about potential conflicts between private financial interests and public policy.

However, Trump's direct involvement sends a clear signal: he sees digital assets not just as a policy issue but as an important part of America's future economy.

A New Direction for Cryptocurrency Policy in Washington

Since the beginning of his second term, Trump’s actions have created significant momentum around cryptocurrencies inside the U.S. Regulatory uncertainty that once stalled digital asset growth is now being addressed through clearer rules and federal support.

Market observers note that Bitcoin’s regulatory status as a commodity could attract more traditional investors and push new companies to base operations inside the United States. Trump’s decisions over the past three months suggest that digital assets will remain a central part of economic discussions for the rest of his presidency.

Also Read: Trump’s New Tariffs Are Crushing These 2 Cryptos – Is Your Portfolio Safe?

The 43-page memo, released Monday by the committee’s Democratic staff led by Senator Richard Blumenthal (D-Conn.), highlights the serious conflict-of-interest risks tied to Musk’s role as an advisor to Trump’s so-called Department of Government Efficiency — nicknamed "DOGE."

Drawing from government records, media reports, and its own research, the report found Musk and his companies were linked to 65 potential or active enforcement actions from 11 federal agencies as of January 20. Of those, 40 casesinvolved financial risks totaling more than $2.37 billion.

Mr. Musk has taken a chainsaw to the federal government with no apparent regard for the law or for the people who depend on it," the memo stated. "The common thread behind many of Musk’s moves seems to be enriching himself and removing anything that slows down his business interests.

Billions in Federal Support at Stake

The memo points out that Musk’s businesses — including Tesla, SpaceX, Neuralink, The Boring Co., and x.AI Corp. — have collectively received over $38 billion in government contracts, loans, subsidies, and tax breaks over the last two decades.

As of last week, SpaceX alone held $10.1 billion worth of active federal contracts.

The report warns that Musk's influence over federal operations could compromise the integrity of government decisions. It urges President Trump and federal regulators to "take coordinated action to address Elon Musk’s threat to the integrity of federal governance."

Musk, White House Push Back Against Claims

White House Communications Director Steven Cheung sharply rejected the report, calling the allegations "baseless" and criticizing Senator Blumenthal directly.

"Mr. Musk has never used his position for personal or financial gain," Cheung said in a statement. "This is just another example of Trump Derangement Syndrome."

In a previous joint interview with President Trump on Fox News, Musk said he would recuse himself from any government matters if a conflict of interest arose. Trump added, "He won’t be involved."

More Investigations on the Horizon

Senator Blumenthal has also sent formal letters to Musk’s companies, including Tesla, SpaceX, Neuralink, The Boring Co., and x.AI Corp., demanding transparency about any pending federal investigations or lawsuits involving them.

The letters specifically asked what internal steps the companies had taken to address Musk’s potential conflicts of interest.

As of now, none of the companies — or the Department of Government Efficiency — have responded to media requests for comment.

Also Read: Elon Musk Reduces DOGE Role to Refocus on Tesla; Stock Soars 7%​

Layer 1 Blockchain Networks: Ethereum, Solana, and Others Face Big Losses

Layer 1 blockchains like Ethereum (ETH), Solana (SOL), and Cardano (ADA), which are among the most well-known cryptocurrencies, have seen their prices drop significantly. Despite their large market caps (all worth over $9 billion), they have not been immune to the effects of the tariffs.

Ethereum, the second-largest cryptocurrency by market value, has dropped nearly 46% this year, making it the worst performer in this group. Solana and Cardano have also struggled, with each down by around 20%. While these coins are still prominent in the crypto market, investor confidence in them has been shaken.

Despite this, Ethereum remains an important player. It has strong backing from the U.S. government, which included it in the U.S. Digital Asset Stockpile in March. Additionally, members of the Trump family have shown public support for Ethereum, giving it some credibility. But its current slump shows that even well-established cryptocurrencies aren't immune to market shifts.

Meme Coins: Dogecoin and Shiba Inu See Huge Losses

Meme coins, which are often seen as high-risk investments, have been hit even harder by the new tariffs. Dogecoin (DOGE), the largest meme coin, has fallen by 45% this year, while Shiba Inu (SHIB) is down 37%. Even smaller meme coins like Pepe (PEPE) have dropped more than 50%.

The Trump meme coin (TRUMP), a new addition to the meme coin space, has seen a staggering 84% drop since its launch earlier this year. This sharp decline highlights the waning interest in meme coins, which were already considered volatile and speculative investments before the tariffs.

As the market sentiment shifts, meme coins have become a risky bet, and many investors are steering clear of them. Even well-known figures in the crypto space, like Cathie Wood of Ark Invest, have suggested that most meme coins will likely become worthless in the near future.

Should You Buy These Cryptos Now?

With many cryptocurrencies down by 20% to 50% in recent months, some investors may see this as an opportunity to buy low. But with the ongoing market uncertainty, it’s important to proceed with caution.

One crypto that may be worth watching is Solana. Despite the market downturn, Solana’s blockchain is seeing increasing activity, and it’s starting to challenge Ethereum as a leading blockchain. In 2023, Solana saw an impressive price increase of over 900%, showing its potential to bounce back.

However, it’s important to remember that the current economic climate is tough, with recession concerns, inflation, and geopolitical tensions making investors wary of cryptocurrencies in general. For now, Bitcoin remains a safer choice for those looking for a stable investment, as it has historically performed better in times of economic uncertainty.

Also Read: Bitcoin Gains Ground as XRP and Ethereum Face Growing Market Pressure

As part of the plan, IBM will direct more than $30 billion toward research and development projects that support the manufacturing of quantum computers. The company currently manages one of the largest fleets of quantum systems globally and confirmed it will continue designing, building, and assembling these machines in the United States.

The investment is intended to expand IBM’s technical capabilities while also increasing its domestic production footprint. The company emphasized that growing its U.S.-based manufacturing operations is a priority, particularly for advanced technologies like quantum computing.

Market Reaction

Shares of IBM closed at $232.41 on April 25, gaining 1.34% for the day. The stock showed continued strength in pre-market trading, reflecting positive sentiment following the company’s announcement.

Strategic Importance

IBM’s decision to expand research and manufacturing in the U.S. comes at a time when strengthening domestic technology production has become a national priority. By building quantum systems in the United States, IBM aims to support job creation in high-skilled sectors and contribute to maintaining the country’s leadership in critical technologies.

Quantum computing is viewed as a key area for future innovation, capable of advancing industries like pharmaceuticals, logistics, and materials science. IBM’s new investment signals a longer-term plan to develop this technology for both commercial and governmental use.

The company did not provide a detailed breakdown of where the investments will be made but noted that U.S. facilities will remain the core centers for quantum system production.

Also Read: Apple Joins U.S. Effort for Responsible AI Use, White House Announces

Uncertainty surrounding President Donald Trump’s policies — from tariffs to tax reforms — has added fresh worries to a market already balancing inflation risks and slowing economic growth. Investors are increasingly demanding higher yields to hold longer-term bonds, challenging the U.S. government's ability to borrow at low costs.

The term premium, the extra yield investors seek to guard against risks over time, has climbed to one of its highest points since 2014. Analysts expect this trend to persist even if some immediate concerns over trade policy ease.

Caution Deepens Across Bond Markets

Even though investors are not abandoning Treasuries entirely, many are adjusting their positions to avoid long exposure. Recent auctions of 30-year bonds showed continued demand — but only at sharply higher yields compared to past sales, revealing a more cautious stance.

Major asset managers are favoring shorter maturities. Firms such as Pacific Investment Management Co. and Vanguard Group are focusing on five- to ten-year bonds, where they feel more comfortable balancing return against risk. Inflation-adjusted yields on 30-year bonds recently touched levels not seen since the 2008 financial crisis before easing slightly.

Yields on 30-year nominal debt rose four basis points to 4.74% on Monday, breaking a four-day streak of declines and reflecting continued unease about the long-term outlook.

Vanguard analysts pointed out that the term premium, while elevated, could rise even further if federal deficits continue to widen without a clear fiscal plan. The firm expects U.S. economic growth to slow to below 1% this year, a pace not seen since the pandemic lockdowns of 2020, which could put additional strain on government budgets.

Higher Borrowing Costs Reach Beyond Wall Street

The impact of rising long-term yields goes far beyond investors. Higher Treasury yields often push up mortgage rates, raising the cost of buying homes and making credit more expensive for businesses. For consumers, this can translate into higher loan costs across mortgages, auto loans, and credit cards.

For the federal government, the stakes are even higher. Every small increase in long-term rates adds billions to annual debt servicing costs, which are already projected to exceed $1 trillion this year. Without a credible plan to control deficits, the rising cost of borrowing could weigh heavily on future government spending decisions.

Treasury’s Next Moves Under Scrutiny

This week, attention turns to the U.S. Treasury’s quarterly refunding announcement. Market expectations are for steady auction sizes over the next three months. However, any surprise increase in debt issuance could unsettle investors already wary of absorbing higher supply.

Meanwhile, Washington’s ongoing debates over how to fund recent tax cuts without deepening the deficit could influence market sentiment further. If the government signals more aggressive borrowing without matching spending restraint, yields could push even higher.

George Catrambone of DWS Americas noted that greater clarity on trade and fiscal issues could ease some of the pressure on long-term yields, but not return them to the low levels seen over the past decade. He stressed that fiscal challenges are likely to remain a constant factor weighing on bond valuations.

Key Developments Investors Are Watching

Several important economic reports and events could influence bond markets in the days ahead:

• April 28: Dallas Fed manufacturing activity report

• April 29: Advance goods trade balance, wholesale and retail inventories, housing data, consumer confidence measures

• April 30: First-quarter GDP, personal income and spending, inflation updates (PCE price index), pending home sales

• May 1: New jobless claims, manufacturing activity reports

• May 2: Non-farm payrolls, factory and durable goods orders

Additionally, the Federal Reserve has entered its communication blackout period before its May 7 policy decision. Traders will be closely monitoring the Treasury’s auction schedule and the broader supply of new debt as well.

Investors Brace for a Tougher Treasury Market

Uncertainty surrounding U.S. fiscal policy and rising borrowing needs are pushing bond investors to demand greater compensation for holding longer-term debt. As the Treasury prepares to outline its funding strategy, investors are weighing whether upcoming auctions can sustain demand without driving yields even higher.

Concerns over widening deficits, unpredictable trade measures, and pressure on Federal Reserve independence have shifted the perception of long bonds from a traditional safe haven to an asset requiring greater caution. Without a clearer signal from Washington on stabilizing fiscal conditions, the market for long-term U.S. debt is expected to remain unsettled.

Also Read: Nvidia Sinks 6% on U.S. AI Chip Ban as Asia Markets Dive on China GDP, Tariff Shock

During a pivotal trial this week, executives from both companies confirmed they would want to be considered potential buyers if Chrome hits the market. This trial, overseen by Judge Amit Mehta, could lead to major changes at Google after the court previously ruled that it had built an illegal monopoly in online search.

The U.S. Department of Justice is pushing for Google to sell off Chrome, and possibly even parts of its Android operations, to break up its dominance.

Yahoo Sees Chrome as a Key to Search Growth

Brian Provost, Yahoo Search’s general manager, testified that Yahoo would be ready to buy Chrome, even though the deal would cost tens of billions of dollars. Provost said Yahoo’s parent company, Apollo Global Management, would back the move financially.

Owning Chrome could dramatically improve Yahoo’s small share of the search market, Provost added. Right now, Yahoo holds about 3% of the search market. With Chrome, that figure could jump into double digits. Chrome currently commands around 66% of the global browser market, far ahead of Apple's Safari at 18% and Microsoft's Edge at 5%.

Calling Chrome "arguably the most important strategic player on the web," Provost also revealed that Yahoo has been working on developing its own prototype browser.

OpenAI Sees Chrome as a Game-Changer for AI Search

OpenAI is also eyeing Chrome to strengthen its search platform powered by ChatGPT. Nick Turley, head of product for OpenAI’s AI search team, said acquiring Chrome would massively expand ChatGPT’s reach and improve its performance. Currently, OpenAI’s search technology relies heavily on Microsoft’s Bing, with Microsoft being its largest investor.

Dmitry Shevelenko, chief business officer at AI startup Perplexity AI, echoed the sentiment. He said Perplexity could also operate Chrome effectively and leverage it to grow its business. However, he raised concerns about the future of Chromium — the open-source platform that underpins Chrome — if a new buyer were to close it off. Many browsers, including Microsoft Edge, depend on Chromium’s open technology to function and innovate.

Google Pushes Back Against Forced Sale

Google is fighting hard against the idea of being forced to sell Chrome. A company spokesperson warned that selling Chrome could harm smaller browser companies that rely on Chromium and weaken security and privacy protections for millions of users worldwide.

The antitrust trial is expected to wrap up by May 9, with Judge Mehta likely issuing a final decision by August. The case’s outcome could reshape not only Google’s future, but the entire internet landscape.

Also Read: Google Wallet Rolls Out In-Store Payments for Kids in Select Countries

According to a filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), DeFi Development intends to offer a mix of securities — including shares, debt instruments, and warrants — to generate fresh capital. A major portion of the funds is earmarked for purchasing more Solana tokens and expanding the company’s presence within the Solana network.

At present, DeFi Development has already committed about $48.2 million toward acquiring SOL. In addition to buying the cryptocurrency, the company plans to actively participate in the Solana blockchain by running validator nodes — specialized servers that help maintain the network and validate transactions. By operating validators, the company expects to earn rewards in the form of additional Solana tokens, further growing its digital asset base.

Leadership Overhaul Sets the Stage for a Blockchain-Focused Future

This strategic pivot arrives on the heels of significant leadership changes. Joseph Onorati, formerly an executive at crypto exchange Kraken, now leads the company as CEO and chairman. Parker White, another former Kraken engineer, has been appointed to oversee operations and investments, while John Han, with previous experience at Binance and Kraken, has taken on the role of chief financial officer.

The new executive team brings deep experience in digital assets, signaling a clear departure from the company’s earlier real estate focus. Under their guidance, DeFi Development has embraced a treasury strategy built around Solana, aiming to tap into the growing influence of next-generation blockchain networks.

Investor sentiment has been quick to respond. Shares of DeFi Development surged more than 970% following the announcement of the leadership transition. The rally continued with a further 4% increase in after-hours trading on Friday, pushing the stock to $54 per share.

Early Support from Major Crypto Investors

As part of its updated strategy, the company also filed to register 1.24 million shares linked to its early investors. Well-known names in the crypto investment space — including Pantera Capital, Payward (the parent of Kraken), and Arrington Capital — are among those backing the company's new direction. Their continued involvement adds credibility to DeFi Development’s blockchain-focused ambitions.

Solana Gains Favor Among Corporate Treasuries

DeFi Development’s decision to prioritize Solana reflects a broader shift in the corporate world, where blockchain assets are beginning to show up more frequently on company balance sheets. While Bitcoin once dominated this space, interest is expanding to include faster, lower-cost networks like Solana.

By committing a sizable portion of its future fundraising to Solana, DeFi Development isn’t simply holding crypto — it’s positioning itself as an active participant in the infrastructure of a leading blockchain network. For investors, this approach offers a potential new pathway to gain exposure to the growth of digital assets through traditional equity markets.

Also Read: Bitcoin Gains Ground as XRP and Ethereum Face Growing Market Pressure

Zillow’s latest report highlights how dramatically housing costs have surged nationwide, even in regions traditionally seen as relatively affordable. The analysis, based on home values between the 5th and 35th percentiles in each city, shows that half of all U.S. states now have at least one city where the typical starter home crosses the $1 million threshold.

While the national median starter home price remains at $192,514, the study paints a much more troubling picture for buyers in many local markets. States like Rhode Island and Minnesota — not usually associated with sky-high real estate — have now joined the list, reflecting just how widespread the affordability crisis has become.

California Leads the Pack, But the Price Surge Is Spreading

California continues to dominate the list of the most expensive places for starter homes, with 113 cities breaking the $1 million mark. New York follows with 32 cities, and New Jersey with 20. In fact, eight California cities rank among the top 15 priciest areas, where starter home prices often exceed $3 million.

Beyond the usual hotspots, states like Rhode Island and Minnesota are now seeing seven-figure starter home prices for the first time. New Shoreham on Block Island and Minnetonka Beach near Minneapolis both crossed the milestone this year, signaling a broader shift in the U.S. housing market.

In an eye-popping example, Jupiter Island, Florida — known for its celebrity residents like Bill Gates and Tiger Woods — tops Zillow’s 2025 list, with the typical starter home priced at a staggering $5.85 million.

First-Time Buyers Face Steeper Challenges Than Ever

The explosion in home prices comes at a time when first-time buyers are already struggling. The median age of a first-time buyer rose to 38 last year, according to the National Association of Realtors, the highest on record. Meanwhile, first-time buyers made up just 24% of all home purchases — a historic low.

Over the past five years, the median sales price of a U.S. home jumped 42.5%, climbing from $302,487 in March 2020 to $431,078 in March 2025, Redfin reports. Adding to the financial strain are elevated mortgage rates, rising homeowners' insurance costs, and increasing homeowners' association (HOA) fees.

Many prospective buyers have found themselves priced out or forced to put their plans on hold. Virginia resident Lawrence Talej, who backed out of a $315,000 home purchase in 2019 due to maintenance issues, saw home prices in his area jump by over $100,000 since then, making it harder to re-enter the market.

Others, like tech worker Madelyn Driver, have struggled despite strong incomes and remote work flexibility. Driver and her husband, armed with a $700,000 budget, searched across several states but found few homes that matched their expectations for green spaces, vibrant culture, and affordability. "Even in a vast country like the U.S., options that align with our desires are surprisingly out of budget," Driver said.

Owning a Home Doesn’t Always Mean Stability

Even those who manage to buy are facing tough realities. Elsa, a first-time buyer in a Washington, D.C., suburb, said she and her husband rushed into purchasing a $975,000 home in 2022, only to be overwhelmed by mounting repair costs and the financial burden of carrying credit card debt.

"We didn’t anticipate the wave of repairs," Elsa said. "Multiple water leaks and other issues drained our finances far more than expected."

Also Read: Mortgage Demand Crashes as Rates Spike to 6.88%—Homebuyers Pull Back

Market Volatility Highlights Bitcoin’s Resilience

The current investment environment is marked by volatility stemming from ongoing trade tensions and fluctuating tariff policies. In periods of uncertainty, investors typically retreat from riskier assets, and cryptocurrencies are often among the first to feel the impact.

However, Bitcoin has consistently demonstrated stronger resilience compared to alternative digital assets. Institutional support for Bitcoin has continued to grow, and government holdings have further legitimized its role as a long-term store of value. In contrast, XRP and Ethereum — while significant in their respective sectors — remain more vulnerable to speculative pressure. Recent trading patterns show Bitcoin maintaining stronger price stability, a trend likely to continue if market uncertainty persists.

Capital Flight From U.S. Assets Boosts Bitcoin’s Appeal

Unusual market behavior has surfaced following the imposition of broad tariffs. U.S. stocks and government bonds have both seen notable declines, signaling not just a move from risk to safety, but an exodus from U.S. financial instruments altogether.

This shift has weakened the U.S. dollar, with the Dollar Index sliding more than 10% since January. Historically, a declining dollar has supported upward movements in Bitcoin’s price, positioning it as a viable alternative for investors seeking to hedge against currency risk. As confidence in traditional safe havens like Treasuries erodes, Bitcoin stands out as a digital asset increasingly viewed as a stable reserve.

Inflation Pressures Could Push Bitcoin Higher

The combination of rising tariffs and a weakening dollar is expected to drive inflation higher across the U.S. economy. Increased costs on imported goods, coupled with supply chain disruptions, are likely to filter down to consumers, intensifying inflationary pressures throughout 2025.

Bitcoin’s fixed supply structure — capped at 21 million coins — makes it fundamentally resistant to inflation. As the purchasing power of fiat currencies declines, demand for finite digital assets like Bitcoin tends to increase. Unlike XRP and Ethereum, which rely more heavily on adoption and utility within their ecosystems, Bitcoin’s scarcity is its defining economic advantage in an inflationary environment.

Bitcoin’s Dominance Set to Continue

While XRP benefits from regulatory momentum and Ethereum remains the foundation for much of the DeFi sector, Bitcoin’s role as a hedge against economic instability is gaining greater significance. In a year where market sentiment is expected to remain cautious, Bitcoin’s structural advantages position it to outperform its closest rivals.

Current trends suggest Bitcoin’s market share could grow even further, reinforcing its leadership position as the preferred asset during periods of financial stress.

Also Read: 3 Cryptocurrencies Showing Strong Signs of Recovery Despite New Trump Tariffs

In addition to this development, reports began circulating that China is considering tariff exemptions for 131 categories of U.S. products. These products include key industries such as vaccines, chemicals, and jet engines. However, this list is yet to be officially confirmed by Chinese authorities, leaving many in the business community to speculate about the possibility of a thaw in relations.

Despite these moves, China has swiftly denied President Trump’s claims of ongoing negotiations. In an interview with TIME magazine, Trump suggested that talks between the U.S. and China were in progress and even mentioned that Chinese President Xi Jinping had personally called him. Trump emphasized that this phone call was not a sign of weakness on Xi's part.

However, the Chinese Embassy in Washington was quick to counter this narrative. They issued a statement on social media, clarifying that "China and the U.S. are NOT having any consultation or negotiation on tariffs. The U.S. should stop creating confusion."

Trade Tensions Begin to Ease, But Challenges Remain

Although the recent tariff exemptions suggest a potential easing of trade tensions, analysts caution that this may be a temporary move. The ongoing trade war between the U.S. and China has already caused significant disruptions to global trade. President Trump’s administration has signaled that it is willing to de-escalate these tensions in exchange for trade deals that benefit U.S. interests.

Trump himself expressed optimism about the direction of trade talks, especially with Japan. He indicated that the U.S. and Japan are very close to striking a deal, which he views as a "test case" for future bilateral agreements. Trump's comments suggest that other countries may soon follow suit, as the U.S. seeks individual trade deals outside of broader multilateral agreements.

What’s Next for U.S. Trade Policy?

As Trump pushes forward with his "America First" trade policies, he continues to claim that tariffs will help revitalize U.S. manufacturing. His administration’s focus is on reducing reliance on foreign imports and creating more jobs within the U.S. While Trump has emphasized the importance of achieving better trade terms with countries like China and Japan, economists warn that tariffs could drive up consumer prices and hurt U.S. businesses in the long run.

In his interview, Trump stated that he has already finalized 200 trade deals, all of which are expected to be completed within the next three to four weeks. Although he did not provide specific details, he expressed confidence that these agreements would bring positive results for the U.S. He also mentioned that he would consider it a success if tariffs remain between 20% to 50% in the years to come.

Global Markets React

The uncertainty surrounding the U.S.-China trade war continues to have a ripple effect on global markets. While European and Asian stocks showed signs of growth, investors remain cautious about the long-term impact of ongoing tariffs. The U.S. dollar is poised for its first weekly rise in over a month, as investors take comfort in the possibility of a de-escalation in the trade war.

However, despite positive signals, Wall Street opened lower on Friday, reflecting the broader uncertainty in global markets. With more countries racing to secure individual trade deals with the U.S., the coming weeks are expected to be critical in determining the future of global trade and the effectiveness of President Trump’s tariff strategy.

Also Read: U.S. Plans New Tariffs on Smartphones, Laptops, and Semiconductors

While Trump acknowledged that some countries might request changes to the deals, he indicated that he is ready to wrap things up. "I’m pretty much set and ready to go," he added.

Trump also mentioned that negotiations with Japan are nearly complete. “I’m getting along very well with Japan, and a deal is very close,” he said during a press briefing at the White House.

However, the situation with China remains more uncertain. While Trump stated that talks with China are ongoing and that he’s “doing fine with everybody,” he added that he wouldn’t call President Xi Jinping unless Xi called him first. Trump later confirmed that the two leaders had spoken, but did not reveal the details of the conversation.

When asked about the timing of his call with Xi, Trump was evasive, saying only, “I’ll let you know at the appropriate time. Let’s see if we can make a deal.”

Earlier this month, Trump imposed steep tariff increases on nearly 60 countries but paused these increases for three months to allow time for negotiations. The 10% baseline tariff remains in place during this period, which has led to a series of visits from foreign representatives eager to reach an agreement. However, China has taken a more defiant stance, making it unclear when a deal will be struck.

Trump also pushed back against claims that his decision to delay tariffs was influenced by Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent and Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick. “They didn’t tell me. I did that,” Trump remarked, referring to the decision to pause the tariff hikes. “The bond market was reacting, but I wasn’t concerned.”

Trump is firm in his expectation that trade agreements with major global partners will be finalized within the next 3 to 4 weeks. With ongoing talks, he emphasizes that these deals will set the course for U.S. trade policy and help clarify the future of tariffs.

Also Read: Trump Prepares Next Tariff Moves as Global Trade Tensions Heat Up

Over the past 30 days, a few digital assets have not only weathered the storm but also posted modest gains—some even exceeding 30%. As uncertainty continues to cloud global markets, Bitcoin, Solana, and Bittensor are emerging as notable exceptions.

Bitcoin Sees Renewed Demand Amid Market Uncertainty

Bitcoin (BTC) has started to stabilize following a sharp pullback earlier in the year. After reaching a record high of $109,000 in January, Bitcoin is still down nearly 20%, but it has managed to gain almost 5% over the last month.

The shift is tied to growing interest in Bitcoin’s role as a hedge during economic instability. With confidence in U.S. markets fading, investors are increasingly turning to assets viewed as safe havens. Bitcoin is once again being looked at through the lens of "digital gold"—a reliable store of value during times of market volatility.

Investor flows into spot Bitcoin ETFs, which had turned negative during February and March, moved back into positive territory by the end of April. That trend reflects a broader sentiment: in uncertain times, Bitcoin remains a viable option for those seeking long-term value.

Solana Gains Ground as Ethereum Lags

Solana (SOL) is gaining momentum, even as Ethereum (ETH) continues to struggle. While Ethereum has dropped more than 50% year-to-date and lost another 20% in the past month, Solana has managed to recover 5% over the same period.

Beyond price performance, Solana’s on-chain activity is strengthening. It has already overtaken Ethereum in daily trading volume on decentralized exchanges and, in April, surpassed Ethereum in staking market cap—an indicator of network participation and user confidence. Solana now accounts for nearly 46% of decentralized app revenue across the blockchain space.

These figures point to a platform that’s gaining real traction, especially in a climate where users and developers are re-evaluating where they deploy their resources.

Bittensor Rises as AI Crypto Narrative Gains Steam

Bittensor (TAO), a lesser-known name just months ago, has become one of the most talked-about projects in the artificial intelligence crypto space. With a market cap nearing $3 billion, Bittensor now ranks among the top 35 cryptocurrencies worldwide.

Its recent rise—up roughly 30% in the past 30 days—reflects renewed enthusiasm around blockchain-based AI projects. Bittensor supports decentralized machine learning networks, and that functional focus is attracting serious investor interest.

A standout factor for Bittensor is its capped supply of just 21 million tokens, the same limit as Bitcoin. In a market where many AI-related cryptocurrencies have supplies in the billions, Bittensor’s scarcity is becoming a draw for long-term holders.

Fundamentals Matter More Than Ever

As the impact of Trump's tariffs continues to ripple through financial markets, crypto investors are watching closely for signs of stability. The short-term picture remains volatile, but Bitcoin, Solana, and Bittensor are proving that some assets still offer growth potential—even in a turbulent environment.

While most digital assets remain under pressure, Bitcoin, Solana, and Bittensor have shown unexpected resilience over the past month. Whether that momentum holds will depend on how investors respond to continued policy shifts and broader economic signals in the weeks ahead.

Also Read: If You Invested $1,000 in These 5 Cryptos When They Launched, Here's What You'd Have Today

The tool represents one of the clearest efforts yet from a major tech company to help creators retain some control over how their work is used by AI systems. But with no enforcement mechanism in place and AI developers historically ignoring opt-out requests, questions remain about its effectiveness.

How the Tool Works?

Adobe’s content credentials are built on the Coalition for Content Provenance and Authenticity (C2PA) standard, which allows creators to add tamper-resistant metadata to their content. Through the new app, users can upload batches of up to 50 JPG or PNG files and embed the following:

• Creator name and social handles

• A verified LinkedIn identity (optional)

• A flag signaling the image is not to be used for AI training

This metadata is not just text added to a file — Adobe applies cryptographic protections, pixel-level watermarking, and digital fingerprinting to make it resilient against editing or reformatting. Even if someone crops or alters an image, the embedded credentials remain traceable.

A Chrome extension will also let users instantly verify the presence of these credentials on web images. If detected, a small “CR” badge will appear, indicating the image carries Adobe-certified metadata.

Big Tech’s Track Record on Respecting Digital Boundaries Isn’t Encouraging

Despite the technical sophistication of Adobe’s system, its impact is still in doubt. Currently, there are no legal or technical obligations for AI companies to comply with this opt-out request. This makes Adobe’s effort more of a moral guideline than an enforceable rule.

Most major AI crawlers, including those operated by OpenAI, Google, and Meta, have been documented ignoring robots.txt — the long-established method websites use to restrict crawlers. Whether these firms will treat Adobe’s visual opt-out any differently remains to be seen.

Power Dynamics in AI Training Are Skewed

For many artists and independent creators, AI model training represents a troubling form of unauthorized data usage. Their work — often publicly available but never intended for reuse — has been quietly harvested to train systems that could eventually replace or devalue their profession.

This growing tension has led to high-profile lawsuits, industry protests, and calls for regulation. Adobe’s content credentials offer a way for creators to formally register their intent, providing valuable evidence in potential disputes or future legislation.

And while current copyright law doesn’t yet offer clear protections in these cases, intent metadata could become a useful factor in legal interpretations.

Balancing AI Innovation and Creator Rights

Adobe finds itself in a unique position. The company is both an innovator in AI-powered tools (like Firefly, its generative image engine) and a legacy partner to creative professionals. It must now walk a tightrope — advancing AI while also protecting the creators who rely on its tools.

By supporting the C2PA standard and launching this app, Adobe is attempting to build a good faith framework for AI-era digital ownership. The company has confirmed that it is actively engaging with top AI model developers to push for broad adoption of the new standard, though no agreements have been finalized.

Potential Expansion to Video and Audio

While the tool currently supports still images, Adobe has confirmed plans to extend this technology to video and audio files. This would be a significant move, as creators across film, podcasting, and music also face risks of their content being scraped and repurposed by generative models.

Such expansion could help form the basis for a universal opt-out mechanism across media types, providing a much-needed layer of protection as AI continues to evolve.

A Welcome Step — But Still a Work in Progress

Adobe’s new tool offers creators a way to assert control and claim authorship — a small but meaningful signal in an industry that’s rapidly automating content generation. But without full cooperation from the companies training the AI, this initiative’s success will depend on how seriously the tech world chooses to treat creator consent.

 It marks a rare moment where a major tech player is investing in creator-first infrastructure, rather than just pushing forward with AI regardless of consequences.

Also Read: Adobe Launches AI Agents to Enhance Online Marketing and Personalization

In an interview from the Oval Office on Wednesday, Trump once again criticized Powell, stating that the Fed chair was "making a mistake by not lowering interest rates." Trump argued that Powell has been "too slow" to act on inflation, especially in recent years, and added that Powell’s appointment was a result of recommendations from people Trump wasn’t particularly pleased with.

The President's latest remarks came after he eased speculation about Powell’s future by assuring the press on Tuesday that he had no plans to remove him from his post. This reassurance helped calm financial markets, which had been unsettled by Trump’s earlier social media comments where he demanded Powell’s "termination" and described him as a "major loser."

Trump’s sharp words followed Powell’s comments last week, in which he warned that the administration's aggressive trade policies could lead to higher inflation and slower growth. Powell’s suggestion that the Fed might keep interest rates steady to counter these risks did not sit well with the President, who once again called for "pre-emptive rate cuts."

Trump’s demand for immediate action has been echoed on social media, where he criticized the Fed chair, labeling Powell as "Mr. Too Late" and pushing for the central bank to lower interest rates to avoid an economic slowdown. These comments have drawn widespread attention, reflecting growing tension between the President and the Fed, an institution traditionally known for its independence.

Despite Trump’s pressure, many Fed officials, including Cleveland Fed President Beth Hammack and Minneapolis Fed President Neel Kashkari, have urged a more measured approach. Hammack has stressed the importance of patience in the current economic climate, advocating for waiting to gather more data before making any drastic moves. Similarly, Kashkari pointed out that the bar for rate cuts is high at the moment, particularly in light of ongoing tariff-related inflation concerns.

Fed Governor Adriana Kugler also echoed these sentiments, emphasizing the need to keep rates steady until inflation shows clear signs of stabilizing. She added that while tariffs remain uncertain, their current level is likely to contribute to rising prices.

Powell has remained focused on the importance of price stability as the foundation for long-term economic growth, suggesting that the Fed will prioritize controlling inflation before making further moves on interest rates. However, his stance on the potential effects of tariffs on inflation remains cautious, with Powell acknowledging that the impact could be either short-lived or prolonged.

Trump’s continued push for action on interest rates highlights a broader conflict between the White House’s economic agenda and the Fed’s cautious approach. As the pressure builds, the Fed will likely remain focused on the long-term economic picture, while Trump’s calls for immediate intervention signal a deeper divide on how to handle inflation and growth moving forward.

Also Read: Trump May Replace Fed Chair Jerome Powell: Kevin Warsh and Waller Top List

The move is the result of a direct partnership between PayPal and Coinbase aimed at making stablecoin payments more functional within daily commerce and business operations. With traditional payment systems still facing high transaction fees and processing delays, this collaboration offers merchants and consumers a modern, blockchain-powered alternative that settles funds faster, at reduced cost.

Seamless On-Ramp and Off-Ramp for PYUSD

One of the core barriers to stablecoin adoption has been the lack of affordable and frictionless on-ramps (converting fiat to crypto) and off-ramps (converting crypto back to fiat). This integration solves both sides: users can now move PYUSD into their Coinbase accounts, use it as a medium of exchange, and cash out directly to U.S. dollars without fee-based penalties.

This is especially valuable for freelancers, international contractors, and small businesses that prefer crypto for its global reach but have struggled with inefficient withdrawal systems and added fees.

Direct Stablecoin Settlement for Merchants

Merchants operating on PayPal’s platform will now have the option to settle transactions directly in PYUSD, eliminating multiple layers of processing usually associated with credit cards or third-party banks. This capability is crucial for high-volume merchants who rely on fast cash flow and can benefit from blockchain-based settlement with near-instant confirmation times.

Beyond speed, the integration also creates transparency in how funds move—something that can improve accounting, reduce fraud risks, and support automated financial reporting for merchants dealing with large volumes of digital payments.

Competing With USDC for Real-World Utility

Until this development, Coinbase reserved zero-fee privileges for Circle’s USDC, currently one of the top two stablecoins by market cap. By adding PYUSD to the same tier, Coinbase is giving PayPal’s token equal standing, suggesting that it sees long-term value in supporting more than one institutional-grade stablecoin.

With a current market cap of around $872 million, PYUSD still trails USDC significantly—but this partnership increases its competitive positioning. More importantly, it gives users a reason to consider PYUSD not just as a bridge between crypto tokens, but as a viable tool for business transactions and personal payments.

Expanding Into Institutional and DeFi Use Cases

Coinbase and PayPal are also looking ahead to new use cases beyond retail and small business payments. Both companies have expressed interest in integrating PYUSD into decentralized finance (DeFi) protocols. These platforms offer financial services such as lending, borrowing, and yield generation—all without relying on traditional banks.

Adding PYUSD to DeFi platforms could increase liquidity and open new avenues for institutional involvement in blockchain-based finance. For institutional users, the combination of regulatory clarity (via PayPal) and technical scale (via Coinbase) creates an environment where risk is reduced and access is streamlined.

Policy Support Could Speed Up Adoption

The timing of this integration is notable, as U.S. lawmakers are moving closer to enacting a federal regulatory framework for stablecoins. With bipartisan progress in both the House and Senate, and support from the White House to pass legislation by August, the environment for regulated digital currency payments is becoming more favorable.

A clear legal structure could attract banks, fintech firms, and enterprise platforms that are waiting for policy assurance before adopting stablecoins. In this context, Coinbase and PayPal’s move positions PYUSD as a fully compliant, easy-to-use digital payment solution ahead of likely regulatory tailwinds.

How This Deal Makes Crypto Easier to Use for Payments

This is more than a fee waiver—it’s a long-term positioning play. Coinbase wants to lead the stablecoin payments market, and PayPal wants to anchor its crypto ambitions in a practical, widely accepted token. Together, they are building infrastructure that allows individuals, merchants, and institutions to treat stablecoins not just as crypto assets but as reliable financial instruments.

If successful, this could redefine how money moves online—faster, cheaper, and without depending on traditional banking rails. For merchants seeking faster settlement, for users tired of conversion fees, and for platforms looking to innovate financial services, this partnership is a clear signal: stablecoin payments are no longer a future concept—they are being deployed now.

Also Read: Coinbase Users Lose $46M in Phishing Scams – How Hackers Are Targeting Crypto

On Wednesday, the European Commission fined Apple 500 million euros ($571 million) for blocking app developers from guiding users to cheaper purchasing alternatives outside the App Store. This fine comes as part of the EU's push to regulate so-called "gatekeeper" companies in the digital marketplace.

Meanwhile, Meta faced a fine of 200 million euros for restricting Facebook and Instagram users’ options by forcing them to choose between personalized ads or paying to avoid them. This decision aims to prevent the company from taking away users' freedom to control how their data is used across its platforms.

First Fines Under the Digital Markets Act

These fines represent the first enforcement of the DMA, a set of stringent rules designed to open up digital markets to more competition, prevent market monopolies, and ensure consumers have more control over their data. The DMA holds "gatekeepers" like Apple and Meta accountable for actions that restrict user choice and hinder fair competition.

Henna Virkkunen, the European Commission's Executive Vice President for Tech Sovereignty, said, "The decisions adopted today find that both Apple and Meta have taken away this free choice from their users, and are required to change their behavior."

Apple and Meta have both announced their intention to appeal the fines. Apple argued that it is being unfairly targeted and stated that it had already made numerous changes to comply with the DMA. Meanwhile, Meta expressed frustration, claiming that the penalties would significantly impact its business model and harm European economies by restricting personalized ads.

What the Fines Mean for the Digital Marketplace

The fines highlight the EU’s ongoing effort to regulate the digital space, which includes ensuring that users have the freedom to choose how their data is handled. In the case of Apple, the Commission has taken issue with the company's rules, which prevent app developers from suggesting cheaper purchasing routes to consumers outside the App Store. The new rules under the DMA mandate that developers must be allowed to inform customers about more affordable options.

As for Meta, its business model of offering Facebook and Instagram users the option to pay for an ad-free experience raised red flags with regulators. The Commission argued that the structure of Meta’s system limits users' ability to freely consent to data collection for personalized ads, making the choice between paying for an ad-free service or accepting ads less transparent.

Continued Tensions Between the EU and Big Tech

These fines come amidst growing tensions between the EU and U.S. tech companies. Meta has accused the Commission of unfairly restricting American businesses while giving European and Chinese firms a free pass. The Commission, however, has responded firmly, stating that its regulations apply equally to all companies, regardless of their origin.

EU continues to clamp down on digital giants, these penalties are seen as part of a broader effort to bring more transparency and fairness to the tech sector. With Apple and Meta appealing, the outcome of these cases could set the tone for future enforcement actions under the Digital Markets Act.

Also Read: How to Remove Weird AI Videos from Instagram and TikTok Feeds

Key ETFs Behind the Capital Surge

The day’s inflows were spread across ten Bitcoin ETFs, but three funds led the way:

• Ark & 21Shares: $267.1 million

• Fidelity’s FBTC: $253.8 million

• BlackRock’s IBIT: $193.5 million

These inflows pushed total net investments over the past three trading days to more than $1.4 billion, indicating a steady return of institutional money to the crypto space.

Rising Inflation Drives Bitcoin Demand

Analysts point to macroeconomic stress—such as ongoing inflation, a weaker U.S. dollar, and global geopolitical uncertainty—as the key forces behind the renewed interest in Bitcoin. As traditional assets become harder to rely on for consistent value, Bitcoin is gradually taking on the role of a digital fallback.

Rachael Lucas, crypto analyst at BTC Markets, said institutional investors are becoming more comfortable with Bitcoin as part of a long-term strategy. “With its limited supply and increasing global exposure, Bitcoin fits into the framework of assets designed to hold value in unpredictable environments,” she explained.

Min Jung, a research analyst at Presto, added that Bitcoin's recent stability during volatile market conditions is changing how investors view its role in a portfolio. “It’s behaving more like a strategic hedge than a speculative asset,” she said.

Bitcoin Price Rises Alongside ETF Demand

The ETF inflow trend has coincided with a 6.4% jump in Bitcoin’s price, which reached around $93,765 on Tuesday. The market activity suggests a direct connection between institutional buying via ETFs and upward momentum in Bitcoin’s market value.

Expectations of a more accommodative stance from the Federal Reserve and possible progress in U.S.-China trade discussions are also supporting Bitcoin’s position as a hedge. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent has pointed to softening monetary policy and improving trade conditions as signals that investors are watching closely.

Bitcoin ETFs Now Manage Over $103 Billion

With these latest inflows, total assets under management in U.S. spot Bitcoin ETFs have now crossed $103 billion. This milestone underscores the increasing acceptance of Bitcoin in regulated, institutional-grade investment vehicles.

The ETF route offers regulated exposure to Bitcoin without the complexities of self-custody or direct crypto trading. This has become an attractive on-ramp for traditional finance firms looking to add digital assets to client portfolios.

Institutional Momentum Continues

Institutional interest in Bitcoin appears to be gaining pace. With ongoing inflation concerns and limited new issuance of Bitcoin, ETFs could continue to attract billions in capital throughout the year—especially if macroeconomic uncertainty remains unresolved.

Also Read: If You Invested $1,000 in These 5 Cryptos When They Launched, Here's What You'd Have Today

This news gave investors some hope, even though Tesla just reported a disappointing quarter.

Earnings Miss Expectations as Revenue and Profit Drop

Tesla’s first-quarter results came in weaker than expected. The company brought in $19.34 billion in revenue, falling short of Wall Street's estimate of $21.43 billion and down from $21.3 billion a year ago. Profits also dropped sharply, with earnings per share coming in at $0.27 compared to the expected $0.44. That’s a 40% decline from last year.

Tesla pointed to trade tensions and shifting global policies as reasons for the weaker performance, saying it’s getting harder to manage supply chains and production costs. The company also warned that changing political climates could affect demand for its cars in the short term.

Affordable EV Still Planned, But Growth Forecast on Hold

Despite the challenges, Tesla says it’s still on track to launch a more affordable electric vehicle in the first half of 2025, and it’s aiming to start mass-producing its Robotaxi in 2026. However, the company said it will revisit its guidance for 2025 when it reports second-quarter results. For now, Tesla has pulled back its long-term growth forecast.

This comes as questions continue to swirl about delays in Tesla’s lower-cost vehicle plans. While reports suggested the launch might be pushed back, Tesla executives didn’t confirm or deny that. Instead, they emphasized the company is focused on making its cars more affordable.

Sales Slide as Rivals Gain Ground

Tesla’s deliveries took a hit in Q1, with 336,681 vehicles delivered—the lowest number since mid-2022. Meanwhile, other automakers are seeing a sales boost, especially as buyers try to get ahead of new U.S. tariffs on imported vehicles that took effect in early April.

Tesla is also losing ground to rivals like China’s BYD, which has been gaining market share overseas. In Europe, Tesla’s vehicle registrations dropped in March, signaling more trouble in key markets.

Musk’s Politics Stir Controversy, Affect Brand Image

Beyond the numbers, Musk’s political activity is adding pressure. His public support for Donald Trump and other conservative leaders in the U.S. and Europe has sparked backlash. Tesla showrooms have seen protests, and some Tesla vehicles have even been vandalized. These incidents are adding to the strain on the brand, especially among customers who once saw Tesla as a tech-forward, neutral company.

Robotaxi Testing Starts in Austin This Summer

Musk said Tesla will begin testing its Robotaxi service in Austin starting in June. He claimed Tesla’s self-driving cars will be far cheaper than competitors like Waymo, which rely on expensive sensors. Musk says keeping costs low is a major focus for the company as it works on next-generation vehicles.

Despite the weak quarter, investors seem encouraged by Musk’s pledge to return his full attention to Tesla. Whether that will be enough to get the company back on track remains to be seen—but for now, the markets are responding positively.

Also Read: Trump’s Fed Criticism Triggers Wall Street Panic: Investors Flee U.S. Markets for Gold and Bitcoin

This comes after President Trump launched another round of criticism at Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell, questioning the central bank’s handling of interest rates. The remarks triggered uncertainty in the markets at the start of the week, shaking confidence in the U.S. economy and pushing investors to look for safer options.

Markets React Quickly to Rising Political Tensions

Typically, during market stress, investors turn to safe bets like U.S. government bonds and the U.S. dollar. But that didn’t happen this time. Instead, both assets were sold off alongside stocks. The 10-year Treasury yield rose above 4.4%, and the dollar fell to its lowest level in nearly three years.

By Tuesday, there was some small recovery in early trading, but it wasn’t enough to calm nerves. The dollar stayed below a key psychological level, and bond yields remained high—signs that investors are still uneasy.

Gold and Bitcoin Gain as Investors Look for Alternatives

Instead of U.S. bonds or the dollar, investors are moving their money into gold and cryptocurrencies. Gold hit another all-time high on Tuesday, and bitcoin climbed past $89,000. These moves show that many people are looking for places to store their wealth outside of U.S. financial markets.

The reasons go beyond Trump’s latest comments. There are broader concerns about economic growth, rising tariffs, political tension, and how much influence politics could have on the Federal Reserve's decisions.

“This isn’t about giving up on America,” said Ann Berry, founder of Threadneedle Ventures. “But right now, people are more cautious about investing heavily in U.S. assets.”

Big Investors Are Now Focusing More on Global Markets

Recent data shows a noticeable shift in investment flows. U.S. equity ETFs lost $3.6 billion in outflows last week, while foreign markets attracted over $3 billion in new money, according to JPMorgan.

This is significant because international investors play a big role in the U.S. market—they own about one-third of U.S. stocks and over 25% of government debt. Wall Street has always been a symbol of America’s strength, but some of that confidence is starting to fade.

“We’ve always had the advantage of strong institutions and reliable laws,” said Callie Cox of Ritholtz Wealth. “But when those are being questioned, it creates uncertainty for investors.”

Unusual Market Behavior Sparks Worries

In most cases, when both stocks and bonds fall together, it’s because of inflation. But this time, analysts believe it’s more about trust. With so many political and policy-related concerns, even the most loyal foreign investors are starting to hesitate.

“There’s just a lot of uncertainty right now,” said Michael Goosay from Principal Asset Management. “Investors are unsure about the government’s direction, future growth, and inflation risks—all at once.”

Long-Term Outlook Still Has Bright Spots

Despite the current market jitters, some experts still see U.S. assets as strong long-term investments, especially during a possible recession. U.S. bonds, in particular, have historically provided stability when the economy slows down.

Krishna Memani, CIO at Lafayette College, pointed out that while international bonds may perform well in some situations, they haven’t offered the same protection in past U.S. downturns. The U.S. dollar also remains a vital part of global trade.

For now, market volatility is expected to continue as global investors closely monitor what’s happening in the U.S. “This is a moment where the world is watching,” said Vanguard economist Kevin Khang. “People want to know if the U.S. can still be a source of stability.”

Also Read: Apple Gains, Nvidia Drops $230B in Trump Tariff Shake-Up

Trump warned that the U.S. economy could slow down unless interest rates are cut immediately. He again targeted Fed Chair Jerome Powell, calling him a “major loser” for not acting quickly enough. That sparked a wave of selling in U.S. assets, hitting Wall Street, weakening the dollar, and pushing investors toward gold—often seen as a safe place during uncertain times.

“Gold is adjusting to some big shifts in the financial world. People are starting to lose trust in the dollar and U.S. bonds,” said independent analyst Ross Norman.

Gold Keeps Climbing as Central Banks Increase Buying

Gold has already climbed over $800 so far this year. After passing $3,300 just last week, it gained nearly $200 in a matter of days. Much of that momentum is being supported by strong demand from central banks around the world.

Adrian Ash, director of research at BullionVault, said that recent political drama is making gold even more attractive to governments. “Trump’s return to the spotlight is adding to gold’s appeal as a stable and reliable asset,” he explained.

According to the World Gold Council, central bank gold purchases jumped by 54% in the final quarter of 2024, reaching 333 tons, as Trump won re-election. China’s central bank added to its gold reserves for a fifth straight month in March, and is now planning to set up overseas storage facilities to help with international gold trade on the Shanghai Gold Exchange.

Experts Say Any Price Drop Would Be Short-Lived

Goldman Sachs recently raised its forecast, expecting gold to reach $3,700 by the end of 2025—and possibly up to $3,810 if central banks keep buying at the current pace. ANZ also bumped up its year-end prediction to $3,600.

While some analysts acknowledge that gold’s rally could take a short breather, they believe any dip would be limited. “It’s hard to see prices falling sharply,” said Norman. “There are plenty of new buyers ready to step in if prices slip.”

Julius Baer analyst Carsten Menke added that the only thing that could slow gold down significantly is if Trump changes his approach on trade or the Fed—something he believes is unlikely.

So far this year, gold has broken 28 records, with 16 of those coming in above $3,000 per ounce. Prices have climbed 31% since January, following a 27% gain in 2024. With markets still on edge, gold’s run shows no signs of stopping.

Also Read: Gold Prices Reach Record Highs as Trade Tensions Continue in April 2025

Dogecoin: A Joke That Turned Into Millions

• Launch Price (Dec 2013): $0.000513

• Price (April 2025): $0.16

• Value of a $1,000 Investment Today: $3.125 million

Dogecoin’s story is almost as famous as its meme origins. Initially introduced as a joke, Dogecoin’s value remained low for years. However, with Elon Musk’s vocal support starting in 2019, the meme coin gained serious traction. Fast forward to today, and a $1,000 investment at launch would be worth $3.125 million, highlighting the unpredictable nature of crypto and the power of social media influence.

Bitcoin: The Gold Standard of Crypto

• Launch Price (July 2010): $0.0008

• Price (April 2025): $86,882

• Value of a $1,000 Investment Today: $108.6 billion

Bitcoin’s impact on the world of finance cannot be overstated. Originally priced at just $0.0008 per coin in 2010, Bitcoin has grown to become the largest and most recognized cryptocurrency. Today, at a price nearing $87,000 per coin, a $1,000 investment in Bitcoin from its early days would be worth an astonishing $108.6 billion. Its rise remains one of the most remarkable success stories in modern finance.

Ethereum: A Powerful Platform for Smart Contracts

• Launch Price (Aug 2015): $2.92

• Price (April 2025): $15.73

• Value of a $1,000 Investment Today: $5,387

Ethereum, often seen as Bitcoin’s most important rival, was introduced in 2015 with a focus on enabling decentralized applications (dApps) and smart contracts. Its utility beyond being a store of value has solidified its position as the second-largest cryptocurrency. At a price of $15.73 per coin in April 2025, a $1,000 investment at launch would now be worth about $5,387—a solid return, though not in the same league as Bitcoin.

Solana: A Growing Player With Modest Gains

• Launch Price (March 2021): $14.23

• Price (April 2025): $15.51

• Value of a $1,000 Investment Today: $1,090

Solana is a relatively new entrant in the crypto market, launched in 2021. Known for its high-speed blockchain and lower transaction costs compared to Ethereum, Solana’s price has remained relatively stable. Today, a $1,000 investment from its early days would have grown to $1,090, offering modest returns. While the coin has potential for future growth, its gains so far have been more conservative than those of older cryptos like Bitcoin and Ethereum.

Tether: Stability Over High Returns

• Launch Price (Feb 2015): $1.21

• Price (April 2025): $1

• Value of a $1,000 Investment Today: $826

Tether (USDT) is a stablecoin, designed to hold a 1:1 value with the U.S. dollar. Unlike other cryptocurrencies, Tether is not meant to offer huge returns but instead acts as a stable store of value. As of April 2025, Tether remains pegged to $1, meaning a $1,000 investment would have declined slightly in value to around $826. While not the type of investment that sees wild price swings, Tether’s role in the market remains critical for investors seeking stability in a volatile sector.

What We Can Learn from These Cryptos

These five cryptocurrencies offer a window into the world of early-stage investments in digital assets. While some coins, like Bitcoin and Dogecoin, have turned early adopters into multi-millionaires, others like Tether and Solana have provided more modest returns.

The takeaway for investors? Cryptocurrencies can be incredibly rewarding, but they come with high risk. While some coins have seen massive appreciation in a short period, others have shown that not all digital assets are designed for explosive growth. For anyone looking to invest in crypto, it’s important to understand both the potential rewards and the inherent risks.

Also Read: Top 3 Cryptos to Buy Now in 2025 While Prices Stay Low

The deal involves both Airtel and its regional arm, Bharti Hexacom, and includes spectrum in Mumbai, Gujarat, Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Tamil Nadu, and Rajasthan—circles that are critical to Airtel’s overall network performance due to their dense populations and growing digital usage.

Additional Bandwidth to Support Network Load in Urban Regions

The 26 GHz band is part of the millimeter-wave spectrum, which supports extremely fast data speeds and is ideal for high-capacity areas. With more users switching to 5G devices and data-heavy services like video streaming, online gaming, and real-time applications, telecom providers need additional bandwidth to manage increasing load on their networks.

By acquiring this spectrum, Airtel is securing the infrastructure needed to meet growing demand without compromising speed or service quality in cities and industrial hubs.

Deal Completed Through Spectrum Trading, Avoiding Auction Delays

Rather than waiting for a government-conducted spectrum auction, Airtel opted to purchase the airwaves directly from Adani Data Networks through spectrum trading—a route that is permitted under India's telecom regulations. This allowed Airtel to fast-track the expansion of its 5G network, especially in circles where immediate upgrades are required.

For Adani, which had originally acquired the spectrum for private network use in enterprise environments, the sale offers a way to repurpose unused airwaves and redirect them toward commercial telecom services.

Airtel's 5G Growth Targets Backed by New Spectrum Access

Airtel’s 5G services have seen rapid adoption, with around 120 million users already on its 5G network by the end of December 2024, out of a total subscriber base of 414 million. The additional spectrum from Adani allows Airtel to continue that growth without the risk of network strain, especially in densely populated zones.

The company has been steadily rolling out its 5G services across India and is focusing on both consumer markets and enterprise clients who require high-speed, low-latency connectivity.

Competitive Momentum in India's 5G Race

The Indian telecom industry is in a phase of rapid 5G rollout, with major players like Airtel and Reliance Jio building out nationwide networks. Access to high-frequency spectrum like the 26 GHz band is becoming a key asset, especially in urban areas where data use is highest.

This transaction strengthens Airtel’s position in those high-demand circles and reflects the growing role of inter-operator spectrum trading as a practical solution for network expansion in a fast-moving market.

Also Read: Ambani Eyes African Expansion with New Telecom Venture

One of the key drivers behind Bitcoin’s recent price movement is a notable increase in institutional activity. Strategy, formerly MicroStrategy, added 3,459 BTC to its balance sheet despite reporting $5.91 billion in unrealized losses from earlier purchases. This bold move signals not only confidence in Bitcoin's long-term value proposition but also a strategic bet on digital assets as a hedge amid global financial uncertainty. The company’s continued Bitcoin acquisition strategy has positioned it as a bellwether for corporate crypto adoption.

Liquidity trends are also playing a pivotal role. Dominick John, an analyst at Kronos Research, pointed to a significant expansion in global M2 money supply, which reached $90.2 trillion across the U.S., Europe, Japan, and China from December to February. This surge in money supply typically benefits risk assets like Bitcoin, especially when real yields are suppressed or inflationary concerns rise.

Adding to the momentum, U.S.-based spot Bitcoin exchange-traded funds (ETFs) recorded a net inflow of $15.8 million last week. The increase in ETF flows reflects renewed institutional appetite for regulated Bitcoin exposure, which analysts say could be a sign of deepening market maturity. These inflows not only provide buying pressure but also bring further legitimacy to Bitcoin as an asset class in traditional financial circles.

However, seasoned analysts are advising caution. Peter Chung, head of research at Presto Research, noted that although Bitcoin’s performance is impressive, the broader market still faces uncertainty tied to U.S. fiscal policy, trade negotiations, and monetary tightening. With U.S. tariff talks ongoing and inflationary signals mixed, the Federal Reserve’s response remains a critical variable for digital asset markets.

All eyes are now on the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) meeting scheduled for May 6–7. According to the CME FedWatch Tool, traders are currently pricing in a 12.4% chance of a 25-basis-point rate cut. A lower rate environment would likely bolster Bitcoin and other cryptocurrencies by encouraging capital inflows and risk-taking. But without a firm signal from the Fed, analysts believe the rally could stall or retrace in the short term.

In the broader crypto landscape, market performance was mixed. Ether inched up 0.97% to $1,632, while XRP rose 1.38% to $2.11. Solana, however, slipped 0.87% to $140.20, underlining the uneven nature of current market sentiment. While some altcoins are gaining traction, others are lagging behind as investors remain selective in an uncertain environment.

Bitcoin’s climb above $87,000 is undoubtedly a milestone, but experts emphasize the need for a level-headed approach. Long-term bullish signals are emerging, especially from institutional players, but market participants should remain aware of the delicate balance between momentum and macroeconomic realities. Whether this rally holds—or gives way to consolidation—will likely hinge on upcoming policy decisions and continued capital flow into the digital asset ecosystem.

Also Read: Top 3 Cryptos to Buy Now in 2025 While Prices Stay Low

Kevin Warsh, a former Fed governor and longtime critic of the central bank’s current direction, is widely seen as the front-runner. Warsh, who played a key role during the 2008 financial crisis as a liaison between the Fed and Wall Street, has openly argued that the Fed has become too political and inefficient in tackling inflation. He has also downplayed the inflationary risks of tariffs, instead suggesting that deregulation and fiscal restraint could ease long-term inflation.

According to sources, Trump and Warsh held discussions earlier this year. Although Warsh advised the president to wait until Powell’s term expires, Trump is reportedly still weighing an earlier replacement due to ongoing dissatisfaction, particularly with Powell’s response to inflation during Biden’s presidency and his more recent resistance to immediate rate cuts.

Steve Moore, a longtime Trump economic adviser, said the likelihood of Powell being removed is “less than 50-50,” but emphasized the president’s authority to make leadership changes if necessary. Moore also took issue with Powell’s latest remarks that the Fed would “wait for greater clarity” on economic signals, especially regarding inflation and tariffs—criticizing the comments as politically charged.

Other possible contenders include current National Economic Council Director Kevin Hassett, Reagan-era economist Art Laffer, and Larry Kudlow, who served as NEC director during Trump’s first term. All three are known for supporting pro-growth monetary policies and would likely advocate for quicker interest rate cuts.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent has urged the administration to maintain institutional stability. He confirmed that interviews for a potential Powell successor will begin in the fall and emphasized the importance of keeping the Fed's monetary tools insulated from short-term political pressures.

Another name gaining attention is Fed Governor Christopher Waller, appointed by Trump in his first term. Waller recently stated that interest rate cuts could be necessary to fend off a potential recession and suggested that any inflation caused by tariffs could be temporary. He acknowledged the controversy surrounding such a stance, referencing the Fed’s miscalculations during the pandemic-era inflation spike, but stood by his view that the long-term economic picture should guide policy.

Analysts warn that an abrupt leadership change at the Fed could lead to uncertainty in financial markets. Investors typically favor predictability at the central bank, and sudden changes could affect bond yields, investor confidence, and even the U.S. dollar’s position in global markets.

Legally, replacing Powell before the end of his term could spark a court battle. Federal Reserve Board members are appointed to 14-year terms and can only be removed “for cause,” a legal standard that lacks a clear definition. While the statute allows for removal, it remains ambiguous whether dissatisfaction with policy decisions qualifies as sufficient cause.

Some experts believe the Trump administration may test these boundaries. TD Cowen analyst Jaret Seiberg pointed to the removal of two Democrats from the National Credit Union Administration as a sign the White House may assert more direct control over financial regulatory institutions.

Trump, who appointed Powell in 2018, did not mince words in a recent Oval Office meeting. “If I want him out, he’ll be out of there real fast,” he told reporters.

With interest rates, tariffs, and recession concerns dominating the economic landscape, all eyes remain on how Trump will handle the central bank’s leadership—and whether Powell’s days at the helm are truly numbered.

Also Read: Trump Says Fed Chair Powell Should Be Fired, Demands Immediate Rate Cuts

The answer? It can be—if you choose the right major.

While a general liberal arts degree might not hold the same weight it once did, STEM majors and finance-related fields are still helping graduates secure six-figure salaries, according to recent data from the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. That means if you're aiming for long-term earning potential, what you study in college matters more than ever.

Engineering and Computer Fields Dominate Early Salaries

Graduates in tech and engineering start strong right after college. These are the early-career (ages 22–27) salaries for some of the highest-paying degrees:

• Chemical Engineering: $80,000

• Computer Engineering: $80,000

• Computer Science: $80,000

• Electrical Engineering: $78,000

• Aerospace Engineering: $76,000

• Mechanical and Industrial Engineering: $75,000–$76,000

• Civil Engineering: $71,000

In comparison, many liberal arts and education graduates start at around half those figures.

The Real Money Comes Mid-Career

The salary gap widens as professionals reach their 30s and 40s. Here’s what some of the top degrees bring in by mid-career (around age 35–45):

• Aerospace Engineering: $125,000

• Computer Engineering: $122,000

• Chemical & Electrical Engineering: $120,000

• Computer Science: $115,000

• Economics & Finance: $110,000

These aren’t just outliers—they’re the norm for people in these fields, especially those working in sectors like aerospace, energy, big tech, and financial services.

Why These Degrees Are So Valuable

There’s one big reason STEM and finance majors are thriving: technology is evolving fast, and companies need people who can build, adapt, and solve complex problems.

From artificial intelligence to cybersecurity, businesses like Apple, Meta, and Netflix are racing to recruit talent. And with AI reshaping every industry, the demand for engineers, data analysts, and tech specialists is only growing.

It’s not just tech-focused roles, either. Majors like business analytics, applied math, and international affairs are also climbing in value, as companies look for people who can blend technical skills with strategic thinking.

Degrees That Struggle to Deliver Payoff

Not all degrees offer a strong financial return. Graduates in education and some liberal arts fields see much lower mid-career earnings. For example:

• Early Childhood Education: $49,000 by mid-career

That’s less than half what many engineering majors earn—and not much more than some entry-level jobs that don’t require a degree.

Choose Wisely, Earn Strongly

The takeaway isn’t that college is useless—it’s that the right degree can still set you up for long-term financial success.

In today’s market, what you study matters just as much as where you study. A four-year investment in a major like computer engineering or finance can lead to six-figure incomes within a decade. And in a world where job security and upward mobility are harder to come by, that kind of payoff is worth serious consideration.

Also Read: These Internships in 2025 Pay More Than Full-Time Jobs — See Who’s Hiring

Over the past two years, Musk’s interview choices have shown a clear pattern: friendly hosts, soft questions, and supportive settings. Whether appearing on popular podcasts or speaking at global business forums, his interactions have largely been defined by praise and admiration rather than in-depth inquiry.

While he previously claimed to welcome interviews across different viewpoints, his recent media activity tells a different story. Musk’s discussions have largely been confined to personalities and venues that reflect or endorse his worldview. He regularly participates in live audio chats on X, often backing political candidates or causes he supports, yet avoids journalists who might press him on policy, ethics, or his growing involvement in public administration.

The last time Musk was confronted with direct and uncomfortable questions came during an interview that sparked immediate fallout. After being pressed on topics like political bias on X, controversial social views, and corporate decisions, Musk quickly backed out of a planned collaboration with the interviewer. The encounter highlighted a broader trend: Musk prefers conversations he can guide, not ones where he must defend or explain contentious positions.

Musk’s attitude toward traditional journalism has long been strained. He has often criticized legacy media, calling it biased or outdated. His companies operate with minimal public-facing communication, and press inquiries are frequently ignored. In some cases, automated responses or sarcastic replies have replaced standard media relations, signaling his disinterest in conventional transparency.

At the same time, his rise in influence—both in the private and public sectors—raises questions about accountability. Musk holds significant sway in industries like aerospace, electric vehicles, and now digital communication. His interactions with global political figures and direct involvement in national advisory roles further increase the need for public scrutiny. Yet, the opportunities for rigorous questioning have steadily declined.

In recent remarks, Musk made it clear that he only engages in interviews when it suits his terms. He emphasized that interviews are not a duty, but a choice—and only when the platform or interviewer aligns with his preferences.

As one of the most powerful individuals shaping today’s tech, economic, and political landscape, Musk’s selective approach to public dialogue continues to limit deeper insights into his decisions and motivations.

Also Read: Elon Musk Reportedly Stepping Back from DOGE—Tesla Stock Surges in Response

While the overall market remains weak, some cryptocurrencies are showing signs of resilience—or at least the potential for recovery as investor focus returns to fundamentals. Here are three digital coins worth following closely while prices are still low.

Bitcoin (BTC): Holding Steady During the Downturn

Bitcoin is currently down about 25% from its January high and sits 10% lower year to date. Even with that decline, it remains one of the more stable performers in the market. Over the past month, BTC has inched up about 1%, suggesting it’s not falling as fast or as far as other coins.

What’s helping Bitcoin stay relevant is its global recognition and growing appeal as a store of value. With inflation concerns rising and the dollar showing signs of weakness, some investors are turning to BTC as an alternative to traditional assets. There's also talk that the U.S. may find ways to use crypto, including Bitcoin, more directly in its economic planning, although those ideas remain speculative for now.

Backed by growing international interest and consistent institutional support, Bitcoin still plays a key role in any serious crypto portfolio.

XRP: Regulatory Clearance Could Boost Confidence

XRP has struggled to regain momentum, sitting around the $2 mark with no real gains in 2025. But the legal cloud that hovered over XRP for years has finally cleared. The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission has dropped its lawsuit against Ripple, and a deal was reached with lower-than-expected penalties.

This resolution opens the door for new growth opportunities, including the potential approval of a spot XRP exchange-traded fund. Several investment firms have submitted ETF applications, and the SEC’s recent attitude toward crypto suggests that a green light is possible later this year.

XRP carries more risk than Bitcoin, but if an ETF gets approved, demand for the coin could pick up significantly. That makes it a coin to monitor closely through the second half of 2025.

Ondo (ONDO): A Smaller Coin Linked to a Bigger Trend

Ondo is a low-priced cryptocurrency that saw a surge after the 2024 election, reaching an all-time high of $2.14. It has since dropped more than 40% and now trades below $1.

What makes Ondo different is its connection to real-world asset (RWA) tokenization—a process where traditional financial assets like bonds or stocks are issued on the blockchain. This sector is getting more attention from major institutions and could grow into a multi-trillion-dollar industry over the next few years.

Ondo has strong leadership, including former Goldman Sachs executives, and recently held a summit in New York City attended by major financial players such as Fidelity, BlackRock, and Franklin Templeton. That level of participation is rare for a newer coin and suggests serious industry interest.

Of course, smaller tokens come with higher risk, especially after the collapse of other RWA projects like Mantra. Still, Ondo has shown better structural foundations so far and could benefit from further institutional partnerships.

Balanced Investing Still Matters

Bitcoin continues to represent more than 60% of the crypto market’s total value, making it a critical part of any crypto portfolio. But for those looking to expand their holdings, XRP and Ondo bring different types of exposure—one backed by regulatory progress, and the other tied to financial innovation.

Keeping investments diversified and informed by real developments—not just hype—is more important than ever in this market. These three coins may not move quickly, but they’re positioned to benefit as conditions improve.

Also Read: This Bitcoin Price Prediction Sounds Unreal—Until You Look at the Numbers

The weaker greenback is already reshaping global financial flows, with ripple effects visible in currency markets, export-heavy economies, and commodity pricing. While American consumers face higher costs on imports and travel, several other players are cashing in.

Swiss Franc, Yen, and Euro Lead as Investors Exit the Dollar

Global investors have started pulling away from the dollar, rotating into currencies seen as more stable or better aligned with current macro trends. The Swiss franc has climbed over 9% against the dollar so far this year, maintaining its appeal as a financial safe zone amid political and economic instability. Japan’s yen has made similar gains, reflecting steady demand for Japanese assets as well as investor positioning in low-inflation markets.

Meanwhile, the euro is now trading at its highest point in three years against the dollar. The currency’s recent strength comes as European monetary policy signals greater confidence, while relative economic calm draws investors back into eurozone assets.

Even regional currencies in Asia are showing strength. The Singapore dollar and South Korean won have appreciated significantly, supported by trade surpluses and investor appetite for non-dollar denominated markets.

Export-Heavy Economies Like Japan, Germany, and Malaysia See Windfall

The dollar’s slide has given export-driven countries an edge, particularly those whose products are priced internationally in dollars. Japanese automakers, German machinery exporters, and Malaysian electronics firms are benefiting from improved pricing competitiveness, allowing them to undercut US rivals on cost.

This isn’t just theory—it’s already showing up in quarterly results and market activity. Export-oriented stock indices in these countries have outperformed broader markets, as investors anticipate stronger earnings from companies selling abroad.

The trend also plays into the hands of policymakers in these economies who have long faced pressure from relatively strong currencies. The weaker dollar gives them breathing room without having to intervene directly in currency markets.

Commodities Rally, but Oil Prices Lag Behind

The effect on commodities has been more complex. Gold, which often sees inflows during periods of dollar weakness, has jumped past $3,300 an ounce in 2025. It’s not just inflation hedging—gold is benefiting from capital shifting out of US equities and bonds into hard assets amid concerns about policy-driven instability.

Soybean prices are also on the rise, now trading around $10.40 per bushel. The combination of tighter global supply and lingering Chinese tariffs on US agricultural products has squeezed availability and pushed prices up—despite reduced US export volumes.

Oil hasn’t followed the same trajectory. Even with a weaker dollar, crude has pulled back from earlier gains due to worries that the ongoing trade conflict will undercut global growth and reduce fuel demand. For energy exporters, the weaker dollar offers limited consolation unless global consumption rebounds.

US Dollar Weakens Against Nearly Every Major Currency in 2025

The US dollar has continued to slide this year, with new figures showing just how widespread the decline has become. In a post shared on X, market strategist Charlie Bilello detailed how the greenback has lost ground against a broad range of global currencies.

So far in 2025, the dollar is down:

• 3% against the Australian, Canadian, and South Korean currencies

• 4% versus the Singapore dollar and Mexican peso

• 5% against the Brazilian real, British pound, and New Zealand dollar

• 7% versus the Norwegian krone

• 8% against the Polish zloty, Danish krone, and euro

• 9% versus the Hungarian forint, Japanese yen, and Swiss franc

• 11% against the Swedish krona

• 27% versus the Russian ruble

2025 Currency Returns: US Dollar vs...
Australian Dollar: -3%
Canadian Dollar: -3%
South Korean Won: -3%
Singapore Dollar: -4%
Mexican Peso: -4%
Brazilian Real: -5%
British Pound: -5%
New Zealand Dollar: -5%
Norwegian Krone: -7%
Polish Zloty: -8%
Danish Krone: -8%
Euro: -8%…

— Charlie Bilello (@charliebilello) April 17, 2025

De-Dollarization Efforts May Accelerate

Beyond short-term trading impacts, the dollar’s fall is giving more momentum to long-term efforts by several countries to reduce reliance on the US currency in global trade. Brazil, India, China, Russia, and South Africa have been working on currency swap arrangements and alternative payment systems that could gradually shift international transactions away from the dollar.

The recent slide has only reinforced their arguments, especially as dollar volatility makes trade settlements riskier. For countries managing large reserves or dealing in dollar-priced commodities, the incentive to diversify is growing stronger.

Also Read: Trump Says Fed Chair Powell Should Be Fired, Demands Immediate Rate Cuts

Apple Narrowly Dodges a Major Tariff Hit

Apple had been one of the most vulnerable companies when Trump announced new reciprocal tariffs on April 2, given that the majority of its products—including iPhones—are assembled in China. That vulnerability became painfully clear as Apple lost up to $773 billion in market cap in the days that followed.

But a late intervention from U.S. Customs and Border Protection, which issued a temporary exemption for consumer electronics late Friday, gave Apple a lifeline. The exemption effectively shielded key Apple products from the initial round of tariffs.

That relief was reflected in the markets. Apple’s stock climbed more than 2% on Monday, pushing its valuation briefly back above the $3 trillion mark. While the company isn’t out of the woods—future tariff rounds remain a possibility—the move gave investors some breathing room.

Nvidia Caught in the Crossfire Over AI Chips

Nvidia hasn’t been as fortunate. The chipmaker revealed on Tuesday that the U.S. government had expanded restrictions on the export of its high-end AI processors to China—an action that wasn’t labeled as a tariff, but had the same chilling effect.

The ban immediately rattled investors, leading to a 7% drop in Nvidia’s share price by Wednesday. The company lost $230 billion in market capitalization in a single trading session, underscoring how exposed it is to rising U.S.-China tech tensions.

While Nvidia’s core business remains strong, the inability to sell its most advanced AI chips to one of its biggest foreign markets signals a major strategic headwind. Analysts now expect slower international revenue growth as a result of the export controls.

Trade Policy Gets Personal for Tech

Trump’s tariffs have officially moved beyond steel and soybeans—tech is now front and center. The administration’s 10% blanket tariff on global imports took effect April 5, and while most reciprocal tariffs have been delayed for 90 days, a crushing 145% duty on Chinese imports is already active.

Adding to the uncertainty, the Commerce Department announced this week that it is investigating semiconductor imports under national security provisions—an inquiry that could pave the way for sweeping tariffs across the electronics sector.

That means companies like Nvidia, Apple, and others in the “Magnificent Seven” may not be spared much longer, even if they've temporarily escaped penalties.

Investors Brace for More Volatility Ahead

Wall Street is trying to make sense of a fast-changing trade landscape. Apple’s relief this week is viewed as a short-term win, not a long-term resolution. Nvidia, meanwhile, has become a symbol of how deeply U.S. national security policies are now embedded in global tech strategy.

With 90 days to go before the full set of reciprocal tariffs could take effect, and semiconductor probes already in motion, the pressure on Big Tech is only increasing.

For investors, this isn’t just about short-term headlines—it’s about adjusting to a market where politics, protectionism, and product pipelines are now permanently linked.

Also Read: Stock Futures Flat as Boeing Slides, Netflix and Bank of America Post Strong Updates

Top Industries Dominating the List

A significant portion of Glassdoor’s top internships for 2025 comes from the tech sector, but fields like consulting, finance, and biotech are also well-represented. These industries are known for offering competitive pay, robust career prospects, and the kind of stability that today’s job market demands.

"The attractiveness of these internships isn’t just about the pay,” said Daniel Zhao, Glassdoor's lead economist. “These industries offer high career growth potential and greater job security, particularly in a market that’s become more volatile over the past few years."

In a year marked by a cooling job market, companies with strong, established reputations are particularly appealing to interns, as they offer both career advancement opportunities and a sense of job security.

Glassdoor’s Top 10 Internship Rankings for 2025

Glassdoor’s rankings of the top internships take into account multiple factors, including the median monthly salary, the company’s overall ratings, and feedback about critical workplace elements such as career opportunities, culture, and work-life balance. Here are the companies topping the list this year:

10. LinkedIn

• Median Monthly Salary: $8,333

• Overall Rating: 4.1

9. Synchrony

• Median Monthly Salary: $5,166

• Overall Rating: 4.1

8. Microsoft

• Median Monthly Salary: $7,875

• Overall Rating: 4.1

7. McKinsey & Company

• Median Monthly Salary: $8,333

• Overall Rating: 4.1

6. Genentech

• Median Monthly Salary: $7,500

• Overall Rating: 4.1

5. Uber

• Median Monthly Salary: $7,750

• Overall Rating: 4.1

4. AMD

• Median Monthly Salary: $7,916

• Overall Rating: 4.2

3. NVIDIA

• Median Monthly Salary: $8,333

• Overall Rating: 4.2

2. Capital One

• Median Monthly Salary: $8,833

• Overall Rating: 4.2

1. EY - Parthenon

• Median Monthly Salary: $7,500

• Overall Rating: 4.4

How Glassdoor Compiled Its Rankings

To determine the top internships for 2025, Glassdoor analyzed a variety of factors, including median salary, employee ratings, and specific workplace characteristics like work-life balance and company culture. Companies had to meet specific qualifications, such as having at least 1,000 employees, 15 submitted salaries, and a minimum of 15 reviews from U.S.-based interns between April 2024 and March 2025.

What Makes These Internships a Big Deal Right Now

Let’s be real—internships in 2025 aren’t just résumé fillers anymore. With the job market tighter than it’s been in years, landing a spot at a top company means a lot more than just earning a monthly paycheck.

These roles can open serious doors. Interns at companies like NVIDIA, EY-Parthenon, and Microsoft aren’t just fetching coffee—they’re getting hands-on with real projects, learning directly from experienced teams, and in many cases, setting themselves up for full-time offers before graduation.

What really stands out is the kind of access these internships give you: exposure to fast-moving industries, one-on-one mentorship, and the chance to see what it’s actually like working at companies known for innovation and leadership. In a time when job stability is harder to find, having experience at a big-name firm can give you an edge that lasts well beyond summer break.

Also Read: March Jobs Report Shocks With 228,000 New Hires — But Tariffs Could Ruin the Party

The research, built on a straightforward supply-and-demand model, points to one key factor driving this projection: the number of Bitcoins being withdrawn daily from the market. When over 1,000 BTC are removed each day—mostly by long-term holders or institutional buyers—it puts noticeable pressure on the available supply. And since Bitcoin’s production is fixed and can’t ramp up like other assets, prices are pushed higher at a faster rate.

Institutions and Long-Term Holders Are Changing the Market

The study outlines how the market is shifting. Big players—institutions, funds, and seasoned investors—are accumulating Bitcoin and keeping it off exchanges. That means fewer coins are available for regular buyers. The result? Prices move faster when demand picks up.

This isn’t just a short-term trend either. More investors are treating Bitcoin like a long-term store of value, similar to gold. As they pull coins out of circulation and hold tight, new buyers have to compete for what’s left, making every coin more valuable.

Price Forecast: What the Numbers Say

According to the study, if the daily withdrawal rate stays above 1,000 BTC, the price could hit $1 million by early 2027. If that pace increases, projections go even further—up to $2 million by 2027 and as high as $5 million by 2031.

While the study stops short of claiming these numbers are guaranteed, the logic behind them is grounded in how markets work. If demand keeps rising while supply keeps shrinking, prices tend to rise. And with Bitcoin’s built-in scarcity, that effect is amplified.

A Strategic Asset, Not Just a Speculation

This research adds to the growing belief that Bitcoin is becoming a key part of long-term investment strategies, not just a speculative play. It's increasingly being viewed alongside assets like real estate or precious metals—things you buy and hold, not trade on a whim.

For investors, this means watching more than just price charts. Exchange withdrawals, institutional buying activity, and the percentage of coins held long term are now more important indicators of where Bitcoin could be heading.

As of now, Bitcoin is trading at around $84,523.85, with the total crypto market valued at about $2.64 trillion. That’s already a sign of growing confidence—but if the study’s predictions hold, we could be looking at a very different price landscape within just a few years.

Also Read: Bitcoin Miners in U.S. Facing Crisis as Trump’s 36% Tariffs Could Destroy Industry

Efficacy Results Fuel Market Optimism

After 40 weeks of treatment, Orforglipron users lost an average of 4.7% to 7.9% of their body weight depending on dosage, while those on placebo shed just 1.6%. Improvements in HbA1c, a key blood sugar marker, ranged from 1.3% to 1.6%. While it didn’t fully meet the 2% HbA1c drop that analysts such as TD Cowen had hoped for, the weight loss data was in line with expectations.

Importantly, side effects were manageable. Around 8% of patients on the highest dose discontinued treatment, while nausea was reported in 13% to 18% of participants. Diarrhea and vomiting were also noted, but no liver-related issues were observed—especially reassuring after Pfizer halted its competing pill, danuglipron, due to liver safety concerns.

Also Read: Tech Stocks Drop Due to AI Spending and Economic Worries; Eli Lilly and Berkshire Hathaway Perform Well

Competitive Advantage in a Crowded Market

Unlike peptide-based injectables such as Mounjaro and Wegovy, Orforglipron is a small molecule drug, offering easier manufacturing and distribution. This gives Lilly a strategic edge as the global obesity drug market is projected to grow to $150 billion. Pills are more accessible and cost-effective than injections, particularly in underserved and emerging markets where healthcare infrastructure can be limited.

Novo Nordisk, Lilly’s main rival, is also pursuing oral GLP-1 therapies but has faced setbacks. Results from Novo’s mid-stage pill trial last year underwhelmed investors, and its shares dipped 1% following Lilly’s latest news. Viking Therapeutics, a smaller biotech in the space, saw its stock fall 7%.

Investor Sentiment and Stock Market Reaction

The market’s reaction underscores confidence in Lilly’s execution. Kevin Gade of Bahl & Gaynor called the trial results “fantastic,” while BMO Capital Markets praised the drug’s tolerability profile. Wall Street is now pricing in future upside as Orforglipron moves closer to approval, potentially securing Lilly’s place at the top of the metabolic disease treatment sector.

Regulatory Roadmap and Commercial Strategy

Lilly is planning global regulatory submissions for weight-loss approval by the end of 2025, followed by diabetes indications in 2026. The company has already invested $550 million into inventory preparation, signaling strong expectations for rapid commercial rollout.

A second late-stage trial targeting obesity is expected to release data later this year. Success there would position Orforglipron as one of the first oral drugs approved for both weight management and type 2 diabetes, expanding its addressable market significantly.

Portfolio Synergy and Market Penetration

Lilly already commands attention in the injectable drug space with Mounjaro and Zepbound. Adding Orforglipron to its product lineup would allow the company to serve a broader patient base across multiple delivery platforms. The combination of injectables and oral therapies could help Lilly capture share from both early-stage patients and those unwilling to start with injections.

This portfolio approach also strengthens Lilly’s position in negotiations with insurers, who are actively seeking more affordable and scalable solutions to manage obesity-related healthcare costs. If priced competitively, Orforglipron could see swift uptake among payers and providers.

Strategic Growth Catalyst

Eli Lilly’s results from the Orforglipron trial point to a strong pipeline strategy with significant commercial upside. The company’s lead in the oral GLP-1 race puts it in a favorable position as investor interest in obesity and metabolic drugs continues to grow.

The latest trial results not only validate Orforglipron’s efficacy but reinforce investor confidence in Lilly’s long-term strategy to dominate this segment. For investors tracking biotech growth stories, this could mark a pivotal turning point in the fight for weight-loss drug supremacy.

Also Read: Apple’s Health Innovation: Testing Blood-Sugar Tracking for Prediabetes and Noninvasive Monitoring

Tariffs Could Push U.S. Miners Over the Edge

While the U.S. became a Bitcoin mining powerhouse, many miners still relied on machines imported from Southeast Asia. Countries like Thailand, Malaysia, and Indonesia have been the main suppliers of mining equipment. However, Trump’s latest tariff policy targets these countries, imposing fees between 24% and 36% on mining machines. Although these tariffs were initially set to begin in April, they’ve been delayed by 90 days. But the relief might be short-lived, as the higher tariffs are expected to kick in by July.

Higher Costs Could Destroy Profits

Luxor Technology, a major player in the mining machine market, imports many of its machines from Thailand. Ethan Vera, the company’s COO, explained that the 36% tariff would hit their bottom line hard. The average cost of a top-of-the-line mining machine is already between $4,000 and $5,000, and adding up to 36% to that price could push profits too low to justify the investment.

Vera put it simply: "Those machines are never going to make back their cost with a 36% tariff on them. The margins are just too tight."

Rising Costs Are a Growing Concern for U.S. Miners

The majority of Bitcoin mining in the U.S. takes place in states like Georgia, Texas, and New York, where energy costs are low. But for many miners, the biggest expense is updating equipment and keeping operations running. Marathon Digital, one of the largest mining companies in the U.S., owns around 400,000 machines. Last year, they mined nearly 9,500 Bitcoins, worth over $796 million at current prices. But if tariffs increase the price of their mining machines, they may struggle to stay profitable.

Without affordable equipment, the whole system starts to fall apart. Vera worries that miners could end up unable to recover their investments in these machines if tariffs make the costs too high.

Miners Considering Moving Elsewhere

Some Bitcoin miners are already exploring the possibility of moving their operations outside of the U.S. Taras Kulyk, CEO of Synteq Digital, a distributor for Bitmain mining machines, shared that several of his clients have asked him to find mining sites in other countries.

"If policies keep changing unpredictably, companies will be forced to move," Kulyk said. "You need stable policies to attract billions in investment."

But not everyone is ready to leave. Compass Mining, another large player in the industry, still plans to operate in the U.S. However, the company is waiting for clarity on the tariff issue before making further moves. Vishnu Mackenchery, global logistics manager at Compass Mining, said they want to keep expanding within the U.S., but that’s not possible unless the tariff situation gets resolved soon.

“We want to continue building here,” Mackenchery said. “But we need clarity on the tariffs to move forward.”

What’s at Stake for U.S. Bitcoin Miners?

The clock is ticking for Bitcoin miners across the U.S. As the new tariffs loom, many are feeling the weight of what’s coming next. While the 90-day pause offers some breathing room, it’s clear that the industry is in limbo. If the tariffs go into full effect by July, miners will face a stark reality: higher costs that could force some to rethink their entire business strategy.

For now, companies are looking at their options. Some are considering shifting operations to countries with fewer restrictions, while others are weighing the impact of these tariffs on their long-term viability in the U.S. The next few months will be critical, and the direction the industry takes could determine whether the U.S. remains a dominant player in global Bitcoin mining or falls behind.

Also Read: Iris Energy Expands Bitcoin Mining and AI Services for Future Growth

In a sharply worded post on his social media platform Truth Social on Thursday, Trump criticized the central bank’s handling of interest rates and said Powell “should have lowered interest rates, like the European Central Bank, long ago — but he should certainly lower them now.” He ended the post by saying Powell’s removal “cannot come fast enough.”

This isn’t the first time Trump has publicly gone after Powell. Tensions between the two have flared since Powell was appointed by Trump himself in 2018. As inflation and borrowing costs remain high, Trump has made it clear he believes the Fed’s decisions are hurting the economy.

Why Trump Wants Rates Lowered

Trump has consistently pushed for lower interest rates as a way to stimulate economic growth. Lower rates mean cheaper loans for consumers and businesses — a move that can boost investment, housing, and spending.

In contrast, the Federal Reserve has raised interest rates over the last two years to combat inflation, which reached a 40-year high in 2022. While inflation has cooled somewhat in recent months, the Fed remains cautious about cutting rates too early, fearing it could trigger another surge in prices.

By pushing for immediate rate cuts, Trump is signaling that he believes the risk of slower economic growth or a potential recession outweighs the risk of lingering inflation.

Powell Stands by Fed Independence

Just a day before Trump’s latest comments, Powell addressed the Economic Club of Chicago and emphasized the importance of the Fed’s independence from political pressure. “That independence is very widely understood and supported in Washington and in Congress where it really matters,” he said.

Powell’s message was clear: the Fed will make its decisions based on economic data, not political influence.

Can a President Fire the Fed Chair?

Although Trump has expressed interest in removing Powell in the past, it’s not a simple process. The Federal Reserve Chair serves a four-year term and cannot be fired just for policy disagreements. Legal experts say a sitting president would need substantial cause — like misconduct — to try to remove a Fed chair.

Powell’s current term as Chair runs through early 2026, and no formal steps have been taken to replace him.

Political Pressure Builds as Rate Debate Grows

Trump’s renewed attacks on Powell aren’t just about policy—they could shape how the public views the Fed’s role heading into a crucial election year. By demanding immediate rate cuts and criticizing Powell’s leadership, Trump is setting a clear contrast between his economic approach and the Fed’s more cautious strategy.

If rates remain high and economic growth slows, expect Trump to keep spotlighting the Fed as a roadblock to recovery. That kind of pressure could put Powell in a challenging position—trying to stick to long-term goals like controlling inflation while facing increasingly politicized criticism from the White House.

While the Fed isn’t expected to shift its stance based on Trump’s comments, the messaging could still influence markets, investor confidence, and even public sentiment about the central bank’s independence.

Also Read: Lost Your Social Security Benefit? Here's What You Can Do to Get It Back

Last week, the administration slapped a 145% tariff on Chinese-made goods, part of a sweeping strategy to pressure American tech companies to move their supply chains out of China. While devices like smartphones and laptops received temporary exemptions, Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick confirmed that new tariffs on semiconductors and related tech hardware are still on the table.

But even with escalating costs for Chinese imports, tech giants aren’t stampeding back to American soil. Instead, they’re turning to India — a country that has quietly become the top alternative for high-volume electronics manufacturing.

India Gains Momentum as U.S. Pushes Tariff Pressure

Apple, which once relied almost exclusively on Chinese factories, has spent years expanding its footprint in India. The company now manufactures a growing share of iPhones there, and analysts expect that number to rise as the U.S.-China trade dispute intensifies.

Chris Rogers, head of supply chain research at S&P Global Market Intelligence, pointed out that Apple’s India shift wasn’t overnight. “It’s taken three years to get Indian production from planning to scale. Full supply chain integration will take at least two more,” he said.

For companies like Apple, India offers a middle ground: lower costs than the U.S., fewer geopolitical risks than China, and a government eager to support electronics manufacturing with subsidies and infrastructure.

Labor, Logistics, and Long-Term Strategy

While President Trump has pushed for U.S.-based production as a patriotic move, the challenges remain significant. Domestic assembly requires tens of thousands of trained workers, many of whom would need to take on repetitive, physically demanding tasks. Even with automation, the scale of labor needed simply doesn’t exist in the U.S. right now.

And while some firms — including Nvidia, Apple, and TSMC — have announced multi-billion-dollar investments in American infrastructure, much of that spending was already in motion. Analysts say these projects are not evidence of a large-scale return to U.S. manufacturing, but rather a diversification strategy with India and Mexico playing larger roles.

India’s Edge: Speed, Scale, and Incentives

India has made itself more attractive by streamlining regulations, offering production-linked incentives, and helping firms secure land and labor quickly. Companies like Foxconn and Wistron — Apple’s key partners — have already established major operations in southern India, producing iPhones and other components at increasing volumes.

The Indian government has also worked closely with global chipmakers to develop semiconductor capabilities. Though still behind Taiwan or South Korea, India is positioning itself as a serious player in the next phase of tech manufacturing.

Why the U.S. Isn’t the Default Choice

According to Morgan Stanley’s Erik Woodring, large-scale tech hardware production is unlikely to shift to the U.S. any time soon. “The cost of building and operating massive factories in the U.S. is still too high. Labor, logistics, and regulatory hurdles make it difficult to scale,” he said.

He also noted that tariff exemptions on finished goods weaken the incentive to manufacture domestically. “We saw the same thing during Trump’s first term. The rhetoric was strong, but the numbers didn’t support a return to U.S. manufacturing in any meaningful way,” he added.

Cost Pressures May Hit U.S. Consumers

If tariffs continue and production remains overseas, U.S. consumers could face higher prices. Devices like smartphones, laptops, and tablets may become more expensive as companies look to offset the increased costs of compliance and logistics.

India’s role in easing that pressure is now more critical than ever. By keeping production efficient and relatively affordable, India helps prevent a sharp jump in prices — at least in the short term.

India, Not America, Is the Future of Tech Manufacturing

Despite bold policy moves and heavy tariffs, the Trump administration is unlikely to reverse the global manufacturing map in just a few years. Tech giants are betting on India — not the U.S. — to take on a larger role in their supply chains.

The strategy is clear: avoid tariffs, reduce dependency on China, and expand in regions that offer scale without political headaches. For now, India checks all those boxes — and it's becoming the new frontline in the global tech manufacturing shift.

Also Read: Nvidia to Invest $500 Billion in U.S. AI Infrastructure with TSMC Partnership

New figures from the Mortgage Bankers Association show that applications to buy a home dropped by 5% in the past week, while refinance applications slid 12%. This downturn comes as mortgage rates climbed significantly, following turbulence in financial markets tied to ongoing concerns over U.S. trade policy.

“Purchase volume is still higher than this time last year, but the recent swings in rates and broader economic anxiety are likely making some buyers think twice before locking in a mortgage,” said Mike Fratantoni, chief economist at the MBA.

The average 30-year fixed mortgage rate rose to 6.81% last week, up from around 6.6% just a few days earlier. The rise mirrored a surge in the 10-year Treasury yield, which often guides mortgage pricing. The jump came after investors sold off stocks and bonds amid renewed concerns over U.S. tariffs. While the White House has since stepped back from some of the tariff increases, the temporary market turmoil was enough to push mortgage rates higher.

By Tuesday, rates had crept up even further, reaching 6.88% based on daily tracking data. For borrowers already grappling with high home prices, the rise in rates has added another layer of affordability challenges.

In response, more buyers are turning to adjustable-rate mortgages (ARMs), which offer lower introductory rates compared to fixed-rate loans. ARMs accounted for nearly 10% of all mortgage applications last week — the highest share since late 2023, when fixed rates topped 7%. For some borrowers, the trade-off of lower upfront payments is worth the risk of future rate resets, especially if they don’t plan to stay in the home long-term.

What this trend reveals is a housing market that’s still very sensitive to changes in borrowing costs. While demand hasn't vanished, it is clearly shifting. Buyers are becoming more selective, and many are reconsidering their timelines — or their budgets — as economic signals grow more mixed. The rate-driven slowdown may not be long-lasting, but for now, it's enough to give both buyers and lenders a reason to pause.

Also Read: 3 Must-Know Real Estate Tax Benefits Investors Can Use in 2025

Nvidia was in focus after it said the U.S. government had tightened rules around the overseas sale of some of its advanced computer chips. The news sent its shares down 6.3% in after-hours trading.

China’s Economic Growth Strong, but Quarterly Pace Slows

China reported 5.4% annual growth for the first quarter, driven by gains in manufacturing, exports, and retail sales. But quarter-to-quarter growth slowed to 1.2%, a drop from the 1.6% seen in the final three months of 2024.

Markets in mainland China and Hong Kong fell on the update, as investors focused more on the slower pace of growth than the headline figure. The Shanghai Composite lost 0.9% to 3,237.60, and the Hang Seng in Hong Kong tumbled 2.5% to 20,922.54.

Recent increases in tariffs by both the U.S. and China are adding to the unease. President Donald Trump raised tariffs on most goods coming from China to 145%, while Beijing responded with its own set of duties, now reaching 125% on U.S. imports. Economists are warning that this back-and-forth could cool economic activity in the coming months.

According to analysts, the real damage may come not from the tariffs themselves, but from the unpredictability of the policy changes, which is already hurting business confidence.

Markets in the Region Follow the Downtrend

Japan’s Nikkei 225 slipped 0.9% to 22,948.18. South Korea’s Kospi was also down 0.7%, closing at 2,461.45. Markets in India were little changed, while Australia’s ASX 200 rose slightly by 0.3% to 7,781.10. In Thailand, the SET index picked up 0.2%.

Wall Street Slows as Investors Watch Trade Developments

U.S. markets pulled back modestly on Tuesday. The S&P 500 eased 0.2% to 5,396.63, the Dow Jones Industrial Average dipped 0.4% to 40,368.96, and the Nasdaq edged down slightly to 16,823.17.

The bond market, which has seen some turbulence recently, showed signs of calming. The yield on the 10-year Treasury note settled at 4.33%, down from highs earlier in the week. Stable bond yields are often seen as a sign that investors are regaining some confidence.

Currency markets also steadied. The U.S. dollar was slightly lower against the yen, trading at 142.61. The euro ticked up to $1.1336.

Tech and Banks in Spotlight

Aside from Nvidia’s drop, other notable moves included Palantir Technologies, which gained 6.2% after NATO confirmed it would use the company’s software for command-related operations.

Big U.S. banks also saw strong results. Bank of America jumped 3.6% after reporting quarterly profits that beat analyst expectations. Citigroup also posted solid numbers, rising 1.8%. Their trading desks have benefited from the recent market swings linked to trade headlines.

On the downside, healthcare provider DaVita fell for a second straight day, down another 3%. The company is still responding to a ransomware attack discovered over the weekend. It’s currently investigating the extent of the damage.

Oil Prices Dip on Growth Concerns

In energy trading, U.S. crude slipped 19 cents to $61.14 a barrel. Brent crude, the international benchmark, dropped 18 cents to $64.49. Weakening demand expectations—tied in part to global trade worries—are keeping oil prices under pressure.

Also Read: Massive U.S. Tariff Hits India’s Diamond Industry — Thousands of Jobs at Risk!

Amid this uncertainty, gold continues to be seen as a safe-haven asset. As stock markets remain volatile, investors are looking for ways to protect their wealth from economic shifts, with gold proving to be a reliable option in uncertain times.

Gold’s Continued Growth Reflects Investor Confidence in Stability

Over the past month, gold prices have risen nearly 8%, moving from $2,994.40 on March 14 to $3,226.10 on Tuesday. This is part of a longer-term trend, as gold has gained 37% over the last year, increasing from $2,362.10 on April 15, 2024.

The ongoing increase in gold’s value highlights its appeal as a stable asset during periods of economic volatility. While other markets have fluctuated, gold has provided consistent growth, making it an attractive option for those seeking to minimize risk. With ongoing uncertainty in the global economy, gold has proven itself to be a strong investment.

Physical Gold: A Reliable Option with Practical Considerations

For those looking to hold gold in its physical form, the appeal is clear. Unlike stocks or bonds, physical gold offers security without being tied to the fluctuations of the financial market. It’s a tangible asset that doesn’t rely on banks or financial systems, which is why many investors turn to it during uncertain times.

However, owning physical gold also comes with its own set of challenges. The main issue is security—whether stored at home or in a depository, gold must be protected from theft. There are also practical concerns with selling physical gold. Unlike stocks, which can be quickly bought or sold online, selling physical gold requires finding a buyer, and it often comes with additional costs like a markup of 5% or more.

For those willing to manage these challenges, physical gold can be a valuable part of an investment strategy, offering stability and a sense of security.

Gold’s Cyclical Nature: Why It Can Be a Long-Term Investment

Gold has historically gone through periods of significant price increases followed by slower, more stagnant phases. After a surge in the aftermath of the 2008 financial crisis, gold prices didn’t reach new highs for almost a decade. This cyclical pattern means that, while gold can provide strong returns, its performance isn’t always steady.

For investors, this means that gold should be viewed as part of a diversified portfolio, helping to balance risk during times when other investments might not perform as well. While gold’s value has surged recently, it’s important to remember that it may experience slower growth during periods of market stability or when other assets are outperforming.

Gold’s Role in Today’s Market: A Safe Haven in Uncertain Times

In today’s market, with trade tensions, inflation concerns, and geopolitical risks affecting global economies, gold remains one of the most reliable ways to protect wealth. While stocks and bonds are exposed to market fluctuations, gold’s price is more stable, offering a sense of security for investors looking to shield their portfolios from risk.

Whether held physically or through financial products like gold ETFs, the metal is playing an increasingly important role in many portfolios. As trade and economic uncertainty continue to influence markets, gold is likely to remain a key asset for those focused on long-term stability and wealth preservation.

Also Read: Gold Prices Reach Record High, Set for Strongest Quarter in Decades

Binance was among the first to report problems, saying that some parts of its platform were down because of a temporary network interruption at AWS. The exchange paused withdrawals as a precaution but reopened them after about 20 minutes. Although the issue was short-lived, some users continued facing delays and errors while placing trades.

KuCoin also experienced service interruptions during the outage. Its technical team worked to restore functionality and reassured users that their funds were safe. Similar problems were reported by MEXC, which warned users about delayed chart updates and asset transfers. MEXC also stated it would compensate users who suffered any losses due to the disruption.

Other platforms affected included Rabby Wallet and on-chain analytics tool DeBank, both of which temporarily went offline during the outage.

AWS confirmed the problem began around 1:15 a.m. Pacific Time and was resolved within 36 minutes. The cloud computing service powers a wide range of businesses by hosting websites, apps, and data storage. A problem with AWS can cause sudden outages across platforms that rely on it — as seen in this case.

This disruption has raised questions within the crypto industry about the risks of depending on centralized infrastructure like AWS. Experts say that although services like AWS offer high performance and convenience, they also create a single point of failure. A growing number of developers are now looking at decentralized alternatives such as Filecoin or Akash Network to help reduce this dependency.

While services are back to normal across most platforms, crypto users are being encouraged to stay informed through official channels and remain cautious while trading.

The brief outage also highlighted how much crypto platforms rely on cloud services like AWS. As more exchanges and tools run on the same infrastructure, even a short disruption can cause widespread problems for users worldwide.

Also Read: Bitcoin Could Challenge the U.S. Dollar, Says BlackRock CEO Larry Fink

Nasdaq futures were up 0.1% after the index rose 0.6% the day before. S&P 500 and Dow Jones futures showed little movement following Monday’s gains of 0.8% each. In other markets, Bitcoin rose around 1% to trade near $85,500, while the 10-year Treasury yield inched up toward 4.4%. Oil prices dropped slightly, and gold futures saw a small increase.

Boeing shares fell by about 3.5% in early trading after reports that Chinese regulators told their airlines to stop accepting deliveries of Boeing jets. The move comes amid rising trade tensions between the US and China. After the US raised tariffs on Chinese goods to 145%, China responded with tariffs of its own, including on US-made aircraft. Chinese authorities reportedly said the new costs made Boeing planes too expensive and also told carriers to stop buying US aircraft parts.

Netflix stock rose over 2% after reports that the company shared strong long-term financial goals with employees. Netflix is aiming to double its revenue by 2030 and hopes to reach a $1 trillion market value. The company also set a goal of making $9 billion in global advertising revenue. Netflix is currently worth about $400 billion and is expected to report its first-quarter earnings later this week.

Bank of America shares were up nearly 2% after the company posted better-than-expected results. The bank reported earnings of $0.90 per share and revenue of $27.37 billion. Analysts had predicted earnings of $0.82 and revenue of $26.80 billion. CEO Brian Moynihan said the company remains in a strong position, even with possible changes in the economy. Despite some losses earlier this year, the bank’s solid performance helped reassure investors.

Johnson & Johnson also beat expectations in its latest earnings report. The company posted earnings of $2.77 per share and revenue of $21.89 billion, both higher than analysts had forecast. It also raised its full-year sales outlook, now expecting between $91.0 billion and $91.8 billion in operational sales. Even with the strong report, J&J shares were down about 1% in early trading, though the stock remains up 7% for the year.

Investors will continue to watch for more earnings results and any news on trade policies that could affect market direction in the days ahead.

Also Read: Kraken Rolls Out Commission-Free Stock and ETF Trading in the U.S.

This massive investment underscores Nvidia’s commitment to scaling up AI capabilities domestically at a time when the U.S. government is pushing to reduce reliance on foreign production. Tensions in global trade and the imposition of higher tariffs have prompted tech firms to reconfigure their supply chains, bringing more operations back within U.S. borders.

As part of this effort, TSMC has officially begun producing Nvidia’s latest-generation chips at its advanced fabrication facility in Phoenix, Arizona. The factory is a key piece of the puzzle in Nvidia’s strategy to localize production of its high-performance AI chips, which are essential for data centers, machine learning, and other advanced computing applications.

Nvidia's long-term plan involves working with a network of U.S.-based suppliers, foundries, and cloud infrastructure providers to build out AI data centers and develop a domestic pipeline for next-gen AI tools. This will not only help meet growing demand for AI processing power but also strengthen the U.S.'s position in the global technology race.

The Phoenix site is one of several investments being developed in tandem with federal initiatives aimed at boosting semiconductor production in the U.S., including funding incentives through the CHIPS Act. Nvidia’s $500 billion estimate includes hardware, software development, and cloud infrastructure required to support the rapid adoption of AI across industries.

With AI transforming everything from healthcare and transportation to finance and national defense, Nvidia’s move signals a major commitment to scaling technology within the U.S. ecosystem—not just for today’s demand, but to support innovation for the next decade.

Also Read: Apple and Nvidia Get Tariff Relief—iPhones, Laptops, and Chips Avoid Price Hike

According to Kraken, the rollout will begin with a limited number of states, with more to follow once the company secures the necessary regulatory approvals. An international launch is also on the roadmap, though no specific timeline has been announced.

Kraken co-CEO Arjun Sethi said the company sees traditional stocks as a natural addition to its services, calling this shift an important move toward building a unified platform for both crypto and conventional assets. “This sets the foundation for asset tokenization,” he said. “We believe the future of investing is global, operates 24/7, and runs on blockchain infrastructure.”

Kraken's strategy appears focused on meeting demand from investors who want more flexibility and fewer restrictions in managing their portfolios. By combining traditional equities with digital asset trading in one place, Kraken is looking to appeal to users seeking simplicity and convenience.

This new offering puts Kraken in direct competition with zero-commission trading platforms like Robinhood. However, Kraken is leveraging its deep crypto roots and existing user base to stand out. While platforms like Robinhood began with stocks and added crypto later, Kraken is taking the opposite path—bringing its crypto-native ecosystem into the world of traditional finance.

In addition to removing trading fees, Kraken’s long-term vision includes creating blockchain-based systems for trading tokenized versions of real-world assets. The idea is to eventually allow users to invest in stocks, property, or other assets through blockchain-powered transactions, with greater transparency and fewer limitations.

At this stage, the new stock trading feature is only available to eligible U.S. users, depending on their state of residence. Users are encouraged to check whether their state currently supports the new trading option through Kraken’s platform.

Kraken’s entry into equity trading comes at a time when financial services are undergoing significant change. Investors are increasingly looking for platforms that support both traditional and digital assets in one unified experience. With this rollout, Kraken is making its play to become one of those go-to platforms—without the commission fees that have long been a barrier for smaller investors.

Also Read: SEC Drops Kraken Lawsuit After Lengthy Legal Battle

Here are three major tax benefits you should know about if you're investing in real estate:

1. Pay Less Tax with Long-Term Capital Gains Rates

Not all profits are taxed equally. If you sell a property you've owned for less than a year, those gains are taxed as ordinary income—which could mean losing up to 37% of your profit, depending on your tax bracket. But if you hold the property for more than a year, your gains may qualify for long-term capital gains tax rates, which range from 0% to 20%.

For example, let’s say you bought a rental property for $300,000 and sold it two years later for $400,000. If you fall into the 15% long-term capital gains bracket, you’d pay $15,000 in taxes instead of up to $37,000 at the highest income rate—a savings of $22,000.

Holding your investment a little longer can make a big difference come tax season. And if you fall into a lower income bracket, you may not owe any capital gains tax at all. That’s a major advantage for investors who plan strategically.

2. Use a 1031 Exchange to Keep Growing Without Paying Taxes Right Away

The 1031 exchange is one of the most powerful tools available to real estate investors. It lets you sell one investment property and reinvest the proceeds into another similar property—without paying capital gains taxes on the first sale.

This strategy lets you “defer” taxes, meaning you don’t have to pay them until you eventually sell a property and don’t replace it. Many experienced investors use 1031 exchanges to keep upgrading to larger or more profitable properties without taking a tax hit each time.

Here’s a simplified example: You sell a rental property for $500,000 and reinvest the proceeds into a $600,000 property. If the exchange is done correctly and meets IRS guidelines, you won’t owe taxes on the gains from the $500,000 sale.

But be careful—there are strict rules and deadlines. You must identify the new property within 45 days and close the deal within 180 days. A qualified intermediary is also required to handle the transaction, and both properties must be held for investment purposes (not personal use).

If done right, this strategy can help you snowball your real estate portfolio—tax-deferred.

3. Exclude Up to $500,000 in Profit When Selling Your Primary Residence

If you’re selling your main home—not a rental or investment property—you might qualify for one of the most generous tax breaks out there: the Section 121 exclusion.

Under this IRS rule, you can exclude up to $250,000 in profit from the sale of your home if you’re single, or up to $500,000 if you’re married and filing jointly.

To qualify, you generally need to:

• Own the home for at least 2 of the past 5 years

• Live in the home as your primary residence for at least 2 of the past 5 years

You don’t need to use the years consecutively, and you can rent out the home for part of the time—as long as you meet the ownership and use tests.

This exclusion can save homeowners tens or even hundreds of thousands of dollars, especially in today’s hot housing market where prices have surged in many areas.

Bonus Tips for Real Estate Investors:

• Track Expenses Closely: You may be able to deduct mortgage interest, property taxes, insurance, maintenance, and depreciation from your rental income. That lowers your taxable income and could keep you in a lower tax bracket.

• Use Depreciation Strategically: Real estate allows for depreciation deductions, which can help you reduce your yearly tax liability—even if your property is gaining value in real life.

• Work with a Tax Pro: Real estate tax rules are complex. Partnering with an experienced CPA or tax advisor can help you avoid mistakes and take full advantage of all available benefits.

Smart investing doesn’t stop at buying the right property—it also means understanding how the tax code works in your favor. Whether you’re holding a home long enough to qualify for lower capital gains, using a 1031 exchange to upgrade without penalties, or taking advantage of exclusions when selling your primary residence, these strategies can make a noticeable difference. The more informed your decisions, the better positioned you'll be to grow and protect your real estate profits.

Also Read: How to Use Your 401(k) or IRA for Real Estate Investments Without Breaking the Rules

Speaking during an interview on ABC's This Week, Lutnick explained that the new tariffs could be introduced within the next month. He emphasized that the government is taking a different approach with these electronics by placing them under their own category of tariffs.

Just a few days earlier, the Biden administration had approved temporary tariff exemptions for many of these items, most of which are imported from China. That decision was seen as a relief for tech companies like Apple, which depend on overseas manufacturing to supply products like iPhones and MacBooks.

However, the latest comments from Lutnick make it clear that this relief may only be temporary. While the exact details of the upcoming tariffs haven’t been finalized, the message is that electronics and chip-related imports are still very much part of the broader trade strategy.

The administration appears to be aiming for a more targeted tariff plan, one that separates high-tech goods like semiconductors from other imports. This approach could allow officials to balance national security concerns and trade policy without putting immediate pressure on consumer prices.

Industry analysts and companies are now waiting for further guidance on how these new tariffs will be structured and when they’ll take effect. For now, businesses relying on foreign-made electronics are preparing for possible cost increases and supply chain adjustments.

Also Read: Apple and Nvidia Get Tariff Relief—iPhones, Laptops, and Chips Avoid Price Hike

In his 2025 annual letter to shareholders, Fink didn't mince words about the growing vulnerabilities of the U.S. financial system. He pointed to the ballooning national debt and rising interest payments as potential cracks in the dollar’s longstanding dominance. While he didn’t make any sweeping predictions, Fink acknowledged that digital assets like Bitcoin could start to fill the gap if trust in the dollar continues to erode.

The idea of Bitcoin stepping into such a critical role may sound far-fetched, especially to traditional investors. But it’s not entirely without basis. Bitcoin’s fixed supply, decentralized nature, and global accessibility offer a unique contrast to fiat currencies. In fact, many within the crypto community have long believed that Bitcoin was built for exactly this kind of scenario — a time when governments’ fiscal policies begin to stretch beyond what global markets can support.

Fink’s comments come at a time when U.S. debt is projected to hit a new milestone. According to his letter, interest payments on federal debt are expected to reach nearly $1 trillion this year, outpacing even defense spending. That kind of financial strain, he warns, puts the nation’s monetary leadership at risk. He draws a comparison to Great Britain’s decline as a financial superpower after World War II, suggesting the U.S. could face a similar turning point if it doesn’t address its spending habits.

While Bitcoin replacing the dollar might not happen overnight, the groundwork is already being laid. Governments are beginning to take notice. The U.S. has started building a Strategic Bitcoin Reserve. Other countries, like Russia and China, are experimenting with using cryptocurrency for cross-border trade, especially in the energy sector. Even smaller nations, such as Bolivia and El Salvador, are exploring new ways to settle payments using digital assets.

These early steps may seem small, but they could be part of a larger shift. If enough countries begin to adopt Bitcoin for trade, reserves, or even debt issuance, the global financial system might slowly start to tilt in a new direction.

Of course, any real change would take time — and likely a massive international agreement, similar to the 1944 Bretton Woods Conference that originally established the dollar’s reserve status. But in today’s increasingly complex and debt-heavy financial landscape, that kind of shift doesn’t seem as impossible as it once did.

Fink’s perspective might not be a call to arms, but it’s certainly a signal. As concerns grow around fiscal sustainability and geopolitical tensions rise, Bitcoin’s appeal as a global asset is starting to look a little less speculative — and a little more strategic.

Also Read: BlackRock Buys $66M in Bitcoin as Market Crashes

DOGE—short for “Decentralized Operations for Government Efficiency”—is a federal initiative aimed at cutting costs and reducing bureaucracy. While the intent is to make government leaner and more responsive, Summers argued that key agencies are being weakened in the process, putting essential services and revenue collection at risk.

IRS Workforce Cuts Raise Alarms Over Tax Collection

One of Summers’ major concerns involves the Internal Revenue Service (IRS), which is currently undergoing substantial staffing cuts. Earlier this year, the White House introduced a plan to shrink the IRS through buyouts and deferred resignations, aiming to reduce federal spending.

Summers warned that gutting the IRS could result in a significant drop in tax revenue, particularly from high-income earners who typically require more detailed audits.

“We are laying off the very people responsible for ensuring the wealthiest Americans pay their fair share,” Summers said.

According to IRS data, audits of individuals earning over $10 million per year have declined sharply over the past decade. Summers believes further weakening the agency could widen the gap between taxes owed and taxes actually collected—known as the “tax gap.”

This gap is already estimated to exceed $600 billion annually. By cutting auditors and investigators, Summers argued, the government could lose far more in uncollected taxes than it saves in reduced payroll costs.

Support for Reform, But Not at the Expense of Functionality

Despite his criticism, Summers acknowledged that the US government is in need of reform. He agreed with fellow podcast guest Ezra Klein that certain departments have grown inefficient and that political leaders have at times lost touch with core public concerns.

However, Summers emphasized that reform must be strategic and not rely on what he described as "blunt, destructive" methods.

“We can’t treat institutions like the IRS as villains,” Summers said. “They play a vital role in holding the system together.”

He compared the government’s current approach to trying to fix a watch by smashing it with a hammer—pointing out that care, precision, and balance are essential when managing a system as complex as the US economy.

Concerns About Economic Fallout and Deficit Growth

Summers also expressed concern about the long-term financial effects of DOGE. With reduced tax revenue, he believes the initiative could actually worsen the national deficit—directly undermining one of its core goals.

“The path we’re on could leave the US in deeper debt, not less,” he warned.

The economist said that while cutting costs might appeal to some voters, it cannot come at the expense of core infrastructure like tax enforcement, cybersecurity, or compliance systems. In his view, without a reliable way to collect revenue, the government will struggle to fund critical services and could face mounting borrowing needs.

Debate Over Tax Enforcement and Government Overreach

Podcast host and investor Chamath Palihapitiya challenged Summers by sharing his personal experience with annual audits. He argued that aggressive tax enforcement can be overly intrusive. However, Summers responded that the issue is not excessive audits of middle- or upper-middle-income individuals, but rather the under-auditing of ultra-wealthy taxpayers.

IRS enforcement has been in decline for years, particularly for those at the top end of the income scale. According to Treasury data, audit rates for high-income earners have dropped by over 70% since 2010.

Summers emphasized that increasing the audit rate for multimillionaires and billionaires would likely boost government revenue significantly—and that shrinking the IRS does the opposite.

Context of Past Economic Criticism

Summers has frequently voiced concerns about poorly designed economic strategies. He previously criticized President Trump’s tariff policies, calling them self-defeating and harmful to both US businesses and international trade.

On the podcast, he said current actions risk repeating similar mistakes—policies that aim to sound tough but may end up hurting the very system they’re supposed to improve.

“You don’t fix a broken machine by smashing its parts. You identify what’s wrong and invest in making it work better.”

Summers expressed concern that the current direction could result in a weakening of crucial government institutions, erode public confidence, and put even more strain on the nation’s finances. He pointed out that while the intent behind DOGE is to streamline government functions, any reform is bound to fail without a solid foundation of efficient tax collection and institutional integrity.

At the time of writing, the White House has yet to respond to Summers' criticism. His comments add another layer to the ongoing debate over how to balance reform with the need for a stable and reliable system—something he believes is being jeopardized by the current approach.

Also Read: Elon Musk Reportedly Stepping Back from DOGE—Tesla Stock Surges in Response

Speaking on TheStreet Roundtable with Scott Melker, Rochard explained that Bitcoin should be treated as a strategic asset, just like oil or gold. “To my knowledge, I was the first one to use the term ‘strategic Bitcoin reserve’ back in 2020,” he said. And now, as more people—including some in government—begin to talk seriously about that idea, Rochard wants to make sure the U.S. acts quickly and smartly.

Step One: Find Out What We Actually Own

According to Rochard, the Biden administration hasn’t been transparent about what’s happened to Bitcoin seized by the government over the years. “We need to audit what Bitcoin we currently hold,” he said. “It’s unclear what’s been sold or kept, and that’s a big problem if we’re talking about making BTC part of our national reserves.”

Step Two: Build the Reserve Without Busting the Budget

Once the numbers are clear, Rochard wants the U.S. to begin accumulating Bitcoin in a way that doesn’t add pressure to the national budget. One idea is to borrow a page from MicroStrategy—the software company known for using corporate bonds to buy BTC.

At a recent Bitcoin for America Summit, Andrew Haines proposed a similar model for the government: issue U.S. Treasury bonds, but use 10% of the proceeds to buy Bitcoin. The other 90% would still go toward regular government expenses.

“This could actually be a win for the Treasury,” said Rochard. “Not only would it be budget-friendly, but it could also lower our long-term interest costs.”

Making Bitcoin a Practical Part of U.S. Fiscal Policy

Rochard emphasizes that the focus isn’t just on holding Bitcoin—it’s about how the U.S. can build a reserve without adding financial strain. One of the most promising ideas, he says, is using treasury bonds to fund Bitcoin purchases, similar to what MicroStrategy has done on a corporate level.

By allocating a small portion—say 10%—of bond proceeds toward Bitcoin and the rest toward traditional obligations, the U.S. could tap into BTC’s long-term potential without blowing the budget. “This approach could actually lower the Treasury’s borrowing costs while also giving investors additional upside,” he explained.

The goal, according to Rochard, is clear: increase transparency, use innovative funding tools, and begin accumulating Bitcoin in a way that’s financially responsible.

Also Read: BitGo Partners with Voltage to Deliver Faster, Cheaper Bitcoin Payments via Lightning Network

The Citan, primarily designed for commercial use, and the T-Class, aimed at private consumers, will both be withdrawn from the market. Their discontinuation also brings an end to Mercedes’ long-running collaboration with French automaker Renault, which co-developed the models under a shared platform agreement.

The decision marks a strategic refocus for Mercedes-Benz as it continues to streamline its vehicle offerings and realign product development priorities. Both models had been built on Renault’s Kangoo platform, forming a part of the German automaker’s effort to compete in the compact van segment.

While Mercedes has not issued an official public statement on the report, internal documents sent to dealers reportedly confirm that production will cease by mid-2026.

The exit of the Citan and T-Class reflects the company's evolving strategy in response to shifting market demand and the challenges of maintaining profitability in the light commercial and compact passenger van categories.

Also Read: Novares, Valeo Force Customers to Pay 25% U.S. Auto Tariff Upfront as Trump Trade Move Hits Hard

Despite the United States leading the world in oil production—pumping around 13.55 million barrels per day—companies across the sector are now signaling plans to scale back. A sharp fall in oil prices and added pressure from new tariffs have clouded the outlook for U.S. producers, many of whom say drilling just isn’t worth it if crude prices stay low.

Lower Prices Trigger Tough Choices

Since Trump’s inauguration, U.S. crude has dropped from about $78 a barrel to nearly $55. That’s a problem for producers who say they need at least $65 to keep drilling profitable. Below that, it’s tough to justify new projects, let alone maintain current operations.

Making matters worse, new tariffs have made drilling equipment and steel more expensive. Much of that material comes from overseas, including China, and energy companies are now feeling the squeeze from both higher costs and lower returns.

OPEC’s Move Adds More Pressure

Just days after the administration introduced fresh trade tariffs, OPEC and its allies announced a plan to increase oil output. That announcement added even more pressure on prices, pushing them to levels not seen since the early months of the pandemic. The U.S. Energy Information Administration lowered its forecast for crude prices in 2025 to $63.88 per barrel—down sharply from its earlier projection of $70.68.

Layoffs and Fewer Rigs on the Horizon

Even before the recent downturn, big names like Chevron and SLB had begun cutting jobs to reduce expenses. The U.S. oil rig count, which once stood at nearly 900 in 2018, has now fallen to just over 500. And industry insiders warn that if oil prices stay in the $50s, the rig count could drop even further—possibly by half.

“You can’t expect companies to keep drilling if they’re losing money,” said Roe Patterson of Marauder Capital, a firm that invests in oilfield services. “Right now, OPEC’s gain is looking like America’s loss.”

Cost of Doing Business Keeps Climbing

It’s not just the price of oil that’s the issue. The costs tied to running a well—things like steel, parts, and machinery—are also rising due to tariffs. Companies like Premium Oilfield Technologies have started passing those costs directly to their customers.

While drilling techniques have become more efficient in recent years, many in the industry believe the big productivity gains have already been made. Future improvements, they say, won’t be enough to offset the rising cost of materials and ongoing volatility in oil prices.

Margins Are Thin, Even in the Best Spots

Even in the Permian Basin, where costs are lowest, companies need higher prices to cover things like dividends and debt. In other regions, like North Dakota, it can take at least $57 a barrel just to break even on a new well.

Research shows that when all expenses are factored in—operations, repayments, and shareholder obligations—many firms need prices well above $60 to stay afloat. And the price floor at which companies consider shutting down production has climbed to $41 a barrel, up from $39 last year.

Producers Shift Focus Away from Growth

After years of chasing rapid expansion, many energy companies are now turning their attention to financial discipline. Investors want stable returns, not aggressive drilling. If oil prices don’t rebound soon, more companies are expected to cut back even further.

Bryan Sheffield, founder of energy investment firm Formentera Partners, said the message is clear: “If prices fall into the upper $50s, producers will have no choice. Budgets will be cut, and rigs will come offline.”

For now, America’s oil sector is caught between falling prices, rising costs, and global competition. The push to “drill, baby, drill” has run headfirst into a much more complicated energy landscape.

Also Read: Oil and Stocks Show Unusual Link in 2025 as Trump Tariffs Shake Global Markets

Despite a 90-day pause on additional tariffs—which briefly lifted markets midweek—countries remain subject to a new 10% baseline import tax. This strategic pullback was enough to spark a 9.5% rally in the S&P 500 on Wednesday, although momentum quickly faded as investors digested the broader implications.

White House Crafts Priority List for Talks

Kevin Hassett, Director of the National Economic Council, stated on Wednesday that top administration officials are currently working on a formal list of trade priorities to present to the president. He noted that over 15 nations have already extended preliminary offers for negotiation.

“We’re meeting with the president to shape the agenda moving forward,” Hassett said, adding that Trump is expected to add his own directives to the trade roadmap.

Markets Show Limits to Trump’s Strategy

Investors sent a strong signal this week as rising interest rates on 10-year U.S. Treasury notes neared 4.5%, suggesting hesitation among foreign buyers of U.S. debt. The bond market’s reaction reflects growing concern that Trump’s aggressive tariff policies could undermine confidence in U.S. financial stability.

Though Trump brushed off early-week market jitters, calling investors “yippy,” he later praised the bond market’s turnaround following his tariff pause announcement, referring to it as “beautiful.”

Tariff Battle Widens Despite Temporary Pause

While some international partners—including the EU, Japan, and South Korea—were temporarily spared from the most aggressive tariffs (ranging from 20% to 25%), they remain under the umbrella of Trump’s new 10% base tariff as negotiations begin. The administration also expanded tariffs on autos, steel, aluminum, pharmaceuticals, lumber, and semiconductors.

Analysts warn that the cost of these duties will ultimately be passed on to consumers and businesses, potentially raising prices and slowing economic growth. According to Yale University’s Budget Lab, the current tariff policy could reduce average household disposable income by $4,364 annually—even with the temporary tariff freeze.

Trump’s Trade Goals Remain Ambitious, Vague

While Trump has outlined key objectives—including eliminating the $1.2 trillion trade deficit, boosting factory jobs, and using tariff revenue to fund income tax cuts—foreign counterparts have criticized the administration for vague demands.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said future trade agreements will be handled on a “bespoke” basis rather than through sweeping multilateral deals. Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick echoed that sentiment, stating the aim is for other countries to “respect” Trump’s economic authority.

US-China Trade War Escalates Further

The 145% total tariff rate on Chinese imports—up from an earlier 125% after factoring in fentanyl-related duties—underscores the deepening trade rift between the world’s two largest economies. The U.S. continues to accuse China of trade manipulation, currency control, intellectual property theft, and unfair labor practices.

Despite the sharp tariff hikes, China is expected to stand firm. Wendong Zhang, economist at Cornell University, noted that while China may take a harder GDP hit than the U.S., its domestic support for resisting American pressure remains high.

“China is likely to stick to its guns,” Zhang explained. “The country has been preparing for this moment and can redirect more of its output to domestic consumption.”

Americans Face Rising Costs on Key Imports

The trade war’s impact is already being felt by consumers, especially in sectors where Chinese imports dominate. According to Zhang, the U.S. imports 73% of smartphones, 78% of laptops, 87% of video game consoles, and 77% of toys from China, along with essential inputs like livestock antibiotics.

“Resourcing these products from other countries will take time and likely increase prices,” he added.

Also Read: Novares, Valeo Force Customers to Pay 25% U.S. Auto Tariff Upfront as Trump Trade Move Hits Hard

The integration is designed to benefit exchanges, neobanks, payment providers, and fintech platforms, giving them access to faster, more affordable Bitcoin payment options. BitGo's robust custody and security systems are expected to accelerate the adoption of Lightning technology among institutional players, offering a secure framework for Bitcoin and stablecoin transactions.

Enabling Scalable, Secure Payments

“This is a game-changer,” said BitGo CEO Mike Belshe. “Integrating Lightning through our partnership with Voltage means our clients can now access Bitcoin and stablecoin payments that are not only secure but significantly faster and more cost-effective.”

Belshe emphasized that the partnership brings together BitGo’s institutional-grade security with the scalability of the Lightning Network, helping to support the global transition to digital payments.

Voltage, known for its enterprise-grade Lightning infrastructure, echoed the sentiment. CEO Graham Krizek said the collaboration would “bring the power of the Lightning Network to BitGo’s best-in-class platform,” enabling organizations worldwide to send Bitcoin at lightning speed and at a fraction of the cost.

Opening the Door to Stablecoin Payments

Beyond Bitcoin, the integration could also pave the way for stablecoin transactions over the Lightning Network — a development that may be critical for broader financial use cases. This next step would make the Lightning Network not just a faster payment channel, but also a bridge between Bitcoin and the fiat-backed digital asset world.

Founded in 2013, BitGo serves over 2,000 institutional clients in more than 90 countries. Its new collaboration with Voltage marks another step toward expanding the utility of Bitcoin beyond investment, making it a viable payment tool for everyday and enterprise transactions.

Also Read: As U.S. Tariffs Rise, Bitcoin Gains Attention as Protection Against Inflation

As of April 3, the U.S. began collecting a 25% tariff on imported autos and parts — a policy Trump says is aimed at supporting domestic manufacturing and job creation. However, industry experts warn that the tariffs could increase car prices by thousands of dollars, potentially reducing sales and putting pressure on employment in the auto sector.

Suppliers Say “No Room to Absorb the Cost”

Pierre Boulet, chairman of Novares, which supplies plastic components to roughly one-third of the world’s vehicles, made the company’s position clear: “For us, it's simple — payment in advance or no customs clearance.” The firm operates five manufacturing plants in Mexico, where many of its parts are now subject to U.S. import duties.

Similarly, Valeo — known for its driver assistance and lighting systems — is pushing the full cost of the tariffs onto customers, which include automakers with U.S. production facilities and American spare parts distributors. CEO Christophe Perillat stated that more than half of their customers have already agreed to cover the added cost. “We are taking the same approach for spare parts,” he confirmed.

Valeo currently operates 13 plants in Mexico, placing a significant portion of its production at risk of tariff impact.

Exemptions Under USMCA Still Apply — For Now

Some components from Mexico and Canada are still exempt from the new duties if they meet the requirements of the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement (USMCA) enacted in 2020. However, industry insiders expect broader enforcement from May 3, when more products could fall under the new tariff regime.

Tire manufacturer Michelin, which ships products from Mexico and Canada to the U.S., told analysts this week that most of its goods remain exempt due to USMCA compliance. The company produces approximately 70% of the tires it sells in the U.S. within American borders, limiting the immediate impact of the tariffs. However, a spokesperson emphasized that the situation remains fluid, describing it as “evolving by the day.”

Industry Faces a Tipping Point

The push for full tariff compensation reflects the limited flexibility of auto suppliers already dealing with the transition to electric vehicles, which require fewer parts. For these companies, absorbing extra costs simply isn't viable.

As the U.S. trade stance continues to shift, carmakers and parts manufacturers alike are bracing for potential production slowdowns and higher vehicle prices — a ripple effect that may stretch across the global automotive sector in the months ahead.

Also Read: Ferrari Says U.S. Tariffs Won’t Affect Its Financial Goals

Usually, oil and stocks don’t follow the same path. One might go up while the other drops, which helps investors spread risk. But this year, they’ve been moving in almost perfect sync. The reason? Worries about the global economy and unpredictable trade policies from the U.S. government.

A Strong Connection That’s Hard to Ignore

Since President Donald Trump returned to office in January, markets have been reacting sharply to his new wave of tariffs. These trade actions have sparked fear about slower global growth, and that fear is pulling oil prices and stock prices into lockstep.

In March, the connection between Brent crude (the global oil benchmark) and the S&P 500 index reached a correlation of 0.9 — almost a perfect match on the chart. That kind of link is rare and signals that both markets are being driven by the same concerns.

“The oil price isn’t being driven by inflation anymore. It’s all about growth,” said Shaniel Ramjee, co-head of multi-asset funds at a European investment firm. “That’s why oil and stocks are moving more closely together.”

Trade Policy Jitters Are Fueling the Pattern

Markets got a short-lived boost when Trump announced he would ease tariffs on several countries, even while increasing pressure on China. Stocks and oil both climbed, but oil prices quickly fell again, reminding investors how fragile the situation remains.

Analysts say this kind of behavior happens when investors are anxious about the future. “Oil and stocks usually track each other more closely when people are worried about an economic slowdown,” said one market strategist. “Right now, that worry is everywhere — and it’s made worse by policy surprises from Washington.”

Investors Are Rethinking Their Strategies

This tight link between oil and stocks is creating headaches for fund managers who rely on diversification to manage risk. Tim Evans, a veteran energy market advisor, pointed out that even if traders notice this trend, it’s still tricky.

“Just because oil and stocks are moving together doesn’t make it easier to predict where either one is headed,” Evans said. “If you’re confident about stocks, you’re probably better off trading the stock market than guessing where oil is going.”

Gold Takes the Spotlight as Oil Loses Its Shine

As oil becomes more volatile, some investors are turning to safer bets like gold. A key gold futures contract recently hit an all-time high as demand for the metal surged.

“We’re not bullish on oil right now,” said Luc Filip, head of investments at a Swiss private bank. “Tariffs are hurting demand, and that makes the oil outlook weaker.”

Other investment leaders agree. “Oil is more vulnerable when the economy starts to slow down,” said Antonio Cavarero, a top asset manager. “At a time like this, we’d rather be in parts of the market that aren’t at the mercy of sudden policy decisions.”

Ramjee added that if the U.S. tones down its aggressive trade stance, oil might start moving on its own again. “If tariffs ease up, the oil-stock connection could fade. But for now, growth worries are keeping them tied together.”

To handle the uncertainty, his team has taken a cautious approach — building up positions in gold and gold mining stocks, trading less often, and scaling back on risk as markets continue to swing.

Oil and stocks acting like twins in 2025 is more than a market quirk — it’s a sign of deeper anxiety about the global economy. And until trade tensions settle, investors may keep playing it safe.

Also Read: Goldman Sachs Predicts Oil Could Crash Below $40

The updated sanctions will go into effect on Thursday, April 10.

12 U.S. Companies Blocked From Importing Sensitive Chinese Goods

A total of 12 American companies were added to China’s export control list, which prohibits them from purchasing “dual-use” items from Chinese firms. Dual-use items refer to goods and technologies that can serve both civilian and military purposes.

The companies affected include:

• American Photonics

• Novotech

• Teledyne Brown Engineering

• Insitu (a Boeing subsidiary)

• TCOM, Limited Partnership

• Stick Rudder Enterprises LLC

• Huntington Ingalls Industries Inc

• S3 AeroDefense

• Cubic Corporation

• TextOre

• ACT1 Federal

• Exovera

These firms will no longer be able to access certain Chinese technologies, components, and systems — which may affect their production timelines and overseas operations.

6 Companies Completely Blacklisted From China

In addition to the export ban, China has taken an even more severe step against six other U.S. companies by placing them on the “unreliable entities” list. Companies on this list are banned from:

• Conducting import or export activities with Chinese businesses

• Making new investments in China

• Participating in joint ventures or partnerships

• Sending or employing staff in China

Executives at these companies may also face visa denials, residency bans, and other administrative penalties.

Blacklisted companies include:

• Shield AI

• Sierra Nevada Corporation

• Planate Management Group

• Inter-Coastal Electronics

• System Studies & Simulation (S3 Inc.)

• IronMountain Solutions

These firms are mostly involved in aerospace, defense, and military technologies — sectors at the core of recent friction between Beijing and Washington.

A Direct Response to U.S. Export Controls

The latest action from China appears to be in direct response to U.S. efforts to curb Chinese access to advanced technologies, particularly in areas like artificial intelligence, defense, and semiconductors.

In recent years, the U.S. has blacklisted multiple Chinese companies such as Huawei and ZTE, citing national security concerns. It has also tightened rules around chip exports to Chinese buyers, especially those with military links.

Beijing’s new sanctions seem designed to mirror those restrictions — targeting American companies in similar sectors.

Experts Say This Could Affect Global Supply Chains

Trade analysts say the move could cause ripple effects throughout global supply chains, especially in industries tied to aerospace and military contracting. Several of the companies on China’s lists supply parts, software, and services to major defense programs and commercial aviation projects.

“Even if the direct impact is limited to a small group, the broader message is that doing business across U.S.-China lines now carries real regulatory risk,” said a Washington-based international trade advisor. “Companies will have to rethink their supply chain resilience and exposure.”

Business Environment Grows More Uncertain

China’s decision adds to the growing sense of uncertainty for American businesses operating abroad. While some companies have already begun diversifying their sourcing and manufacturing operations, others may now need to consider scaling back their exposure to the Chinese market.

At the same time, Chinese firms and government departments may also become more cautious in dealing with U.S. counterparts, fearing retaliation or compliance issues.

This situation puts additional pressure on multinational companies that have to navigate sanctions, regulations, and market access restrictions on both sides.

Will This Escalate Further?

Many observers believe this is part of a longer-term shift rather than a one-time retaliation. With both the U.S. and China increasingly linking national security with trade policy, further sanctions or countermeasures could follow — especially during sensitive political periods like election cycles.

Some U.S. lawmakers have also called for stricter actions against Chinese entities, including bans on investment and access to critical U.S. infrastructure.

If the current trend continues, the global economy may see more fragmentation in trade partnerships, investment flows, and tech collaboration — with companies caught in the middle.

While the full impact of China’s latest sanctions will take time to assess, one thing is clear: the U.S.-China trade relationship is entering a more complex and confrontational era. Companies in sensitive industries, particularly tech and defense, will need to pay closer attention to evolving policies — not just in Washington or Beijing, but globally.

Also Read: US Hits Chinese Imports with 104% Tariff, China Plans Hit Back with Export Limits

This creates a ripple effect across the economy. Whether it’s electronics, cars, or groceries, consumers end up spending more for the same items. But the real issue is that incomes don’t rise at the same pace. With stagnant wages and rising prices, people are effectively losing purchasing power. The end result? A quiet but impactful form of inflation that eats into household budgets and savings.

Inflation Erodes Dollar Strength Over Time

Inflation is already a concern, and tariffs only add more fuel to the fire. When the cost of goods rises and wages lag behind, the real value of money declines. What a dollar could buy last year won’t go as far today—and certainly not tomorrow if current trends continue.

This is where assets like Bitcoin enter the conversation. Bitcoin’s limited supply means it can’t be inflated by printing more of it. Unlike fiat currencies, it’s not subject to central bank policies or political decisions. That makes it a unique tool for those seeking to preserve value over the long term.

Retaliatory Tariffs Raise Global Uncertainty

China’s response to U.S. tariff threats—retaliatory measures announced on April 4—shows how quickly trade tensions can escalate. These policy moves don’t just affect importers and exporters; they create ripple effects in global markets.

If trade flows slow down due to higher tariffs, global growth could take a hit. At the same time, demand for the U.S. dollar might decline if international confidence in U.S. economic policy weakens. A drop in demand for the dollar makes it more vulnerable to devaluation, further weakening purchasing power for U.S. consumers and investors.

Bitcoin Offers a Decentralized Alternative

Bitcoin operates on a decentralized network, independent of central banks, governments, and national currencies. That’s a big part of its appeal in times of financial instability. If confidence in fiat systems drops, Bitcoin’s neutrality becomes a strength.

Unlike the dollar, euro, or yen, Bitcoin isn’t influenced by political decisions or international diplomacy. It can be transferred globally, stored digitally, and held without relying on a central authority. As more people question the long-term strength of fiat currencies, Bitcoin becomes an attractive alternative for wealth storage.

The U.S. Budget Deficit Signals More Money Printing Ahead

With the U.S. budget deficit reaching an estimated $1.8 trillion in fiscal 2024, the government faces a growing gap between revenue and spending. While some policymakers support tariffs as a way to address this, the reality is they won't come close to closing the shortfall.

To cover the deficit, the government will likely continue issuing debt and expanding the money supply. This could lead to more inflation, further weakening the dollar. Bitcoin’s fixed supply—capped at 21 million coins—makes it resistant to such inflationary pressures. That scarcity is why some investors view it as "digital gold."

Bitcoin Is Not Risk-Free, But It's a Useful Hedge

While Bitcoin isn’t immune to volatility, its performance is driven by a different set of forces than traditional assets. Stocks, for example, are tied to earnings, supply chains, and trade policies—all of which are vulnerable in a tariff-driven environment.

Bitcoin, by contrast, tends to be influenced by macroeconomic sentiment, regulatory updates, and adoption trends. That gives it a separate risk profile, making it useful for portfolio diversification. For long-term investors, Bitcoin may act as a hedge—balancing out some of the risks associated with inflation, currency devaluation, and economic instability.

A Long-Term Strategy Over Short-Term Panic

Investing in Bitcoin doesn’t mean abandoning the financial system. But allocating a portion of a portfolio to it—especially in today’s climate—could help offset the risks posed by inflation and unpredictable policy shifts.

The key is to take a long-term view. Bitcoin may fluctuate in the short run, but it has consistently outperformed many traditional assets over longer periods. For those with patience and a high-risk tolerance, current market uncertainties may offer a good entry point.

The return of tariffs and widening budget deficits are creating fresh challenges for investors. With inflation picking up and confidence in the dollar under pressure, Bitcoin is gaining attention as more than just a speculative asset. It’s now being viewed as a financial buffer—one that could help preserve purchasing power in uncertain times.

Stay tuned to ishookfinance.com for more insights on how global policy moves are shaping the future of money, trade, and personal finance.

Also Read: US Hits Chinese Imports with 104% Tariff, China Plans Hit Back with Export Limits

This move marks one of the most forceful trade actions in recent U.S. history and reflects a hardline approach to dealing with economic competition from China.

China Responds with Countermeasures and Focus on Stability

China was quick to respond. Premier Li Qiang spoke with European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen, criticizing the U.S. move. He called for open cooperation and said that China has enough policy tools to deal with economic pressure.

Li added that the country’s current financial strategy already accounts for risks expected in 2025. He also stated that China is committed to protecting its interests and maintaining steady growth.

As part of its response, China has restricted exports of rare-earth materials like terbium, dysprosium, scandium, and yttrium. These minerals are vital for products like electric vehicles, wind turbines, and military equipment. The export limits began on April 4.

Stock Markets React Sharply to Ongoing Trade Tension

Investors reacted to the rising trade fight with heavy selling in global markets. The S&P 500 is down 20% from its February high. The Dow Jones has fallen more than 17%, and the Nasdaq has officially entered bear market territory.

In Asia, the Hang Seng Tech Index dropped by 27% in just one month. The Chinese yuan also weakened to its lowest level since January. On the flip side, Chinese government bonds have become more attractive, with investors looking for safer places to park their money.

White House Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt said there would be no delay in the new tariffs. “President Trump believes these steps are necessary to support American industries,” she told reporters. A U.S. official added that the administration may apply more tariffs under the same strategy.

India Now Part of U.S. Trade Action Plan

India has also been caught in the current trade sweep. A 26% tariff on Indian goods was announced earlier this month, with the U.S. citing the need for fair trade practices. This shows Washington is expanding its strategy beyond China.

Analysts warn that continued trade fights could lead to long-term changes in how companies manage supply chains and where countries focus their economic partnerships.

What began as a policy decision on tariffs is quickly turning into a broader power struggle over global trade rules. The effects could last well into the future and reshape relationships between major economies.

Also Read: China Could Crash U.S. Economy by Selling $1 Trillion in Debt—Will It Happen?

Goldman Sachs Projects Price Drop Based on Supply and Economic Slowdown

Brent crude, currently trading at around $64 per barrel, has already seen a 15% drop this year. According to Goldman Sachs, prices may slip even further depending on how global events unfold. The firm’s base case sees Brent reaching $55 a barrel by the end of 2026, assuming a moderate rise in OPEC supply and no major global recession. However, in a more severe scenario — with a global GDP slowdown and a full reversal of OPEC+ production cuts — Brent could dip just below the $40 mark. That would bring prices to levels last seen in early 2020.

West Texas Intermediate (WTI), the U.S. benchmark, is also under pressure, trading near $60 a barrel. Goldman forecasts WTI to settle at $51 a barrel by December 2026 in their base case.

U.S. Oil Producers at Risk as Prices Near Breakeven Point

The potential price drop could be especially painful for American oil companies. Many U.S. producers have breakeven costs above $62 per barrel, according to data from Rystad Energy. With current prices hovering near that threshold, even modest declines could threaten already thin profit margins. Companies may be forced to scale back production, delay investor payouts, or preserve existing reserves just to stay afloat.

Matthew Bernstein of Rystad Energy noted that public oil firms are now facing tough decisions as their financial reality tightens. The Trump administration’s tariff-driven policies, including tariffs on steel used in oil infrastructure, are adding further strain to U.S. producers trying to stay competitive.

Policy Uncertainty Weighs Heavily on Energy Sector

Goldman’s warning comes amid a broader market reaction to recent geopolitical developments. A sharp 7% drop in oil prices last Thursday followed President Trump's tariff announcements and OPEC+’s unexpected decision to boost output. This downward trend continued into Monday, driving prices to four-year lows.

Experts, like KPMG’s U.S. energy leader Angie Gildea, believe that the market has shifted from fears of scarcity to expectations of surplus. “The recent price movements reflect how deeply connected energy markets are to broader economic trends,” Gildea wrote.

Analysts are watching closely to see how producers and policymakers respond. One thing is clear: oil’s future pricing will depend not just on supply and demand, but on how the global economy weathers the current storm.

Also Read: Oil Prices Crash to 4-Year Low After OPEC Move and New Tariffs

But not all the news was reassuring. China issued a stern warning that it is prepared to "fight to the end" if the U.S. goes through with its planned tariffs. Since the tariff announcements, the S&P 500 has dropped over 10%, marking its worst three-day decline since the onset of the COVID-19 pandemic in March 2020. Market volatility remains high across sectors.

Still, some Wall Street analysts are standing by select stocks, even upgrading a few despite the turbulence. Here's a closer look at three names analysts are still backing strongly.

IBM: Strong Fundamentals and Recurring Revenue

Evercore ISI analyst Amit Daryanani maintained an "Outperform" rating on IBM and set a $275 price target, representing about 22% potential upside. He highlighted IBM's steady software revenue growth, its growing AI and Red Hat businesses, and the company’s durable position within mission-critical tech infrastructure.

He also pointed to improving consulting operations and a resilient mainframe business. With IBM trading at a notable discount compared to peers in terms of enterprise value to free cash flow, analysts see significant upside, particularly if macroeconomic fears begin to ease.

Meta: Advertising Growth Despite Headwinds

Guggenheim analyst Michael Morris gave Meta a "Buy" rating and a $675 price target, signaling an expected upside of 27%. Despite global economic uncertainties and trade risks, Meta's advertising performance continues to stand out. Recent data shows increasing user engagement on Facebook and Instagram, along with growing advertiser interest in ad formats like Reels and Advantage+.

Morris noted that Meta is still seen as a dominant player in digital advertising, and its ongoing AI investments are expected to fuel future growth. The upcoming earnings call is likely to offer more clarity on how the company plans to navigate a complex global environment.

Planet Fitness: Resilient Model in Volatile Times

JPMorgan analyst John Ivankoe reaffirmed a "Buy" rating on Planet Fitness, with a $98 price target and an estimated upside of 5%. He emphasized the gym chain's consistent performance even during uncertain economic periods. As a low-cost fitness provider, Planet Fitness has shown it can maintain and grow its customer base even when household budgets tighten.

Investors are also watching how the company responds to tariff-related pressures on supply chains and whether higher costs could impact new gym development. However, analysts believe the company’s scalable, low-overhead model offers strong protection against those risks.

Why These Stocks Still Stand Out

While overall market sentiment remains shaky due to trade tensions, inflation concerns, and economic uncertainty, companies like IBM, Meta, and Planet Fitness are being backed for their solid fundamentals and strategic positioning. Each brings a unique advantage: IBM's high-margin software and enterprise clients, Meta's strong digital ad engine, and Planet Fitness's recession-resistant growth strategy.

Also Read: Trump Media Partners With Crypto.com for New ETFs, Shares Gain 9%

Retail analyst Greg Melich from Evercore ISI estimates that Walmart’s earnings per share could drop by at least 2% under the new tariff policies. But that drop could grow significantly if the tariffs are expanded further or kept in place long term. The estimate assumes there are no countermeasures like tax relief or regulatory changes to help soften the blow.

Walmart reportedly imports about $105 billion in goods each year, much of it from countries like China and Vietnam. Under the current policy, a 10% base tariff went into effect on April 5. Another round of higher tariffs will kick in on April 9, targeting around 60 countries considered top trade offenders by the Trump administration. In some cases, total tariffs on Chinese imports could rise to 54% when including previous duties and reciprocal taxes. Vietnam faces up to 46% in tariffs.

These added costs will likely be passed on to consumers, meaning price hikes on everyday items could become more common. That’s a big problem for Walmart, which has built its reputation on low prices. Earlier this year, the company had already warned about weakening consumer confidence across all income levels and regions, as people started to feel the pinch of rising prices. Even before these new tariffs, shoppers were spending more cautiously.

While some retailers, including grocery chains, raised prices on products like avocados due to earlier trade tensions, Walmart chose not to. Analysts say that widened the price gap between Walmart and some of its competitors, which may have helped customers in the short term but put pressure on Walmart’s profit margins.

Since the tariff news broke, Walmart’s stock has fallen 8%, and its price-to-earnings ratio has slipped from 36 to 31, signaling investor concerns about the company’s future profitability.

Retail isn’t the only sector keeping a close eye on trade policy. Levi Strauss & Co. (Levi’s), which also relies heavily on international sourcing, said it is working through different scenarios and strategies to deal with what it called an “unprecedented” and fast-changing global situation.

The ripple effects of these tariffs could go beyond retailers. A growing number of economists now believe the U.S. could be heading toward a recession. Peter Berezin, a strategist at BCA Research, said there’s a 75% chance of a recession within the next three months. He believes the economic damage caused by the trade war and reductions in corporate investment may be worse than expected.

If consumer spending continues to slow and companies are forced to raise prices, it could lead to a broader economic downturn—one that might hit lower-income families and price-sensitive shoppers the hardest.

For Walmart, the coming months could be critical. How the company navigates rising import costs, shifts in consumer behavior, and ongoing trade uncertainty will not only impact its bottom line but also offer a glimpse into how other major U.S. retailers might fare in a changing global economy.

Also Read: Amazon Surpasses Walmart in Revenue After Nearly a Decade

This deal is the second billion-dollar acquisition involving a crypto company this year, showing how digital assets like Bitcoin are gaining momentum in the U.S. Ripple CEO Brad Garlinghouse said the regulatory environment in the country has improved, making it easier for crypto firms to grow. He noted that the market is now more mature and ready to meet the demands of traditional finance.

Hidden Road is a prime brokerage firm that offers services such as trade clearing, securities lending, and access to leverage for large clients like hedge funds and institutional investors. The company processes about $3 trillion in transactions each year and has over 300 institutional clients around the world.

With Ripple’s financial backing, Hidden Road is expected to grow rapidly and become the largest non-bank prime broker globally. Once the deal is completed, Ripple will become the only crypto company to own and operate a global multi-asset prime brokerage.

This move also gives Ripple’s stablecoin, RLUSD, a bigger role. Hidden Road already accepts RLUSD as collateral in its services, and Ripple believes this acquisition will increase the coin’s real-world use. RLUSD was launched last year as a stablecoin tied to the U.S. dollar, aiming to compete with other major stablecoins like Tether and USD Coin.

The deal is expected to close in the coming months and reflects Ripple’s ongoing effort to strengthen its position in both the crypto and traditional finance worlds.

Also Read: Bitcoin Drops 25% in 2025 — But Here’s Why Long-Term Investors Aren’t Worried

The Chinese government has described the US-imposed tariffs as “economic bullying,” and analysts are now watching closely for what Beijing might do next. Among the options China holds is one that could have global consequences — selling off its massive holdings of US government debt.

China’s Leverage: Holding Trillions in US Bonds

China is the second-largest foreign holder of US Treasury bonds, with official figures showing $761 billion in holdings as of January. However, some economists estimate the real number is closer to $1 trillion when including bonds held via European accounts.

If China decided to sell a large portion of these bonds, the impact on the US economy could be severe. Bond values would drop, yields would spike, and the US government’s borrowing costs would surge — putting significant pressure on public finances and markets.

Why China Is Unlikely to Pull the Trigger

Despite the dramatic potential of such a move, most experts say it’s highly improbable. Economically, the damage to China could be just as great — if not worse — than the impact on the US.

“Dumping treasuries would be like throwing a grenade at someone sitting across from you,” says Mark Williams, chief Asia economist at Capital Economics. “Sure, they’d get hurt — but so would you.”

China’s central bank and state-owned institutions hold about $3 trillion in dollar-denominated assets. Selling even a portion of those assets would drive down the value of the dollar, slashing the worth of what China still holds. And bringing those funds back into China would likely cause the renminbi to rise in value, hurting the country’s export competitiveness.

US Has Tools to Neutralize the Threat

Even if China did attempt a mass sell-off of US bonds, it’s likely the US Federal Reserve would intervene immediately. Analysts say the Fed would launch a major bond-buying program — similar to the quantitative easing seen during the pandemic — to stabilize the market.

Robin Brooks, senior fellow at the Brookings Institution, explains: “The Fed could step in with massive bond purchases to bring yields back down. That takes away much of China’s leverage.”

A similar scenario played out in March 2020, when emerging markets sold US Treasuries to stabilize their own currencies. Yields briefly jumped from 0.5% to 1.2% before the Fed bought $1.2 trillion in bonds to calm the markets.

A Dangerous Game with Global Consequences

Even if China won’t sell its US debt, the threat of escalating economic warfare still looms. The US could impose financial sanctions on Chinese banks, similar to those it used against Russia, cutting off access to the global dollar system — a move that would shake international markets.

“China would be shooting itself in the foot,” says Marcello Estevão of the Institute for International Finance. “But that doesn’t mean the situation can’t spiral out of control.”

Trade tensions between Washington and Beijing have reached new highs, and while both sides still have room to de-escalate, the risks to global trade, investment, and financial stability are higher than they’ve been in years.

Also Read: Trump Tariffs Trigger Market Chaos — 50+ Nations Rush to White House for Trade Talks

Many people call these clips “AI slop.” They’re usually low-effort, bizarre, and designed to grab attention — not because they’re interesting or helpful, but because they trick social media algorithms into thinking people love them. The problem? Once you watch just one, even for a second, your feed might start showing more and more of this junk content.

Luckily, Instagram and TikTok both offer tools to help you reset your content preferences. That means you can tell the app to stop showing you those kinds of videos and get back to seeing posts you actually care about. Here’s how to do that on each app in clear, easy-to-follow steps.

Instagram: How to Reset Suggested Content and Clean Up Your Explore Page

1. Open the Instagram app.

2. Tap your profile picture at the bottom right.

3. Tap the three lines in the top right corner.

4. Scroll down and tap “Content preferences.”

5. Choose “Reset suggested content.”

Instagram will tell you this action changes the types of content you’ll see — but don’t worry, it won’t unfollow anyone or delete anything.

6. Tap “Next.”

7. You’ll see an option to unfollow any accounts you no longer want to follow or change the kinds of ads you see.

8. Tap “Reset suggested content” again to confirm.

This will clear out the AI junk and help Instagram start showing you better content again.

TikTok: How to Refresh Your ‘For You’ Feed

1. Open the TikTok app.

2. Tap your profile icon in the bottom right.

3. Tap the three lines in the top right.

4. Go to “Settings and privacy.”

5. Tap “Content preferences” under “Content & Display.”

6. Choose “Refresh your For You feed.”

TikTok will explain that this won’t delete your saved videos or change who you follow — it just resets the types of videos the app shows you.

7. Tap “Continue.”

8. Tap “Refresh.”

9. If it asks why you’re resetting, choose an answer or skip it.

Your For You feed will now restart and start learning what kind of content you prefer — ideally with less AI noise.

Why You Should Care About Clearing Out AI Content

These strange AI videos aren’t just weird — they push out the stuff you actually want to see. Whether it’s posts from your friends, real creators you follow, or helpful news and entertainment, AI content can drown it all out.

These videos exist just to make people stop scrolling, even if it’s only for a moment. The more people watch them, the more the algorithm promotes them — turning your feed into a mess of confusing, meaningless content.

By resetting your suggestions, you make space for quality, human-made content again. You get more control over what you see, and less of the stuff that just clutters your screen.

Tips to Keep Your Feed Clean Going Forward

• Avoid clicking on AI-looking videos, even for a second — this tells the app you like them.

• Use the “Not Interested” or “Hide” options when you see videos you don’t want.

• Review your content preferences regularly and update them as needed.

• Support real creators by liking and sharing their posts — this helps the algorithm know what you prefer.

With a few quick steps, you can take back control of your Instagram and TikTok feeds. Instead of weird AI clips, you’ll start seeing more real, useful, and enjoyable content again — and that’s what social media should be about.

Also Read: Meta Launches Llama 4 AI Models, Aims to Challenge Rivals with Advanced Features

Despite the recent pullback, Bitcoin remains a top contender for long-term investment portfolios. Analysts point to its consistent recovery from major downturns, sustained institutional demand, and supportive policy signals as key reasons it continues to attract attention from investors with a long horizon.

Historical Recovery Pattern Reinforces Bitcoin’s Resilience

Bitcoin’s performance across previous market cycles provides a clearer picture of its long-term potential. Since its launch over a decade ago, the asset has experienced multiple corrections, including steep declines in 2014, 2018, and 2022—each time dropping by more than 50%.

In all three cases, Bitcoin eventually bounced back. Following a 64% drop in 2022, the cryptocurrency surged in 2023 and 2024, recording triple-digit percentage gains and reaching a new record high of $109,000 in January 2025.

This track record has strengthened its image as a resilient asset, capable of recovering even after prolonged downturns. While volatility remains a key concern, long-term investors have increasingly relied on past data to guide decisions.

Returns Outpace Traditional Assets Over Extended Periods

A decade-long comparison of asset class performance from 2012 to 2023 shows that Bitcoin ranked as the best-performing asset in nine out of twelve years. It consistently outperformed stocks, bonds, commodities, and precious metals during its strongest years.

In contrast, the years 2014, 2018, and 2022 saw Bitcoin at the bottom of global asset rankings, underlining the risks that come with its price swings. However, long-term data favors patience. Ark Invest’s annual report highlighted that Bitcoin delivered an average annual return of 44% over a seven-year period, far exceeding the 5.7% average across other major asset classes.

Investors who held Bitcoin for longer timeframes—such as four or seven years—achieved substantially higher returns than those who moved in and out during short-term cycles.

ETFs and Institutional Interest Drive Mainstream Integration

January 2024 marked a turning point for Bitcoin adoption with the approval and launch of spot Bitcoin exchange-traded funds in the United States. These financial products made Bitcoin accessible to institutional money managers and everyday investors through familiar platforms, accelerating mainstream participation.

Since launch, more than $100 billion has flowed into these ETFs. Market analysts have noted that Bitcoin’s inclusion in professionally managed portfolios has added a new layer of legitimacy and long-term stability to its market position.

Government Moves Signal Growing Policy Support

The U.S. government has also signaled stronger interest in the digital asset space. The establishment of a Strategic Bitcoin Reserve has positioned the cryptocurrency within broader national economic discussions. While direct government purchases have not been confirmed, the move indicates increased regulatory and policy engagement.

Industry observers suggest that any future state-level involvement in Bitcoin markets would have a significant influence on both price momentum and public perception.

A Volatile Asset With Long-Term Strength

While 2025 may prove to be a challenging year in the short term, Bitcoin’s long-term investment case remains intact. Its consistent rebound from deep losses, historical outperformance, institutional traction, and growing policy visibility make it a standout in a crowded field of digital assets.

For investors willing to weather short-term volatility, Bitcoin continues to offer a track record that few other assets can match.

Also Read: BlackRock Buys $66M in Bitcoin as Market Crashes

The timing of the release — on a Saturday — reflects Meta’s urgency to stay ahead in the AI race, particularly as competitors like China’s DeepSeek have recently unveiled high-performing models that challenge the capabilities of Llama 2.

Scout and Maverick Now Public, Behemoth Still in Training

Llama 4 Scout and Maverick are now publicly available for developers through Meta’s platforms, including Llama.com and partners like Hugging Face. Scout is designed to handle large volumes of information efficiently, with a context window of up to 10 million tokens—making it well-suited for document summarization and complex reasoning tasks over extensive codebases. It can operate on a single Nvidia H100 GPU, offering broader accessibility to developers.

Maverick, which Meta positions as its strongest general-purpose assistant, boasts 400 billion parameters in total, with 17 billion active per query. It is intended for tasks like creative writing and complex problem-solving. Internal benchmarking shows Maverick outperforms GPT-4o and Gemini 2.0 in several coding, reasoning, and multilingual tasks, though it still falls short of newer models like Gemini 2.5 Pro and Claude 3.7 Sonnet.

Behemoth, Meta’s largest model to date, remains under development. With nearly two trillion total parameters and 288 billion active, Meta claims Behemoth already shows signs of outperforming many top-tier models in STEM-related benchmarks.

License Restrictions May Limit EU Adoption

Despite the global excitement, Meta has placed strict licensing restrictions on the use of Llama 4. Companies based in the European Union or with principal operations there are barred from using or distributing the models—likely a response to the EU’s growing data privacy and AI regulatory frameworks. Furthermore, companies with more than 700 million monthly users must apply for special licenses, which Meta can approve or deny at its discretion.

These limitations could affect the adoption of Llama 4 in key markets, especially as AI regulations tighten globally.

Meta AI Assistant Now Powered by Llama 4 in 40 Countries

Meta has already integrated Llama 4 into its virtual assistant, Meta AI, across 40 countries in apps like Instagram, WhatsApp, and Messenger. However, the multimodal features are currently limited to English-speaking users in the United States. The assistant now draws on Llama 4’s improved reasoning and contextual capabilities to deliver more nuanced responses in daily interactions.

New AI Architecture Brings Efficiency, Not Just Power

Llama 4 is Meta’s first model collection built on a mixture-of-experts (MoE) architecture. This design allows only a subset of the model’s "experts" to activate during any given task, significantly reducing the computational load while maintaining strong performance.

For example, Scout has 109 billion total parameters but only 17 billion active per task. This makes it not only cost-effective but easier to scale on lower-end infrastructure—a strategic move to widen Meta's reach among developers and researchers.

Greater Response Range on Political and Social Topics

One of the more controversial changes is that Llama 4 has been fine-tuned to respond to a broader range of politically and socially "debated" topics. Meta says the models have been adjusted to provide fact-based responses without avoiding questions or filtering certain viewpoints—marking a shift from previous versions that were often criticized for over-moderation.

This change comes as public figures, including allies of former President Donald Trump, continue to accuse AI platforms of political bias. Meta’s adjustments appear to be a direct response to this pressure, aiming to create models that are more neutral and inclusive in their responses.

While Llama 4 models are impressive in technical benchmarks, Meta's larger goal is to embed them across its ecosystem—from social platforms to enterprise tools. The phased rollout, combined with tiered access and region-specific features, suggests a carefully calculated strategy to scale AI globally while complying with local laws.

The forthcoming release of Behemoth could mark another major milestone. With Behemoth expected to exceed current industry leaders in STEM capabilities, Meta is not just reacting to competition—it’s preparing to lead the next phase of AI evolution.

Also Read: OpenAI Hits $300B Valuation After $40B Funding Round with SoftBank

“The new draft confirms America’s ongoing interest in creating a joint investment mechanism,” Svyrydenko said during a visit to northern Ukraine. The negotiating team will include officials from Ukraine’s Ministries of Economy, Justice, Foreign Affairs, and Finance.

The deal, which has been in development for months, comes at a critical moment in U.S.-Ukraine relations. A previous version of the agreement was expected to be signed earlier this year, but plans were abruptly delayed following a tense Oval Office meeting between President Donald Trump, Vice President JD Vance, and President Volodymyr Zelenskyy.

According to leaked details, the updated draft agreement from the U.S. includes not only rare-earth minerals but also key energy resources like gas and oil. Ukraine is home to more than 20 strategic minerals valued by the U.S., including titanium, lithium, and uranium. These resources are considered essential for sectors ranging from defense to green energy.

Critics of the deal have raised concerns over sovereignty, with some Ukrainian lawmakers accusing the U.S. of pushing for disproportionate control over strategic assets. The new draft has reportedly been written from the perspective of the U.S. Treasury’s legal team and does not yet reflect Ukraine’s position.

“What we currently have is a proposal that presents the U.S. side’s legal interpretation,” Svyrydenko said. “This is not a final version. It’s a starting point.”

The minister emphasized the need for face-to-face negotiations to finalize key terms and ensure the deal protects Ukraine’s economic interests. She confirmed that legal, financial, and technical advisors are being assembled to assist in the upcoming talks.

“This is a significant phase in our cooperation with the United States. The complexity of this deal demands a multidisciplinary approach,” she added.

A previous, unsigned framework agreement had outlined a jointly operated investment fund intended to support Ukraine’s postwar reconstruction. That version proposed allocating 50% of future revenue from national assets — including minerals and hydrocarbons — to the fund. However, it did not imply any transfer of ownership or control of Ukrainian resources to the U.S.

What remains unclear is how much authority Ukraine would retain under the newly expanded draft. Analysts familiar with the leaked proposal suggest Kyiv’s role in managing the investment fund may be minimal — a key issue Ukraine aims to challenge in the upcoming discussions.

Despite the friction, Ukrainian officials remain open to finalizing a mutually beneficial deal. Svyrydenko stressed that Ukraine is focused on reaching a version of the agreement that supports the nation’s recovery without compromising its sovereignty.

“We’re committed to negotiating terms that align with our national interests,” she said. “The earlier talks demonstrated that both sides can work together to achieve that balance. Now, it's time to build on that foundation.”

Also Read: Why Trump Wants Ukraine's Rare Earth Minerals

Hassett, speaking in an interview on ABC News, said the international response is a clear sign that the administration’s tariff strategy is drawing attention and prompting action. His remarks came amid growing criticism and sharp market losses following the rollout of aggressive import duties last Wednesday.

Since the announcement, U.S. stock markets have fallen by roughly 10% — the sharpest drop since the early months of the COVID-19 crisis — with investors rattled by fears of a prolonged trade war and rising inflation.

Addressing speculation that the tariffs were part of a strategy to destabilize financial markets and force the Federal Reserve to lower interest rates, Hassett strongly denied the claim. The theory gained traction after Trump reposted a video suggesting such a tactic on his Truth Social account.

“There’s no political pressure on the Fed,” Hassett said. “This is about reshaping trade relationships, not targeting financial markets.”

Meanwhile, Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent appeared on NBC’s Meet the Press to downplay the market decline and reassure the public that a recession is not on the horizon.

“We had job growth numbers that exceeded expectations,” Bessent said. “That kind of performance does not point to an economy heading into recession.”

The administration’s decision to impose broader tariffs was met with swift retaliation from China and warnings from other trading partners. But while some governments prepare countermeasures, others are taking a different approach.

Taiwan’s President Lai Ching-te offered to remove all tariffs as a starting point for negotiations with the U.S., pledging to dismantle trade barriers and increase Taiwanese investment in American industries.

Despite concerns from economists that the tariffs could lead to higher consumer prices, Hassett argued that exporters are more likely to adjust their pricing strategies to remain competitive in the U.S. market.

“Foreign suppliers want access to American buyers,” he said. “They’re going to make adjustments to stay in the game.”

Markets remain volatile heading into the new week, with investors closely watching for further policy signals and potential fallout. The sudden move has unsettled what had been a relatively stable trading environment, and analysts warn that prolonged uncertainty could weigh on business investment and consumer confidence.

Still, inside the White House, officials view the flurry of diplomatic contact as a sign that the tariff plan is having its intended effect.

“These countries aren’t ignoring the shift,” Hassett said. “They’re calling the White House and asking for a seat at the table — and that’s exactly the kind of leverage this strategy was designed to create.”

Also Read: S&P Global to Revise World Economic Forecasts After U.S. Tariff Surprise

This double hit sent shockwaves through investor sentiment. Within 48 hours, major U.S. indices tanked:

• The S&P 500 dropped 4.61%

• The Dow Jones fell 3.95%

• The Nasdaq slid 4.79%

While traditional investors scrambled to minimize losses, BlackRock acted against the grain — opting to acquire more Bitcoin. This move indicates a possible shift in hedging strategy away from fiat and traditional safe havens like bonds or gold.

BlackRock’s Bitcoin ETF Strategy: Not Just Hype, It’s $47B Deep

Since launching its spot Bitcoin ETF in January 2024, BlackRock has aggressively positioned itself as a leader in institutional crypto exposure. The ETF — tracking the real-time price of Bitcoin — simplifies access for mainstream investors without the complexities of owning crypto wallets or private keys.

With over $47 billion in net assets held in the ETF as of April 3, BlackRock’s latest $66 million purchase is more than just buying the dip — it reinforces the company’s long-term confidence in the crypto market. The ETF’s sustained inflows show growing acceptance of Bitcoin as a legitimate asset class in portfolios once dominated by equities and bonds.

This steady growth also signals institutional trust in the underlying blockchain infrastructure and regulatory progress.

Private Talks With the SEC Hint at Bigger Crypto Plans

On April 1, BlackRock representatives met privately with members of the SEC’s Crypto Task Force, a team created under Trump’s administration to reassess the agency’s stance on digital assets. While the exact agenda hasn’t been disclosed, multiple sources suggest discussions included frameworks for new tokenized asset products and expanding ETF offerings beyond Bitcoin.

The significance of this meeting lies in timing — occurring just days before the market downturn and BlackRock’s Bitcoin purchase. It’s likely BlackRock is positioning itself to launch or back new products pending regulatory clarity, possibly including Ethereum ETFs or even tokenized real-world assets (RWA) like bonds and real estate.

These meetings may be the early steps toward reshaping the U.S. financial market’s relationship with decentralized assets.

Why Retail Investors Should Pay Attention Now

For everyday investors, this is more than headline news. BlackRock’s continued push into crypto during a volatile market suggests a shift in how financial institutions are managing risk and diversification. Their actions provide a few key insights:

• Volatility = Opportunity: Institutional investors may view market panic as a prime entry point.

• Long-Term Conviction: Repeated large-scale Bitcoin buys during downturns signal confidence in its role as a digital store of value.

• Mainstream Adoption: As ETFs make crypto more accessible, retail participation is likely to grow — even among cautious investors.

Retail investors could use this moment to reevaluate their own exposure to digital assets, especially if institutional players continue to signal long-term faith in crypto's future.

A Quiet Power Move in a Noisy Week

BlackRock’s $66 million Bitcoin investment wasn’t accompanied by press conferences or bold statements — it was a tactical move during peak market uncertainty. In the midst of global trade volatility, soaring tariffs, and tumbling indexes, the world’s largest asset manager made a statement of confidence in digital currency without saying a word.

This move reflects a deeper trend: institutions increasingly treating Bitcoin not as a speculative play, but as a strategic asset that can buffer against macroeconomic instability, inflation, and geopolitical shocks.

With $10 trillion in assets under management, every move BlackRock makes sends ripples across the global financial ecosystem — and right now, those ripples are pointing toward Bitcoin.

Also Read: Bitcoin Falls to $83,175 After Trump’s Tariff Announcement—Is This a Buying Opportunity?

This decision is part of a growing shift in how the SEC views crypto. Under new leadership appointed by President Donald Trump, the SEC created a Crypto Task Force to ease pressure on the digital asset industry. So far, this group has stated that memecoins, crypto mining, and now certain stablecoins don’t need to follow the same rules as stocks or traditional investments.

In its latest statement, the SEC’s Division of Corporation Finance said people involved in creating or redeeming these approved stablecoins don’t need to register with the agency. These coins are mainly used for payments, not profits—so the SEC isn’t treating them like investments.

However, not every stablecoin qualifies. The SEC says approved coins must be backed one-to-one with high-quality, easily accessible assets (like cash or U.S. Treasury bills). Coins backed by gold, crypto, or other riskier assets are excluded. That likely rules out popular coins like Tether’s USDT, which includes gold and cryptocurrencies in its reserves. Also, if a coin isn’t redeemable instantly for dollars, it doesn’t meet the criteria.

Circle, the company behind the USDC stablecoin, was quick to support the move. Its president, Heath Tarbert, said:

“The SEC just made it clear—stablecoins like USDC, backed by solid assets, are not securities. But not all stablecoins get this pass just because they call themselves that.”

Congress is also pushing ahead with new laws to officially regulate stablecoins. A bill just moved forward in the House of Representatives, and the Senate is considering a similar one. Both efforts have support from both political parties.

Despite being known as the most stable type of crypto, stablecoins have recently become part of political debates. Trump-backed World Liberty Financial is promoting its own stablecoin, while some lawmakers worry that tech moguls like Elon Musk may launch their own digital currencies.

SEC Commissioner Hester Peirce, who is leading the agency’s crypto task force, said these early steps are important—even if they’re not official rules yet. She added that NFTs might be next in line for similar treatment.

Also Read: Trump’s Crypto Fortune Under Scrutiny – SEC Faces Pressure to Investigate

Posting on his platform, Truth Social, Trump confirmed the extension, saying, “We’ve made great progress on a deal to save TikTok. While there’s more work to do, this order will ensure TikTok stays live for now.”

This decision follows growing interest from several American companies and investors, including Amazon, Walmart, and Andreessen Horowitz, who are reportedly in talks to acquire TikTok’s U.S. operations.

The extension delays a strict law signed by President Joe Biden in 2024, which ordered TikTok to shut down in the U.S. if it stayed under Chinese control. That law cited national security risks, warning that the Chinese government might misuse user data or influence public opinion through the app.

Originally, TikTok was supposed to go offline by January 20, 2025. It briefly did, during the transition from the Biden administration to Trump’s return to office. But it was quickly restored after Trump signed the executive order.

TikTok challenged the law in the U.S. Supreme Court, arguing it violated free speech and other constitutional rights. Some users also filed their own lawsuits, claiming the app ban hurt their personal and professional expression. However, the court sided with the government, saying that due to national security risks and TikTok’s foreign ownership, the ban was legally justified.

The court also noted that users still had access to other social media platforms, so the law didn’t completely block freedom of speech.

In the meantime, TikTok’s future in the U.S. remains uncertain. Although the app is back on Apple’s and Google’s app stores, and users can still access it, the clock is ticking again.

Trump, who previously called for banning TikTok during his first term, reversed his position during the 2024 election campaign, promising instead to protect the app and help secure a deal.

“We don’t want TikTok to go dark,” Trump said, adding that negotiations with China are ongoing and that he hopes to “close the deal” soon.

Until then, all eyes are on the 75-day countdown. If no deal is made within that window, TikTok could once again face a full ban in the U.S., affecting millions of users and businesses who rely on the platform.

Also Read: OnlyFans Founder and Crypto Group Submit Last-Minute Offer to Buy TikTok

According to the Labor Department, the unemployment rate ticked up slightly to 4.2% from 4.1% in February, while February's job gains were revised downward to 117,000. Despite the revision, March’s numbers reflect solid demand for workers across industries.

But the positive data came during a wave of market turbulence sparked by a new round of tariffs from President Joe Biden’s administration. The White House’s sweeping import duties—intended to protect American industries—have drawn a sharp response from China, which announced a 34% tariff on U.S. goods, starting April 10.

That tit-for-tat trade clash has spooked investors:

• S&P 500 futures dropped by 2.5%

• 10-year U.S. Treasury yields rose to 3.92%

• 2-year yields climbed to 3.54%

• The dollar index gained 0.19%, while the euro slipped 0.26%

While the headline jobs figure is reassuring, certain sectors showed signs of strain. Manufacturing added just 1,000 jobs last month, and economists caution that global supply chain risks could hurt output further.

Brian Jacobsen, Chief Economist at Annex Wealth Management, said the employment report was solid overall. “Wages and total hours worked are up—that’s a good sign,” he noted. “But with tariffs coming into play, the Fed may hold off on any major decisions until it sees how businesses react.”

Lindsay Rosner, Head of Multi-Sector Fixed Income at Goldman Sachs Asset Management, said the market’s attention has shifted. “The jobs number is encouraging, but the bigger concern right now is trade,” she said. “Tariffs are quickly becoming the main driver of market sentiment.”

March’s job growth is encouraging, but rising trade barriers and business uncertainty may slow things down. Economists and markets will be watching closely to see how these competing forces shape the economic outlook over the coming weeks.

Also Read: Jobs Report, Fed Chair Powell’s Speech, and Trade Policy Impact

Brent crude has lost 14% in just two days, falling below $65 a barrel. US oil futures followed the same path, marking the lowest prices since 2021. The decline started on Thursday when US President Joe Biden rolled out a new round of tariffs, raising concerns about slower global growth and weaker demand for energy and raw materials.

Adding to the pressure, OPEC+ announced it would raise oil production far more than originally planned for May. According to sources within the group, the move was aimed at putting pressure on countries that have been exceeding their output limits.

China quickly fired back in the trade dispute, confirming a 34% tariff on all US imports starting April 10. The response intensified worries about demand for oil and other key commodities.

The selloff wasn’t limited to oil. Copper prices dropped by more than 5%, hitting their lowest level since January. European natural gas futures also saw a steep decline, losing nearly 10%. Shares of major mining firms like Glencore, BHP Group, and Rio Tinto all moved sharply lower.

For the past six months, oil prices had been moving within a tight range, held in check by OPEC+ supply cuts and spare capacity. But this week’s production hike has raised doubts about whether the group will continue supporting higher prices going forward.

Traders and analysts are now rethinking their price forecasts. Both Goldman Sachs and ING have revised their outlooks, pointing to rising supply and growing threats to demand.

“The two key risks we flagged are happening: higher OPEC+ supply and more tariffs,” Goldman analysts led by Daan Struyven wrote in a note. They also warned that price swings could continue, especially with growing fears of a global recession.

There are already signs of shifting sentiment in the market. Futures spreads have narrowed, signaling that traders expect more supply than demand in the months to come. At the same time, trading in bearish oil options has surged to record highs.

Still, some believe prices may not stay this low for long. The US has been taking a tough stance on oil producers under sanctions, including Iran and Venezuela. Lower prices could give Washington more room to restrict those nations’ output without triggering a surge in inflation.

“With ongoing threats tied to sanctions and tariffs — both for buyers and sellers — we don’t expect oil to stay under $70 for too long,” said Mukesh Sahdev, head of commodity markets at Rystad Energy.

Also Read: Massive U.S. Tariff Hits India’s Diamond Industry — Thousands of Jobs at Risk!

Surat, the heart of India’s diamond polishing business and home to thousands of artisans and traders, is already feeling the impact. The city processes over 80% of the world's rough diamonds and plays a key role in the global supply chain.

“The new tariffs will reduce demand in the U.S., and job losses in India are very likely, at least in the near future,” said Dinesh Navadiya, Chairman of the Indian Diamond Institute.

The U.S. is India's biggest customer in this sector, accounting for more than 30% of the country’s gem and jewellery exports—worth nearly $10 billion in 2023–24. With demand already declining in other regions like China, Europe, and the Middle East, the U.S. tariffs come at a particularly bad time.

Diamond traders in Surat describe the current situation as even worse than during the 2008 global financial crisis. Business activity has slowed significantly in the city’s massive trading market, which normally hosts over 10,000 traders daily.

“This is the toughest phase I’ve seen in five decades,” said veteran trader Mansukh Mangukiya.

Smaller businesses are especially vulnerable. “Larger companies may survive with reduced margins, but many small manufacturers might be forced to shut down,” said Sevanti Shah, Chairman of Venus Jewels.

The industry is also concerned about the future of the Surat Diamond Bourse, a newly built trade complex meant to generate thousands of jobs. Spread across 6.6 million square feet, the facility was launched in 2023 and is currently the world’s largest office building.

With the U.S. market weakening, exporters are rushing to complete shipments before the tariffs are fully implemented. “We’re trying to deliver as many orders as we can before the new rates apply,” said Shaunak Parikh, Vice Chairman of the Gem and Jewellery Export Promotion Council.

He warned that if U.S. orders continue to slow, India may have to cut back on importing rough diamonds and adjust production levels accordingly.

The industry also expects retail prices in the U.S. to rise, which could further reduce consumer interest. “Higher costs in the U.S. will impact sales, and that means lower exports from India,” said Vipul Shah, Managing Director of Asian Star, a major exporter.

For many workers and small business owners in Surat, the situation is already turning grim. Chetan Navadiya, once a diamond manufacturer, had shifted to contract-based work to make ends meet. Now, even that seems uncertain.

“I lost my business in the slowdown and took up small jobs to survive,” he said. “But with these new tariffs, even those jobs may disappear.”

As the industry looks for new markets, experts agree that no country can match the size or importance of the U.S. market. For now, India’s diamond industry faces a difficult road ahead.

Also Read: S&P Global to Revise World Economic Forecasts After U.S. Tariff Surprise

The agency, responsible for assessing the financial health of more than 130 countries and thousands of companies, stated that the size and scope of the tariffs went beyond initial assumptions. Revised projections are expected next week, with early estimates pointing to a rise in U.S. inflation nearing 4% by year-end—up from the previously forecast 3%.

The actual effect on U.S. economic output will largely depend on how other countries respond and how the U.S. government uses the tariff income. If the funds are directed toward tax cuts, it could slightly cushion the economic slowdown. Still, even with mild retaliation from trading partners, S&P expects U.S. GDP growth to be reduced by 0.3 to 0.4 percentage points from its earlier outlook.

While the agency does not currently predict a formal recession in the next 12 months, it has raised the chances of one occurring to between 30% and 35%, compared to 25% in March.

Outside the U.S., growth forecasts are also likely to be revised. Economies like the eurozone and China may see small changes of around a quarter percentage point annually. In contrast, nations with strong trade ties to the U.S.—including Ireland, Switzerland, and several Asia-Pacific economies—could face steeper reductions in expected growth.

Although S&P has not yet issued any credit rating changes, financial markets are already reacting. Insurance costs on debt have climbed for countries and companies considered more exposed to trade disruptions, and other ratings firms have already made moves.

S&P noted that countries impacted by the tariffs may respond in different ways. Some are expected to apply targeted actions aimed at specific U.S. sectors and politically significant regions, rather than using sweeping tariff policies. Others might adopt restrictions through regulatory or service-based measures.

These actions, the agency warned, could place added pressure on economic performance around the world, especially in regions with strong trade links to the U.S.

Also Read: Trump’s New Tariffs: Which Countries and Industries Will Be Affected Most?

Some investors and analysts see this drop as an opportunity rather than a setback. Market experts believe the tariff announcement has removed a layer of uncertainty, which could encourage institutional investors to re-enter the market. Valentin Fournier, Lead Analyst at BRN, stated that with speculation fading, demand from large investors could increase, potentially pushing Bitcoin’s price higher. David Hernandez, a crypto investment specialist at 21Shares, noted that while the tariffs were slightly higher than expected, the clarity they provided could encourage long-term holders to accumulate more Bitcoin.

Institutional interest remains strong despite recent volatility. BlackRock’s Bitcoin ETF recorded $218 million in inflows on April 2, reversing a $157 million outflow from the previous day. Meanwhile, Ethereum ETFs continued to struggle, with ongoing outflows reflecting weaker investor confidence. Ethereum remains more than 50% below its cycle high, highlighting a divide in sentiment between Bitcoin and other digital assets.

Not all analysts agree that institutional involvement will smooth out Bitcoin’s volatility. Kraken’s Global Economist, Thomas Perfumo, argued that price swings are a natural part of Bitcoin’s growth and adoption cycle. He pointed out that Bitcoin’s fluctuations should not be viewed as a weakness but rather as a characteristic of an asset in high demand with a fixed supply. Investors accustomed to traditional markets may see this as instability, but those familiar with Bitcoin’s history recognize these cycles as part of its long-term value proposition.

Some market observers believe the recent sell-off was an overreaction to uncertainty surrounding U.S. trade policy. Bitcoin, often compared to gold as a store of value, has historically performed well in times of economic uncertainty. With strong ETF inflows and institutional demand holding steady, analysts expect Bitcoin’s price to stabilize and potentially recover in the coming weeks. However, investors remain cautious, watching for further developments in trade policy and macroeconomic conditions that could influence Bitcoin’s trajectory. For those considering entering the market, this dip may present a buying opportunity, but experts advise thorough research before making investment decisions.

Also Read: Trump’s Crypto Fortune Under Scrutiny – SEC Faces Pressure to Investigate

TikTok’s current parent company, ByteDance, has until April 5 to agree to sell its U.S. division or face a nationwide ban. This deadline was set by a new U.S. law that targets national security concerns over the app’s Chinese ownership. If a sale isn’t completed in time, the platform could be blocked for its 170 million American users.

Zoop’s approach is different from other companies expressing interest. While some tech giants may see TikTok as another digital asset to grow their reach, Stokely and Phillips are pushing a model that gives 80% of ad revenue directly back to content creators and platform users. They believe those who bring in audiences should benefit more fairly from the business they help generate.

“We’re not just bidding for ownership,” said Phillips. “We’re offering a new direction for how platforms operate — one that includes the people who actually create the content and keep users coming back.”

Zoop is designed to function like other mainstream platforms but with a greater focus on transparency and profit-sharing. The HBAR Foundation, which oversees the Hedera blockchain’s financial resources, supports the plan and aims to integrate blockchain technology to handle revenue distribution and data management.

The proposal arrives as several other parties are also reportedly interested in acquiring TikTok. Well-known companies and individuals have been exploring bids, but Zoop is positioning itself as a smaller group with a strong message — one that centers creators, not corporations.

“We’re a small team going up against massive companies,” Phillips added. “But we believe the system needs to change. Social platforms work because of creators and users, and it's time they share in the success.”

Whether or not Zoop’s offer is accepted remains to be seen, but their entry into the race signals growing demand for a platform that treats creators not just as contributors, but as stakeholders. With the deadline looming, all eyes are on what happens next — and who will be in charge of TikTok's future in the U.S.

Also Read: TikTok Ownership Deal on Track, VP JD Vance Confirms as Deadline Nears

The decision comes as a relief to U.S. energy companies and consumers, as industry leaders had warned that tariffs on oil and fuel imports could lead to higher costs and supply chain disruptions. The exemption ensures that crude shipments from Canada and Mexico, the two largest suppliers of oil to the United States, will continue without added financial strain. Additionally, refined fuel imports from Europe, which play a crucial role in supplying the East Coast, will remain unaffected.

Concerns had mounted within the oil industry that additional tariffs could push up costs for refiners that depend on imported crude, particularly in the Midwest and Gulf Coast regions. U.S. refineries process a mix of domestic and foreign crude, and any disruption in imports could have caused price volatility, affecting gasoline and diesel prices for consumers. The East Coast, which has fewer refineries, relies heavily on imported fuel to meet demand, making the exemption a critical factor in maintaining supply stability.

Trump’s decision to implement broad import tariffs has already sparked tensions with major trading partners, with potential retaliatory measures expected from affected countries. However, by shielding energy imports, the administration aims to avoid unintended consequences that could disrupt the energy market. The move reflects a recognition of the vital role imported oil and fuel play in the nation’s economy, ensuring that the U.S. energy sector remains stable despite ongoing trade disputes.

Also Read: Can US Sanctions Really Stop China’s Iranian Oil Imports?

The push for new ownership comes amid concerns over TikTok’s ties to its China-based parent company, ByteDance. Lawmakers argue that shifting control to a U.S. company would help protect user data and address national security risks. Several American investors are reportedly in the running to acquire TikTok, though no final agreement has been announced.

If a deal isn’t reached by the deadline, TikTok could face stricter regulations or even a ban in the U.S., affecting millions of users and businesses that rely on the platform. As discussions continue, the next few days will be crucial in determining TikTok’s future in the country.

Also Read: Trump's TikTok Deal Faces Legal Challenges as April 5 Deadline Approaches

Countries Hit Hardest by the New Tariffs

While the 10 percent baseline tariff applies to nearly all imports, several countries will see much steeper duties beginning April 9:

• China – A 54 percent total tariff, adding a new 34 percent charge on top of a 20 percent penalty imposed earlier this year.

• Vietnam – A 46 percent tariff due to labor practice concerns and state subsidies.

• European Union – A 20 percent tariff, primarily targeting steel, aluminum, and automotive goods.

• Japan – A 24 percent tariff focused on the electronics and automotive sectors.

• South Korea – A 25 percent tariff, affecting consumer goods and technology.

• India – A 26 percent tariff, with a focus on pharmaceuticals and IT-related imports.

According to Trump, these tariffs are meant to counteract years of foreign nations imposing high duties and restrictive trade policies on American goods.

Industries Facing Major Disruptions

Automobile Sector

One of the most immediate effects of the new tariffs will be in the auto industry. A 25 percent tariff on imported vehicles and auto parts is expected to disrupt supply chains and drive up prices for U.S. consumers. Car manufacturers that rely on foreign-made components will need to rethink their production strategies, potentially shifting more operations to the U.S.

Steel and Aluminum Expansions

The tariffs on steel and aluminum imports will now extend to include canned goods, aluminum cans, and additional metal-based products. Companies that rely on these materials, from construction firms to beverage manufacturers, are likely to see increased costs that could trickle down to consumers.

Energy and Oil Markets Under Pressure

Nations that purchase Venezuelan oil will now face a 25 percent tariff on all exports to the U.S. This is part of an effort to limit Venezuela’s access to global trade revenue. However, this move could also contribute to rising energy costs and force refiners to seek alternative sources.

E-commerce and Online Retail Shakeup

A significant change is coming for consumers who rely on low-cost imports through online retailers.

• Starting May 2, 2025, duty-free imports from China will end.

• Orders from platforms like Shein and Temu will face a 30 percent tariff or a $25 per item fee, whichever is higher.

• By June 1, 2025, the fee will double to $50 per item.

This shift could impact millions of shoppers who rely on affordable fashion and electronics, making many imported goods far more expensive.

Exemptions and Special Cases

While most U.S. trade partners are affected, Canada and Mexico are exempt from the additional tariffs due to existing agreements under the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement (USMCA). However, they will still be subject to earlier 25 percent tariffs on certain products.

On the other hand, countries like Russia, North Korea, Cuba, and Belarus are also exempt, but not as a sign of goodwill—existing U.S. sanctions have already cut off most trade with these nations.

How Businesses and Consumers Will Feel the Impact

The tariffs will have far-reaching effects, with higher costs expected in key industries. Consumers could see price hikes on everything from vehicles to household goods, while businesses may face disruptions in supply chains. The long-term outcome will depend on how companies and foreign governments respond to these sweeping trade changes.

For more updates on financial policies and trade developments, stay tuned to iShookFinance.com.

Also Read: Foreign Boycotts Could Slash US GDP by $83 Billion in 2025 – Experts Warn

While the White House dismissed the claims as "garbage," the stock market had a different reaction. Tesla shares, which had plummeted 4.6% due to weak delivery numbers, made a stunning comeback, closing 5% higher as investors welcomed the possibility of Musk focusing more on Tesla.

For years, Musk has been accused of being a "distracted CEO," juggling multiple ventures from Tesla and SpaceX to Twitter and his controversial political involvement. His deep dive into politics—especially his close ties with Donald Trump—was seen as both a power move and a risk. While it initially helped Tesla navigate regulations, Musk’s outspoken nature has made him a polarizing figure, drawing criticism from both Republicans and Democrats.

Tesla’s stock has had a rough year, losing about a third of its value, making it one of the worst-performing tech giants. Investors have been urging Musk to shift his focus back to Tesla, and now, it seems that may finally be happening.

The timing of this report is also noteworthy. It comes right after a major political setback for conservatives in Wisconsin, where a judge Musk backed lost by a significant margin. Some see this as a sign that Musk’s influence in politics is waning—making his reported decision to step back all the more significant.

For Tesla investors, this potential shift is a breath of fresh air. A more focused Musk could mean a stronger, more stable Tesla, and that’s exactly what they’ve been hoping for.

Also Read: Musk Faces Pressure to Prove He Can Lead Tesla While Managing DOGE Role

Senator Elizabeth Warren and Representative Maxine Waters, both senior members of financial committees, sent a letter to acting SEC Chairman Mark Uyeda. Their request seeks to determine whether Trump’s personal financial stake in the company is influencing regulatory decisions. With Republicans controlling both chambers of Congress, Democrats have limited power to launch official inquiries, but they are bringing the issue into the public spotlight.

Trump’s Crypto Windfall Raises Alarm

World Liberty Financial has raised over $550 million from investors, but its financial structure is causing concern. Reports indicate that the Trump family now controls 75% of token sales revenue and will receive 60% of operational profits once the platform is fully launched. This setup could generate around $400 million in direct financial gains for the Trump family.

What makes this deal controversial is that much of the investment comes from large, private buyers purchasing $WLFI tokens in million-dollar increments. These tokens are currently non-tradable, meaning they can’t be sold on open markets. Some experts believe this raises red flags about the fairness and transparency of the investment process.

Democrats Question SEC’s Oversight

Democrats are pressing the SEC to disclose any records of White House communication regarding World Liberty Financial and to clarify how it is handling potential conflicts of interest. The lawmakers are particularly concerned about whether SEC actions have been influenced by Trump’s financial ties.

“When the President and his immediate family stand to gain hundreds of millions from an industry under SEC regulation, the public deserves full transparency on how the agency is maintaining its integrity,” the letter states.

The Trump Organization claims that the president’s business assets are held in a trust managed by his children and that an ethics adviser is in place to prevent conflicts. However, critics argue that this arrangement does little to ensure impartiality, particularly in the largely unregulated cryptocurrency space.

The Mystery Investors Behind World Liberty Financial

Among the key figures backing World Liberty Financial is crypto entrepreneur Justin Sun, who invested $30 million in $WLFI tokens shortly after Trump’s election win. His stake has reportedly grown to $75 million, and he now serves as an advisor to the company. Sun has been the subject of multiple legal disputes, including a U.S. securities fraud lawsuit, which raises further questions about the individuals involved in Trump’s crypto venture.

Meanwhile, the SEC’s stance on cryptocurrency has noticeably shifted. Under the Biden administration, former SEC Chair Gary Gensler took a tough approach to crypto enforcement. But since Trump took office, the agency—now led by acting Chairman Uyeda—has taken a friendlier stance toward the industry. The SEC has even downsized its crypto enforcement team, a move that some critics see as a sign of regulatory leniency.

Trump’s Crypto Ties and the Stablecoin Debate

On March 25, World Liberty Financial announced plans to launch a stablecoin called USD1, pegged to the U.S. dollar. The timing of this announcement has raised concerns, as Congress is currently debating new regulations for stablecoins. Lawmakers worry that Trump’s involvement in the sector could allow him to influence policy for personal financial gain.

During a House Financial Services Committee hearing, Representative Waters made it clear that she opposes any stablecoin legislation that would allow Trump to profit from the industry. “We cannot allow financial regulations to be written by those who stand to gain the most from them,” she said.

SEC Under Pressure to Act

As Trump expands his presence in the crypto industry, lawmakers are intensifying calls for oversight. The SEC now faces mounting pressure to clarify its regulatory approach and address concerns about potential favoritism.

The key question remains: Will the SEC take a firm stance to ensure fair oversight of Trump’s crypto empire, or will his financial ties shape the future of crypto regulation in the U.S.? As the debate continues, industry experts, lawmakers, and investors alike are watching closely.

Also Read: Trump Family Takes Over Crypto Firm: $550M Raised Under Scrutiny

Right now, India imposes import duties of up to 100% on EVs. Local manufacturers want these duties to be gradually reduced to 30% over several years, but officials seem determined to cut them more quickly as part of trade discussions with Washington. The move marks a major shift in India’s approach to foreign competition in the auto sector.

Balancing Trade and Local Industry

A government official pointed out that India’s auto industry has been protected for a long time, and opening up the market could boost economic growth. While exact numbers for the tariff cuts haven’t been revealed, the decision is expected to make it easier for foreign car brands to compete in India.

The plan also aims to improve relations with the US, especially since American leaders have criticized India’s high trade barriers. One of the biggest beneficiaries of this move would be Tesla, which has been preparing to enter the Indian market with showrooms in Mumbai and New Delhi. Tesla has long argued that high import duties make it impossible to sell its cars in India without setting up a factory there.

Indian Carmakers Fear More Competition

While lower tariffs may bring more investment and a wider range of EVs to India, they pose a challenge for homegrown manufacturers like Tata Motors and Mahindra & Mahindra. These companies have invested heavily in developing EVs locally and argue that cheaper imports will make it harder for them to compete.

Industry experts also worry that if India agrees to reduce tariffs for the US, it could set a precedent for trade talks with the European Union and the UK, allowing even more foreign automakers to enter the market. India’s EV industry is still small but growing fast—electric cars made up just 2.5% of total sales last year, but the government wants this number to reach 30% by 2030.

Impact on Local Manufacturing

India has been supporting domestic EV production with subsidies and tax breaks to encourage local manufacturing. Many automakers argue that if tariffs are cut too soon, it could hurt these efforts by making imported EVs much cheaper than locally produced ones, discouraging investment in Indian factories.

Some carmakers are open to reducing import duties on gasoline-powered vehicles in phases. However, they insist that EV tariff cuts should be handled carefully, as they are closely linked to the government’s incentives for local production, which are in place until 2029.

The government now faces a tough choice—attracting foreign investment and securing global trade deals while protecting local manufacturers. How it handles this decision will shape the future of India’s EV industry and its position in the global market.

Also Read: U.S. Pressures India to Cut Car Tariffs as Tesla Eyes Market Entry

This marks a major shift for Domino’s, which for years resisted third-party delivery services, preferring to keep orders within its own system. However, in 2023, the company made its first move in this direction by partnering with Uber Eats. That decision has already led to a notable increase in orders, with 2.7% of all Domino’s purchases now coming from Uber Eats, according to the company’s recent earnings report.

Domino’s CEO Joe Jordan believes this new partnership with DoorDash will help the company reach more customers, particularly in suburban and rural areas where food delivery options are limited. “We see a $1 billion opportunity in third-party delivery platforms,” Jordan stated.

The move comes at a time when Domino’s is working to strengthen its sales. The company recently reported weaker-than-expected same-store sales for the first quarter, reflecting challenges in the fast-food industry as customers become more mindful of spending. Analysts, including RBC’s Reich Logan, have suggested that a DoorDash partnership could significantly grow Domino’s customer base.

Previously, Domino’s delivery was only available through its website, app, or Uber Eats. With the addition of DoorDash, the company is making it easier for more customers to order their favorite pizzas using the platforms they already rely on.

The program has already launched in select locations and is set to roll out nationwide across the U.S. in May. Later this year, Domino’s also plans to introduce the service in Canada.

With more than 7,000 stores in the U.S. and over 21,300 worldwide, Domino’s is positioning itself to remain competitive in an increasingly digital and convenience-driven food market. The partnership with DoorDash could be a crucial move in maintaining its dominance while reaching new customers who prefer third-party ordering platforms.

Also Read: Hooters Files for Bankruptcy: Is This the End of Bikini Nights Forever?

US Brands Face Expanding Global Consumer Boycotts

Growing resentment toward US trade policies is fueling consumer-driven boycotts across multiple nations. Canada, one of America’s largest trading partners, has seen a surge in anti-US sentiment, with more than 50% of consumers actively avoiding American-made products, according to surveys. This shift is already affecting major industries, particularly alcohol, as Canadian liquor stores have removed American-made spirits from their shelves. For US distilleries, this loss of a key export market means shrinking revenue streams and a struggle to maintain global competitiveness.

Meanwhile, in Europe and Asia, similar boycotts are emerging. US-based brands linked to the country’s recent tariff policies are seeing declining sales and reputational damage. In China, where tensions over tariffs and technology restrictions have escalated, major American companies face dwindling consumer demand, forcing some firms to reconsider their presence in the region.

According to the US Census Bureau, exports to China dropped by 14% in 2024, highlighting the strain on trade relations. Similarly, European Union imports of American-made goods fell by 8% in the same period as consumers increasingly turn to alternative suppliers.

Trade War Escalation Creates Challenges for Businesses

The Biden administration’s latest trade moves, including a 25% tariff on all foreign-made vehicles, have sent shockwaves through global markets. Countries affected by the tariffs, including Germany, Japan, and South Korea, are considering countermeasures that could severely impact American exports.

Automakers in the US warn that these tariffs will not only increase vehicle prices for consumers but also disrupt supply chains and put factory jobs at risk. If foreign governments impose similar levies on US-made cars and auto parts, the industry could face billions in lost revenue. Industry leaders have already expressed concerns that production cuts and layoffs may be unavoidable if tensions continue to rise.

Beyond automobiles, American manufacturers in the agricultural and technology sectors are also bracing for impact. Farmers, already reeling from previous trade disputes, could see further restrictions on their exports of soybeans, beef, and dairy products. In 2024, agricultural exports to the European Union declined by 10%, with American soybean shipments facing stiff competition from South American suppliers. The National Farmers Union warns that continued trade barriers could cost US farmers an additional $5 billion in lost exports next year.

In the tech sector, companies dependent on global supply chains may struggle to maintain production levels due to retaliatory restrictions from foreign suppliers. The Semiconductor Industry Association reports that Chinese restrictions on US chip imports have led to a 12% drop in semiconductor exports, affecting major companies like Intel and Qualcomm.

Tourism Decline Weakens Revenue

The US tourism industry, which contributes nearly $50 billion annually to the economy, is also showing signs of distress. Recent data from US Customs and Border Protection indicates an 11% drop in international arrivals at the nation’s 12 largest airports compared to last year. Meanwhile, the number of Americans traveling abroad has risen by 5%, suggesting that more tourists are choosing alternative destinations over the United States.

Airline executives are already sounding alarms. Air Canada, which operates the most flights between Canada and the US, reported a 10% decline in bookings for upcoming travel months. Other airlines have noted a similar downturn in demand for flights to US destinations, particularly from European and Asian markets.

Hotel chains and travel agencies are also witnessing a significant slowdown. A major European hospitality group, which owns several luxury properties in the US, revealed that summer bookings from European travelers have plunged by 25%. Analysts attribute this decline to geopolitical tensions, currency fluctuations, and a growing preference for destinations such as Canada, South America, and parts of the Middle East.

A report by the US Travel Association shows that total foreign visitor spending in the US declined by 7% in 2024, translating to an estimated $10 billion in lost revenue. This downturn is expected to continue unless measures are taken to improve the country’s appeal to international travelers.

US Economic Growth Projections Lowered Due to Trade Conflicts

Economic experts are adjusting their US growth forecasts based on the effects of foreign boycotts, trade restrictions, and shifting global perceptions. Goldman Sachs now projects a GDP growth rate of 1.7% for 2025, down from its earlier estimate of 2.4%. Other Wall Street firms, including JPMorgan and Morgan Stanley, have also revised their expectations downward, citing similar concerns.

The Federal Reserve's latest economic report also highlights increasing concerns among businesses, with manufacturing output declining by 3% in early 2024 and consumer confidence dropping to its lowest level since 2020.

With economic uncertainty increasing, business leaders and policymakers face pressure to stabilize market conditions and restore international trust. Addressing the fallout from trade disputes, improving diplomatic relations, and fostering more favorable economic policies will be crucial in mitigating further financial setbacks.

The consequences of these economic disruptions are already being felt across industries, from manufacturing to tourism. If tensions continue to escalate without meaningful intervention, the US may struggle to maintain its competitive edge in the global market. Businesses, policymakers, and trade experts will need to navigate these challenges carefully to prevent long-term damage to economic growth and international relations.

Also Read: Trump's 2nd-Term Tariffs Hit U.S. Economy at a Fragile Moment

Buffett’s Secret Fascination with Tesla

For decades, Buffett has steered clear of tech investments, often stating that he prefers companies with predictable earnings and long-standing market dominance. However, in a surprising revelation, the 94-year-old investor admitted to being a long-time Tesla admirer. “I kept saying I didn’t get tech, but I’ve been taking my Cybertruck out for late-night drives,” he confessed during an early morning investor call.

The magnitude of this acquisition eclipses all past corporate deals, including Vodafone’s $203 billion purchase of Mannesmann in 2000.

Warren Buffett Acquires Elon Musk's Tesla for $1 Trillion in Cash | GOBankingRates https://t.co/IGa3joOYPS

— Dennis (@denkat55) April 1, 2025

Where Did Buffett Get the Cash?

The financial world is scrambling to understand how Buffett pulled off a $1 trillion cash transaction. When asked about his funding strategy, he offered his signature dry humor: “I’ve been tucking away spare change for a while now.”

Buffett, famous for investing in legacy companies with stable cash flows, has never shown serious interest in the high-volatility tech space. But his latest move suggests a major shift in perspective.

Buffett’s Hidden EV Obsession Comes to Light

Though he has long been associated with his vintage Cadillac, Buffett revealed he’s been quietly driving a Tesla for years. “People thought I was old-fashioned, but I’ve logged over 100,000 miles on my Model S,” he said. “And, yeah, I’ve had some fun with it—donuts in the Costco parking lot included.”

The timing of the deal is also intriguing. Just days ago, Buffett mentioned in his annual shareholder letter that Berkshire Hathaway was struggling to find worthwhile large-scale investments. Now, it’s clear he found what he was looking for.

Elon Musk Takes on an Unexpected Role

While Buffett will assume control of Tesla, Elon Musk isn’t bowing out entirely. Instead, he’s transitioning into a newly created position: Chief Meme Officer.

“Warren said I could still tweet whatever I want, so I figured, why not?” Musk told reporters. “Plus, he’s giving me unlimited Cherry Coke and See’s Candies. Those peanut brittle things? Life-changing.”

With Buffett steering the company and Musk embracing a more playful role, Tesla’s next chapter is set to be one for the history books.

Also Read: Warren Buffett's Simple Investment Tip: How $350 a Month Could Grow to $903,800

Disclaimer: This news has not been confirmed by Tesla or Berkshire Hathaway. The information has been widely circulated on social media platforms like X.com and has been reported by some news sources, including GOBankingRates.

Founded in 1983 in Clearwater, Florida, and headquartered in Atlanta, Georgia, Hooters has faced increasing financial difficulties, primarily due to mounting debt. The company's move to file for bankruptcy comes as a group of its original founders, who own nearly one-third of the US locations, plan to buy and operate more of the outlets in a bid to turn things around. Hooters issued a statement assuring its patrons that it will take necessary actions to strengthen its business and continue serving its customers long-term.

Hooters has filed for bankruptcy

A mix of private equity, changing demographics, and fewer people romanticizing 1980s frat culture?

pic.twitter.com/PhtXPz0CZw

— H. Gökhan Güleç (@gokhangulec) April 1, 2025

Over the years, Hooters has dealt with several business challenges. One of the most notable setbacks occurred last year when Hendrick Motorsports ended its sponsorship of the No. 9 NASCAR car driven by Chase Elliott. The partnership had lasted since 2017, but Hooters' failure to meet its financial commitments led to the split. The company has also faced legal issues, including a lawsuit over its practice of hiring only women to serve at its restaurants. Hooters settled a racial and color discrimination case in 2023, agreeing to pay $250,000 and offer other relief.

Hooters had previously attempted to adapt to changing tastes, with mixed results. In 2019, the Las Vegas hotel-casino was sold and rebranded. In 2017, the company experimented with a restaurant concept that didn’t feature wait staff in the traditional tight attire, but this effort was short-lived.

While the restaurant chain has seen tough times, its recent bankruptcy filing marks a new chapter as it strives to address its financial challenges and remain a staple in the US restaurant industry.

Also Read: Cineworld's Debt Restructuring Plan Gets Approval from U.S. Court

The March rise in sales helped to somewhat offset the declines seen in January and February, but the overall picture for Tesla's first quarter remains concerning. The larger trend shows that while electric vehicles (EVs) continue to see rising popularity, competition in the market is becoming fiercer than ever. The global market for electrified vehicles, which includes both EVs and hybrids, saw a significant 47% growth over the first quarter compared to last year. This growth is not just driven by established brands but also by new players, including Chinese manufacturers offering cheaper alternatives.

Tesla is finding itself under increasing pressure, particularly in the European market, where it faces multiple hurdles. The company’s relatively small and aging vehicle lineup, especially when compared to the rapidly expanding offerings from competitors, is a major challenge. Many traditional automakers, like Volkswagen, BMW, and Mercedes-Benz, are now rolling out their own electric models, which offer more features and in some cases lower prices than Tesla’s current models. Additionally, Chinese automakers, such as BYD and NIO, are making aggressive moves into Europe, offering cost-effective electric vehicles with advanced technology and longer ranges. These developments are putting Tesla in a tough spot, as the company struggles to keep up with the growing variety and affordability of electric options.

Elon Musk's recent political affiliations have also stirred controversy in Europe. His support for far-right political groups has caused some backlash, affecting Tesla’s reputation in a region that is sensitive to political views. This added controversy has created a complex situation for Tesla, making it harder for the company to maintain its strong sales in Europe. While Musk’s leadership has been a key factor in Tesla’s success, his polarizing actions could have unintended consequences, further complicating the company’s ability to maintain its market share.

Despite these obstacles, Tesla is still in a dominant position in the global electric vehicle market. The company continues to lead in EV technology and innovation, with its autopilot features, battery technology, and supercharger network remaining industry standards. Tesla’s plans to scale up production with new models, including more affordable versions of its vehicles, are seen as essential to remaining competitive in the coming years. However, the next few months will be critical as the competition heats up, particularly in Europe and Asia.

The electric vehicle market is changing quickly, and Tesla faces a tough challenge in staying on top. The competition is growing stronger, with both established carmakers and new players offering more affordable and innovative options. Tesla's future success will depend on how well it adapts to this shift—whether it’s by improving its vehicles, offering better prices, or addressing consumer needs in new ways. With its price cuts and plans to roll out new models, Tesla has the tools to remain a major player, but it will need to act quickly and decisively to fend off competitors who are coming on strong. The company’s next moves will be crucial in deciding if it can continue to lead or if it will start to fall behind in an increasingly crowded market.

Also Read: Musk Faces Pressure to Prove He Can Lead Tesla While Managing DOGE Role

The funding pushes OpenAI’s valuation to $300 billion, nearly doubling its worth from the previous $157 billion valuation in October. This puts the company in the ranks of some of the most valuable private firms globally, competing with giants like SpaceX and ByteDance (the parent company of TikTok).

Of the $40 billion raised, SoftBank plans to invest $30 billion, while other investors including Microsoft, Coatue, Altimeter, and Thrive will contribute the remaining amount. However, SoftBank’s investment could drop to $20 billion if OpenAI doesn’t restructure its operations as planned by the end of this year.

Money to Fuel AI Research and Push for AGI

OpenAI has stated that the funds will be used to continue pushing the boundaries of AI research, with a focus on advancing toward Artificial General Intelligence (AGI) that can benefit humanity. The goal is to make significant strides in AI development, ensuring it’s used for good.

New Cheaper AI Model to Compete with Rivals

In another announcement, OpenAI revealed plans to release a more affordable and accessible AI model in the near future. CEO Sam Altman explained that although this idea had been in the works for some time, other priorities had delayed its launch. However, with rising competition from China’s DeepSeek and Meta’s Llama, OpenAI feels now is the right time.

This new model will be open-weight, allowing developers to customize it for their own use. It will differ from the current subscription-based model of ChatGPT, making it easier for developers to use and build on.

A Step Toward Open-Source AI

Although the new model won’t be fully open-source, it is a step closer to making AI more open and accessible. Some critics, however, are concerned that such open-weight models could be misused. Elon Musk, who was once an investor in OpenAI, has repeatedly urged the company to return to its open-source roots. Musk believes OpenAI should focus on safety and transparency in its approach to AI development.

Even with these concerns, OpenAI’s decision to release a more flexible AI model is seen as an effort to stay ahead of the competition. As AI technology continues to evolve, OpenAI remains at the forefront, using its new funding to pave the way for future innovations in the field.

Also Read: OpenAI Surpasses 400 Million Weekly Users in February 2025

Scammers employed sophisticated tactics such as wallet spoofing and address poisoning. These techniques trick victims into transferring funds to fraudulent addresses that closely resemble legitimate ones. According to ZachXBT, this method has contributed to a sharp increase in Coinbase-related thefts.

This surge follows a similar trend from late 2024 to early 2025, when over $65 million in crypto assets were stolen through phishing schemes. However, experts believe the actual figures could be much higher, potentially exceeding $300 million annually if these scams persist. Since the reported numbers only account for on-chain thefts and direct reports, many unreported cases likely remain undiscovered.

Coinbase has acknowledged the issue and is actively investigating the matter. Spokesperson Jaclyn Sales reminded users that Coinbase employees will never ask for login credentials, API keys, or two-factor authentication codes. She urged users to be wary of impersonators requesting sensitive information or fund transfers. Despite these warnings, some question Coinbase’s ability to prevent such scams, as affected wallet addresses have not been flagged in compliance systems.

To enhance security, Coinbase recommends enabling two-factor authentication, using a dedicated email for account activities, setting up an address allowlist, and storing assets in the Coinbase Vault. However, skepticism remains among users about whether these measures are enough to curb the growing threat.

The Growing Threat of Crypto Scams

Phishing scams extend beyond Coinbase, with fraudsters frequently impersonating well-known brands to gain victims’ trust. In 2024, Meta experienced a significantly higher volume of scam attempts compared to Coinbase. Attackers use various methods, including phone number spoofing and fake customer support calls, to deceive users. One particularly devastating case saw a victim lose $850,000 after falling for a fake Coinbase support call.

Another growing concern is pig butchering scams, where fraudsters build long-term relationships with victims before coercing them into transferring funds. Reports indicate that these schemes led to over $5.5 billion in losses on the Ethereum network in 2024 alone. As scam tactics continue to evolve, strengthening security measures and raising awareness remain critical in the cryptocurrency industry.

Authorities and Industry Experts Weigh In

Cybersecurity experts and law enforcement agencies are now working to combat the rise in crypto-related fraud. Some authorities have called for stricter regulations on exchanges and wallet providers to implement more advanced fraud detection systems. Others suggest blockchain analytics firms play a bigger role in tracking stolen assets and preventing scammers from laundering funds.

Industry leaders stress the importance of investor education, urging crypto users to double-check transaction details, verify communication sources, and use hardware wallets for added security. Security professionals recommend setting up transaction alerts, conducting regular security audits, and avoiding clicking on unknown links related to crypto investments.

Securing Crypto from Scams

As more people turn to cryptocurrency, the risks of online scams continue to rise. Platforms like Coinbase need to improve their security to keep up with smarter phishing attacks. But it's not just up to the exchanges—users also have to be proactive in protecting their funds.

While long-term solutions are in the works, the best defense against phishing scams for now is staying aware and cautious. With so much money at stake, both users and the entire crypto industry must stay one step ahead of fraudsters to make the digital asset world safer.

Also Read: Hackers Are Stealing Billions in Crypto—How to Protect Your Money

Why SpaceX Wants a Tariff Exemption

SpaceX argued that no suitable alternatives are available in the US for the specialized equipment, which includes a circuit board printer from Japanese company Fuji and an industrial soldering system made by Illinois Tool Works (ITW) in China. The company said the machines are crucial for maintaining its weekly production of over 90,000 Starlink units.

While ITW plans to move its manufacturing to the US by 2026, SpaceX noted that no validated domestic options are currently available. Meanwhile, purchasing from non-Chinese suppliers for Fuji’s equipment would result in significantly higher costs.

Trump-Musk Tensions

Although Musk and Trump have maintained a complicated relationship, the tariffs present a major challenge for SpaceX. Musk has expressed concern that Trump’s trade policies could harm his businesses, but he has largely avoided direct criticism. Tesla, Musk’s electric vehicle company, has also warned that the tariffs could increase production costs and lead to retaliatory measures from other countries.

The tariff exemptions, if approved, would reduce SpaceX’s import duties from 25% to 0%. However, the company would still face an additional 20% tariff recently imposed by Trump during his second term. The exemption application process typically takes about 30 days, with approved exemptions lasting only until the end of May — a narrow window for SpaceX to import the necessary equipment.

Broader Trade War Impact

The tariffs in question stem from Trump’s initial trade war with China, targeting billions of dollars' worth of imports. While President Joe Biden maintained many of these duties, US companies now have the option to apply for exemptions on a case-by-case basis. SpaceX’s case highlights the ongoing impact of these tariffs on American businesses.

Starlink's Growing Role and Political Scrutiny

SpaceX’s Starlink service, which provides satellite internet access worldwide, has faced political scrutiny in recent months. The system has played a critical role in Ukraine’s defense efforts against Russia, drawing both praise and controversy. Additionally, concerns over US foreign policy have caused disruptions for the company, with Italy halting Starlink negotiations and the Canadian province of Ontario recently canceling a contract with the service.

Despite these challenges, SpaceX continues to focus on growing its Starlink service. The decision on its tariff exemption requests could impact its ability to meet production targets, especially as it works to scale up its broadband terminal manufacturing. With the trade war ongoing, SpaceX is closely monitoring how the Trump administration will handle its requests and what that could mean for the company moving forward.

Also Read: Gary Cohn Suggests Next Targets for Elon Musk's Government Efficiency Plan

Why Gold is Surging

Spot gold also climbed above $3,127 per ounce, driven by expectations of new US tariffs set to be announced later this week. Fears of trade retaliation have increased gold's appeal, with institutional investors rushing to store more gold in the US.

In addition to trade tensions, stubborn inflation and poor consumer confidence have supported gold prices. A weakening US dollar has further fueled the metal’s rise, while stock markets have faced sharp declines. With uncertainty looming, investors often view gold as a reliable store of value, leading to its current rally.

Central Bank and Institutional Demand

Central banks continue to be significant buyers of gold, increasing their reserves as a hedge against economic instability. Countries like China and India have been particularly active in boosting their gold reserves. Additionally, gold-backed ETFs (Exchange Traded Funds) have witnessed a surge in demand as investors seek exposure to the commodity without physically holding it.

Price Forecast and Market Speculation

Market analysts predict further gains, expecting gold to reach $3,500 per ounce in the next 18 months. They cite strong demand from central banks, growing interest in gold-backed investment funds, and ongoing global uncertainty.

Recent price movements have also sparked speculation about gold reaching $4,000 per ounce. With gold's rapid jump from $2,500 to $3,000 in just 210 days, compared to the previous average of 1,700 days for similar increases, the possibility of crossing the $4,000 mark is being discussed.

Risks and Market Volatility

However, experts warn of possible short-term pullbacks. A peace deal in the Russia-Ukraine conflict could lead to a temporary dip in gold prices as investors reduce their holdings. Additionally, a major stock market sell-off could trigger forced sales of gold to cover losses elsewhere. Despite these risks, analysts believe any declines would likely be brief, with gold remaining a preferred safe-haven asset.

Investment Considerations

While gold’s surge has been impressive, it’s essential for investors to weigh the risks before making decisions. Gold can offer stability during market turmoil, but its price can be volatile. Analysts recommend maintaining a diversified portfolio to balance exposure.

Investors looking to capitalize on the current gold rally can explore various options, including physical gold, ETFs, gold futures, or shares in gold mining companies. Monitoring economic indicators, geopolitical developments, and market sentiment will be crucial in making informed investment choices.

For now, all eyes remain on the trade war developments and their impact on gold's trajectory, with investors prepared for further market shifts in the coming weeks.

Also Read: Gold Prices Climb for Third Week as Trade War Tensions Shake Markets

1. Stock Futures Decline on Tariff Fears

U.S. stock futures are tumbling as investors grow uneasy about the upcoming tariff announcements. Nasdaq futures have fallen by 1.6%, S&P 500 futures are down 1.1%, and Dow Jones futures are trailing 0.7%. Gold has surged to $3,150 an ounce, driven by risk-off sentiment. Meanwhile, oil prices are rising, and the 10-year Treasury yield has dipped below 4.2% as investors seek safety.

2. Tariff Speculation Shakes Confidence

Reports suggest the Trump administration could impose a broad 20% tariff on imports from U.S. trading partners. The uncertainty around these tariffs is weighing on market sentiment. Trump has indicated he is unconcerned about potential price increases, believing the tariffs will bolster domestic manufacturing. However, this stance has hit major automakers like Ford, General Motors, Stellantis, and Tesla, whose stocks are falling in premarket trading.

3. Economic Worries Grow as Goldman Sachs Issues Warning

Goldman Sachs has revised its economic forecast, increasing its U.S. recession probability from 20% to 35%. The firm projects core inflation to climb to 3.5% by the end of 2025, with GDP growth slowing to around 1%. Unemployment could rise to 4.5% under the strain of new tariffs. The report warns that the economic impact of these trade policies may be greater than anticipated.

4. Bitcoin Price Drop Impacts Crypto Stocks

Bitcoin’s value has dipped below $84,000, causing ripples across cryptocurrency-linked stocks. MicroStrategy, a major Bitcoin investor, is down 4% in premarket trading after a sharp 10% drop last week. Mining companies MARA Holdings and Riot Platforms, as well as Coinbase and Robinhood, are also seeing losses as the crypto market falters.

5. CoreWeave Struggles After Lackluster IPO

CoreWeave, a cloud computing firm supported by Nvidia, had a disappointing market debut. Priced at $40 per share, its stock has fallen by more than 4% in early trading. Nvidia, which owns a significant stake in CoreWeave, is also facing losses of around 4%. The subdued performance is raising concerns about investor confidence in AI and tech sector IPOs.

With markets on edge, all eyes are on Trump’s tariff announcement. Investors are also closely monitoring economic data and corporate earnings for further clarity. While uncertainty prevails, careful market analysis and a focus on long-term investment strategies will be essential for navigating the current environment.

Also Read: Trump Media Partners With Crypto.com for New ETFs, Shares Gain 9%

The firm was launched with a mission to create a decentralized financial platform, also known as DeFi. Unlike traditional finance, DeFi platforms allow users to interact directly without intermediaries. However, despite the company’s claims of decentralization, the Trump family now holds a 60% stake, giving them substantial influence over operations and finances.

How Did the Trump Family Gain Control?

Initially, World Liberty Financial was led by its co-founders, Zak Folkman and Chase Herro. However, in January, it was disclosed that the Trump family had taken over, holding the majority stake through a company called WLF Holdco LLC. This gave them a significant say in decision-making and a large share of the firm’s profits.

The family now claims 75% of net revenue from token sales and 60% of future operational earnings. These financial gains amount to an estimated $400 million from the fundraising efforts alone. Meanwhile, only 5% of the raised funds are expected to go toward developing the platform.

Governance Tokens and Limited Benefits for Investors

The company issued governance tokens called $WLFI, which offer holders voting rights on specific decisions related to the project. However, these tokens cannot be traded or sold. Unlike other DeFi tokens that allow profit-sharing, $WLFI tokens provide no financial rewards to holders.

Some industry experts have voiced concerns that the arrangement is unusually centralized for a DeFi project. In decentralized platforms, governance tokens typically offer more substantial financial incentives or decision-making power for investors. However, in World Liberty’s case, most control remains in the hands of the Trump family and a few insiders.

Ethical and Political Concerns

The Trump family’s involvement in World Liberty Financial has raised ethical questions, particularly given Donald Trump’s position as a prominent political figure. Critics argue that this situation could lead to conflicts of interest, especially as Trump has advocated for cryptocurrency deregulation. Others worry that anonymous buyers may use token purchases to gain political influence.

Reports suggest that around 70% of the money raised came from large investors who spent at least $100,000, with many transactions exceeding $1 million. While World Liberty tracks the identities of its buyers, the names of these high-value investors are not publicly disclosed.

Trump’s Support for Cryptocurrency

Donald Trump has publicly positioned himself as a strong supporter of cryptocurrency. He has even referred to himself as the “crypto president,” advocating for the mainstream adoption of digital currencies. The Trump family’s growing presence in the crypto space reflects this enthusiasm, with significant financial gains from both World Liberty and other crypto-related ventures.

Notable Investments and Partnerships

A notable investor in World Liberty Financial is Justin Sun, a prominent figure in the cryptocurrency world. He reportedly invested $30 million in the company shortly after Trump’s election victory, contributing to the rapid increase in fundraising. Sun’s investment has since grown significantly, further establishing his influence within the project.

World Liberty also announced plans to launch a stablecoin called USD1, which would be backed by U.S. Treasury assets. Additionally, the company has partnered with Ondo Finance, a firm specializing in tokenized financial products. These initiatives are part of the company’s effort to create a more accessible financial system.

Questions About Transparency and Development

Despite the large amounts of money raised, World Liberty Financial has yet to launch its platform. Cybersecurity audits have indicated that the project is still under development, with many features not yet operational. The firm employs a small development team, including engineers based in Romania, raising further concerns about its ability to meet its ambitious goals.

Transparency issues have also been highlighted, with critics pointing to the limited information available on the company’s financial structure and operations. The Trump family’s involvement adds another layer of complexity, as their control over the venture is seen as contradictory to the principles of decentralized finance.

Also Read: Trump’s Crypto Firm WLFI Launches Token Reserve to Support Bitcoin & Ethereum

Background of the Case

The controversy began in 2020 when the CFPB accused Townstone of engaging in discriminatory practices by discouraging Black applicants through derogatory comments about Chicago’s predominantly African American South Side. The remarks were made on the lender’s self-produced podcast and AM radio show, “The Townstone Financial Show.”

In one episode, Townstone’s CEO referred to the South Side’s weekends as “hoodlum weekend” and compared it to a “war zone,” while another host likened walking through the neighborhood at night to the thrill of skydiving. Additionally, the hosts disparaged predominantly Black suburbs and made racially insensitive comments about local grocery stores.

The CFPB alleged that these statements deterred minority applicants and constituted a modern form of redlining, violating the Equal Credit Opportunity Act (ECOA).

CFPB's Sudden Reversal

After securing a court-approved settlement and a $105,000 fine from Townstone, the CFPB now argues the investigation was flawed. The agency claims that Townstone’s First Amendment rights were infringed upon, and the case was built on misrepresented evidence.

In its motion to dismiss, the CFPB highlighted the lack of direct evidence showing Townstone's remarks discouraged actual loan applicants. It also noted that just 16 minutes of controversial audio from over 78 hours of recordings were used as the basis for the case.

Acting CFPB Director Russ Vought emphasized that the agency’s reversal was part of the Trump administration’s broader effort to curb what it calls the misuse of regulatory power under the guise of diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) initiatives.

Debate Over Free Speech and Discrimination

At the center of this legal battle is the balance between free speech rights and anti-discrimination laws. While companies have the right to express opinions, their speech can cross the line if it discourages potential customers from seeking services based on race or ethnicity.

Legal scholars are split. Some argue Townstone’s comments, though offensive, are constitutionally protected. Others say the statements directly discouraged minority applicants, making them a form of commercial speech subject to regulatory oversight. Courts often apply stricter standards when companies use free speech as a defense in cases of alleged discrimination.

This case has also sparked broader discussions about how regulators define and prosecute discriminatory lending practices. While clear-cut cases of redlining typically involve denying loans based on race, discouraging applicants through harmful rhetoric presents a more complex legal challenge.

Varied Responses from Experts and Advocates

The CFPB’s decision has triggered strong reactions. Sam Levine, a former Federal Trade Commission official, called the reversal unprecedented, noting the rarity of government agencies seeking to undo their own victories.

Consumer advocates like Lisa Gilbert from Public Citizen criticized the move, warning that it sets a dangerous precedent for companies to challenge past settlements. On the other hand, conservative groups welcomed the decision, asserting that it upholds free speech rights and corrects what they see as regulatory overreach.

Meanwhile, financial institutions are watching closely. Some legal experts believe the case may embolden companies to challenge previous rulings by arguing free speech protections were overlooked.

Impact on Lending Regulations

The Townstone case could significantly influence how future lending discrimination cases are prosecuted. Regulators may face greater scrutiny when attempting to prove companies have discouraged applicants through speech rather than through traditional discriminatory actions.

If the court agrees to overturn the settlement, it could also encourage financial institutions to challenge past rulings, leading to a wave of reopened cases. Conversely, a refusal to dismiss the settlement would reinforce the government’s authority to regulate harmful commercial speech under federal laws.

What Borrowers Should Know

For borrowers, particularly those in historically redlined communities, the outcome of this case will be closely watched. While the CFPB’s reversal may raise concerns about the agency’s commitment to fair lending, it also underscores the importance of vigilance in financial regulations.

Consumers should remain aware of their rights under the ECOA, which protects against lending discrimination. Advocacy groups and legal aid organizations are available to assist those who believe they have been unfairly denied loans or discouraged from applying.

Upcoming Court Decision

US District Judge Franklin Valderrama will decide whether to grant the CFPB’s request to dismiss the settlement. Regardless of the ruling, the case is expected to set a precedent for future enforcement actions, corporate accountability, and the ongoing debate over the limits of free speech in the financial sector.

Also Read: Trump's $1.5 Billion Vietnam Investment — What's Behind This Big Move?

Bitcoin’s Astonishing Growth

On January 1, 2015, Bitcoin was trading at $320.43. With a $1000 investment, you could have bought approximately 0.3122 Bitcoin. Fast forward to March 29, 2025, and with Bitcoin valued at $83,810.76, that small stake would now be worth around $260,159. That’s an astonishing return of over 26,000% — a windfall that dwarfs traditional market gains.

The 401(k) Comparison — Slow and Steady vs. High Risk, High Reward

If you had taken the safer route and invested that $1000 in a traditional 401(k), you’d be looking at far more modest returns. Assuming a typical annual return of 5-8%, that same investment might have grown to anywhere between $1630 and $2150 over the last decade. While that growth is respectable and stable, it pales in comparison to Bitcoin’s performance.

A 401(k) offers benefits like tax deferrals, employer matching, and a reliable long-term growth trajectory. It’s a cautious, time-tested path to retirement. On the other hand, Bitcoin’s volatility means investors could experience wild price swings. But for those willing to stomach the risk, the rewards have proven historic.

Was It a Risk Worth Taking?

In 2015, betting on Bitcoin was no sure thing. Skepticism was widespread, with concerns over regulatory challenges, cybersecurity risks, and its use in illicit transactions. Most financial advisors would have cautioned against pouring retirement funds into such a volatile and unpredictable asset.

Yet, those who held on through dramatic crashes and regulatory scrutiny saw their patience pay off. Now, financial advisors are taking a different tone. Many suggest allocating a small portion — typically 1-5% — of retirement portfolios to Bitcoin and other digital assets as a hedge against traditional market downturns. The argument is that Bitcoin’s performance has shown resilience, often outperforming traditional investments during economic uncertainty.

The Changing Conversation on Retirement Planning

Cryptocurrencies have undeniably shifted the financial landscape. Younger investors, who tend to be more tech-savvy and open to non-traditional investments, are increasingly adding digital assets to their portfolios. Platforms offering crypto IRAs and Bitcoin ETFs are making it easier to include Bitcoin in retirement planning.

While volatility remains a challenge, some financial experts believe that blockchain technology and decentralized finance will continue to disrupt conventional markets. This has led to growing support for Bitcoin as a legitimate, albeit high-risk, asset class.

Key Takeaways for Investors Considering Bitcoin

Bitcoin’s dramatic rise and growing acceptance provide valuable lessons for investors evaluating alternative options for their portfolios:

1. Calculated Risk Can Pay Off: Bitcoin’s massive returns came with considerable volatility. Investors who balanced the risks with traditional investments were better positioned to manage the ups and downs.

2. Diversification is Essential: A small allocation to Bitcoin can enhance overall portfolio performance without exposing all of your savings to unnecessary risk.

3. Long-Term Perspective Wins: Despite temporary crashes and fear-driven sell-offs, those who maintained their investments over the long run saw exponential gains.

4. Staying Informed Matters: Regulatory changes, technological advances, and market sentiment can have significant impacts on Bitcoin's value. Keeping up with developments is crucial.

The opportunity to see Bitcoin’s massive growth may feel like a missed chance, but it’s far from the only opportunity in the financial world. Emerging technologies like artificial intelligence, clean energy solutions, and blockchain advancements are gaining traction. Just as Bitcoin disrupted traditional finance, these innovations could shape the next wave of high-return investments.

While hindsight may be 20/20, the lesson remains clear — staying informed, diversifying, and being open to calculated risks can pave the way for future financial success. The next big opportunity could be right around the corner — will you be ready to seize it?

Also Read: Bitcoin in 5 Years: Where Could Its Price Go Next?

Legal Questions and Presidential Authority

Under a law passed last year, TikTok must undergo a "qualified divestiture," ensuring ByteDance owns no more than a 20% stake. However, the law gives the president significant authority to determine if that requirement is met, providing Trump with flexibility as he negotiates a resolution before the app faces a potential ban on April 5.

Legal scholars argue that the broad presidential discretion within the law makes it difficult for courts to overturn Trump's decision. "The success of legal challenges is unlikely due to standing issues," said Professor Nikolas Guggenberger from the University of Houston Law Center. The Supreme Court's previous decision upholding the law also adds weight to the administration's actions.

National Security Concerns and The Proposed Deal

Reports suggest that US-based investors in ByteDance may increase their stakes to acquire TikTok’s American operations. This restructuring could reduce Chinese ownership below the 20% limit. However, the deal’s effectiveness in protecting user data remains a point of contention.

A central aspect of the proposal involves Oracle, a major US technology firm, managing and safeguarding TikTok's data to prevent access by the Chinese government. Despite these assurances, lawmakers like Representative John Moolenaar insist that any agreement must fully eliminate Chinese influence. The Chinese Communist Party’s legal authority over ByteDance has heightened fears about potential misuse of American data.

US intelligence agencies have also warned that the app’s algorithm, which curates content for users, could be manipulated for influence operations. Critics argue that this leaves a window for foreign interference and data espionage, making full divestiture a preferable solution.

Challenges From Competitors

While public concern over privacy issues remains high, legal experts suggest that TikTok’s rivals, particularly Meta, may be the most viable challengers to the deal. Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg could argue that allowing TikTok to remain operational under a compromised deal gives the platform an unfair advantage. However, establishing harm in court would be difficult.

Professor Alan Rozenshtein from the University of Minnesota Law School stated, "It's challenging for competitors to prove that TikTok's presence actively harms their business in a way that courts would recognize."

Trump's Influence and Congressional Support

The situation also underscores Trump's considerable influence over Congress. With a Republican-controlled House and Senate, any legislative attempt to modify or overturn the law would face significant resistance. Trump's executive order, which delayed the enforcement of TikTok’s ban for 75 days, further reflects his control over the timeline of the deal. The president has hinted at extending the deadline if negotiations are still ongoing by April 5.

"Given Trump’s sway over Congress, any attempt to challenge his decisions through legislative means seems improbable," Guggenberger added.

Uncertainty Surrounds TikTok as Trump's Decision Nears

With the April 5 deadline fast approaching, all eyes are on whether the TikTok deal will pass scrutiny. While President Trump and his administration push for a resolution, concerns remain over whether the agreement will truly eliminate Chinese influence.

Lawmakers and national security experts are prepared to monitor the deal's implementation, assessing whether ByteDance’s reduced stake effectively shields American user data from foreign interference. Failure to meet these expectations could spark additional congressional action or legal challenges.

For millions of US TikTok users, the uncertainty adds to growing anxiety. Content creators, businesses relying on the platform for marketing, and advertisers are bracing for potential disruption. The outcome will not only influence TikTok’s operations but could also set a precedent for future regulation of foreign-owned technology platforms.

In the tech sector, rivals like Meta and YouTube are watching closely. A failure to enforce the divestiture could reignite criticism of unfair competition, while a strict enforcement could create new opportunities for domestic platforms to regain market share. Ultimately, the political, legal, and economic ramifications of Trump's TikTok decision will reverberate far beyond the app itself.

Also Read: Will Oracle Save TikTok? ByteDance Races to Beat U.S. Ban Deadline

Acting FDIC Chairman Travis Hill described this move as a necessary step to correct what he referred to as a flawed approach over the past three years. He indicated that further clarifications will be provided to ensure banks understand how to safely offer crypto products and services. While the FDIC no longer mandates advance approval, banks are still responsible for implementing strong risk management practices to protect consumers and maintain financial stability.

The decision follows a similar move by the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (OCC), which also eased restrictions on banks participating in cryptocurrency-related activities. This alignment between regulators is expected to promote innovation in the financial sector while ensuring appropriate oversight remains in place.

Industry analysts believe the updated policy will encourage more banks to explore cryptocurrency opportunities, potentially leading to the expansion of services like crypto custody, digital asset trading, and blockchain-based financial products. By reducing bureaucratic barriers, financial institutions may be more inclined to integrate digital assets into their offerings, providing consumers with greater access to cryptocurrency markets.

While the FDIC’s decision opens new possibilities for banks, it also places responsibility on them to operate within regulatory guidelines and proactively manage risks. As the crypto landscape continues to evolve, further regulatory adjustments may follow to address emerging challenges and ensure the safety of the financial system.

Also Read: Bitcoin in 5 Years: Where Could Its Price Go Next?

The Role of Bitcoin ETFs

The launch of spot Bitcoin exchange-traded funds (ETFs) has been a game changer for investors. ETFs like the iShares Bitcoin ETF Trust (NASDAQ: IBIT) offer an easier way to gain exposure to Bitcoin without navigating the complexities of cryptocurrency exchanges. With nearly $50 billion in assets within its first year, the popularity of ETFs highlights the growing mainstream acceptance of Bitcoin. If investor interest continues, these ETFs could drive substantial demand, contributing to Bitcoin’s price growth.

Supportive Government Policies

The Trump administration has shown a positive stance on cryptocurrency. Recent initiatives, such as the establishment of a crypto czar and plans for a strategic crypto reserve with Bitcoin as a key asset, indicate a willingness to integrate digital currencies into the U.S. financial system. If the government continues supporting cryptocurrency-friendly policies, Bitcoin’s market confidence and adoption could grow further.

Bitcoin as a Hedge Against Inflation

Economic uncertainty and inflation fears are driving more investors toward Bitcoin. With Trump’s proposed tariffs raising concerns about higher consumer prices, Bitcoin's fixed supply makes it an appealing hedge against inflation. Historically, during inflationary periods, assets like Bitcoin have seen price increases as investors seek alternatives to traditional currencies.

Risks and Economic Uncertainty

While Bitcoin has growth potential, it also faces significant risks. A recent survey of CFOs revealed that 75% expect a recession within the next year. Economic downturns tend to drive investors away from volatile assets like Bitcoin, which could lead to price declines. Additionally, while current regulations are relatively favorable, future regulatory shifts could negatively impact the cryptocurrency market.

What Could Bitcoin Be Worth by 2030?

Bitcoin’s past performance has been remarkable. Between 2014 and 2019, its value surged by over 1,700%, followed by an additional 1,100% gain from 2020 to today. While these returns are not guaranteed to continue, the increasing institutional adoption, policy support, and role as an inflation hedge suggest Bitcoin could remain a key player in global finance.

For cautious investors, allocating a small percentage (typically 5-10%) of a diversified portfolio to Bitcoin may be a prudent approach. While the road ahead may be volatile, Bitcoin’s resilience and increasing integration into traditional finance could shape a positive outlook over the next five years.

Also Read: BitcoinOS Plans to Make Bitcoin a Platform for Digital Property Ownership

Vietnam, known for its picturesque landscapes and rapidly growing middle class, has become an attractive destination for luxury investments. Industry analysts view the Trump Organization’s entry as a major endorsement of the country's hospitality potential.

$1.5 Billion Landmark Project Near Hanoi

The flagship $1.5 billion development will be situated near Hanoi, Vietnam's bustling capital. Plans include three world-class 18-hole golf courses alongside premium residential units. Expected to partially open by mid-2027, this initiative will become the Trump Organization’s most ambitious project in East Asia. The luxury golf resort is designed to cater to both international tourists and affluent Vietnamese residents.

Trade Tensions and Economic Strategy

Despite the looming threat of U.S. tariffs on Vietnamese goods, the Trump Organization’s commitment underscores confidence in the country’s economic resilience. Vietnam has been under scrutiny due to its significant trade surplus with the U.S. In response, Vietnamese officials have pledged to increase American imports, ease trade restrictions, and enhance cooperation with U.S. enterprises.

A notable example is Elon Musk’s Starlink, which recently gained regulatory approval to operate in Vietnam through a locally controlled subsidiary. This approach reflects Vietnam's efforts to strengthen business ties with American firms while navigating complex trade negotiations.

Expanding Beyond Hanoi

In addition to the Hanoi project, the Trump Organization is exploring other high-profile developments near Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam’s financial hub. Talks are reportedly underway, with an official announcement anticipated by the end of the year. Up to four projects are currently being evaluated, emphasizing the company’s long-term commitment to Vietnam’s market.

While the Trump Organization’s specific stake in the consortium remains undisclosed, Eric Trump, who now oversees the business, confirmed the company will actively manage and operate the luxury properties.

Boosting Vietnam's Golf Tourism

Vietnam has rapidly established itself as a golf tourism hotspot, with approximately 70 golf courses and over 100,000 local golfers. The country’s scenic landscapes and favorable climate make it an ideal golfing destination. Industry leaders expect the Trump Organization’s world-class facilities to attract wealthy tourists from across Asia, Europe, and North America.

Vietnam's government has also prioritized the development of sports tourism, recognizing its potential to generate significant economic benefits. The Trump Organization’s involvement is set to accelerate this trend.

Government Backing and Strategic Partnerships

During recent talks with Vietnamese Prime Minister Pham Minh Chinh, representatives from the Trump Organization discussed the long-term vision for the projects. The Vietnamese government’s support further reflects the nation’s enthusiasm for foreign investment, particularly in sectors that enhance tourism and infrastructure.

Vietnam's commitment to sustainable tourism and luxury development aligns with the Trump Organization’s strategy to create landmark properties. By partnering with a reputable local developer, the company also ensures compliance with Vietnam’s regulations and strengthens its foothold in the region.

A Strategic Bet on Vietnam's Growth

As Southeast Asia's economy continues to grow, Vietnam remains a leading destination for foreign investment. The Trump Organization’s projects will not only enhance the nation’s luxury hospitality offerings but also create thousands of jobs and drive local economic growth.

With its focus on high-end golf tourism, residential developments, and luxury accommodations, the Trump Organization is positioning itself at the center of Vietnam’s tourism boom. This move reinforces the company’s global expansion strategy while capitalizing on Vietnam’s promising economic trajectory.

Also Read: March 26 Social Security Payment: Are You One of the Millions Getting Paid This Week?

PMI has set a goal of capturing 10% of the U.S. tobacco and heated tobacco product volume by 2030. Following a successful pilot program, IQOS is now available to adult smokers in Austin. To promote the device, PMI will host demonstrations and guided trials at the Austin MotoGP Red Bull Grand Prix of the Americas.

Consumers can access IQOS through select mobile locations and designated "IQOS coaches." Online sales will begin later in April. However, the company has not disclosed pricing details yet.

While PMI had initially announced plans to launch IQOS in four cities across two states, Austin is the first confirmed location. The company is offering an older version of the device while awaiting approval for its latest model, ILUMA, from the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA).

The FDA has already authorized the sale of the older device, allowing PMI to market it as a reduced-exposure product compared to cigarettes. However, the company's applications have faced opposition from public health advocates, who accuse PMI of violating prior FDA regulations. PMI denies these claims and maintains compliance with regulatory requirements.

Also Read: Amazon’s New AI Tools Make Shopping and Health Advice Easier Than Ever!

"We're building a foundation for people to securely own digital and real-world assets without relying on centralized institutions," said Yago, the project’s founder.

Forming a Belief in Financial Independence

Yago’s belief in financial independence comes from his own experiences. Raised in South Africa in a family of Holocaust survivors, he saw the devastating effects of financial control. Some of his relatives were exiled, labeled as criminals for resisting the government. As a child, Yago even helped his family bypass strict financial restrictions by smuggling gold coins across borders.

"Controlling access to money means controlling people’s freedom," Yago explained. "Property rights are essential for protecting financial independence."

Solving Blockchain Efficiency Challenges

Bitcoin introduced a decentralized system for storing and transferring money, but its limitations became evident when Ethereum expanded blockchain use with smart contracts. While these contracts allow decentralized applications to run, they require every node to rerun each computation, leading to inefficiencies.

BitcoinOS solves this problem using zero-knowledge proofs (ZKPs), a technology that verifies computations without forcing every network participant to redo the work. This makes the network faster and more cost-effective.

"Rather than storing the entire process on the blockchain, we store proof that the process was completed correctly," Yago explained. "This makes Bitcoin capable of supporting large-scale decentralized applications."

Establishing Secure Property Ownership

Yago believes BitcoinOS can turn Bitcoin into a platform for verifying and securing property ownership. With BitcoinOS, digital records of real estate titles, company shares, and personal identities can be securely maintained on the blockchain.

"Imagine owning your home without needing government documentation or managing stock ownership without third-party intermediaries," he said. "That's the world we're working to create."

Shifting Towards Real-World Applications

Yago compares the current state of the crypto industry to a rebellious teenager. While the sector has pushed back against governments and financial institutions, he believes the next step will involve embracing stability, responsibility, and real-world applications.

"The industry is evolving," Yago said. "The days of experimentation are shifting towards maturity, leading to innovations that solve practical problems."

Ensuring Transparency in AI Systems

In addition to blockchain advancements, Yago is concerned about the growing influence of artificial intelligence. He warns that without proper oversight, AI systems could end up controlled by corporations, limiting individual autonomy.

"My son will grow up hearing AI voices that shape his decisions. The real issue is—who controls those voices?" Yago said. "BitcoinOS ensures transparency and accountability, giving people control over the technology that impacts their lives."

BitcoinOS Alpha Mainnet Launch

With BitcoinOS’s alpha mainnet set to launch soon, Yago believes this marks a major turning point for Bitcoin. By extending its capabilities beyond digital currency, Bitcoin could become a universal platform for tracking and verifying property rights.

"We're building the infrastructure for the digital age," Yago concluded. "Once people see how Bitcoin can secure their assets, the potential becomes limitless."

Also Read: BlackRock Introduces First Bitcoin Exchange-Traded Product in Europe

On Wednesday, the U.S. government imposed a 25% tariff on imported vehicles. This decision has caused concern across the global car industry, with manufacturers warning of higher prices for consumers and possible job losses in major car-producing countries.

However, Ferrari is not worried. Since it produces limited-edition, high-end cars for wealthy buyers, the company believes it can withstand the effects of the tariff without changing its financial goals. Luxury brands like Ferrari often have the advantage of pricing flexibility, meaning they can adjust their prices without losing customers.

Unlike mass-market carmakers, which rely heavily on volume sales, Ferrari focuses on exclusivity and premium pricing. This business model helps the company stay resilient even during economic challenges.

While the global auto industry faces uncertainty, Ferrari’s confidence in maintaining its financial targets highlights the strength of its brand and customer loyalty. Consumers, investors, and industry experts will continue to monitor how the tariffs impact the broader market in the coming months.

Also Read: U.S. Pressures India to Cut Car Tariffs as Tesla Eyes Market Entry

Gary Cohn, IBM vice chair and former director of the National Economic Council, voiced his support for eliminating wasteful spending. "There is waste, fraud, and abuse in the government, and addressing that has to be done," Cohn stated in a recent interview. Drawing on his experience as a top executive at Goldman Sachs and former chief economic adviser during the Trump administration, he emphasized the importance of streamlining operations.

"In every business I've worked in, I always analyzed where money was being wasted and identified areas to streamline operations," Cohn said. He expressed understanding of Musk's approach in spearheading aggressive cost-cutting initiatives through DOGE.

A Controversial Start

DOGE's formation with a $1 trillion government waste reduction target has faced both praise and criticism. The department’s rapid scrutiny of agencies resulted in layoffs and resignations, with some decisions later reversed. Cohn acknowledged the challenges of implementing drastic changes. "You can't take a scalpel on day one; you need a machete," he explained, suggesting that adjustments could follow once broader cuts are made.

Suggestions for Further Reform

Cohn proposed that DOGE investigate redundancies across government agencies. He specifically pointed to the financial services sector, where US banks often face oversight from up to 10 regulators, compared to just two in Europe and Asia.

"We may not need eight regulators when three or four would suffice," he said. Highlighting the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) and the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), Cohn questioned the overlap in their responsibilities. He also noted the presence of numerous consumer protection regulators performing similar functions.

Smarter Regulation, Not Elimination

While advocating for efficiency, Cohn clarified that he supports sensible regulation rather than dismantling agencies outright. He suggested a complete reassessment of the regulatory landscape. "If we were to start from scratch, how many financial services regulators would we really need?" he posed.

Cohn warned of the tendency for regulators to justify their existence by pursuing cases unnecessarily. "Once regulators are established, they often feel compelled to find problems," he said. Consolidating responsibilities could enhance effectiveness while reducing redundant oversight.

Perspectives like Cohn’s provide insights on balancing fiscal responsibility with the need for proper governance. Whether Musk's bold initiative succeeds remains to be seen, but the conversation around government efficiency is undoubtedly gaining momentum.

Also Read: Musk Faces Pressure to Prove He Can Lead Tesla While Managing DOGE Role

The widening price gap between US and London markets suggests a rush to ship copper to the US ahead of the possible tariffs. Traders are moving quickly to avoid the additional costs, further fueling the price surge.

“We’re optimistic on copper,” said Fernando Valle, energy analyst at Hedgeye Risk Management. “Like we saw with steel, tariffs can drive prices higher, and we expect a similar pattern here.”

Tariffs Sooner Than Expected

In February, the White House initiated a review of US reliance on copper imports. Industry analysts saw this as a step toward new tariffs. While Wall Street initially anticipated the duties to arrive between September and November, Bloomberg now reports the administration could implement them as soon as May.

“If tariffs are announced next month, we’re likely to see copper shipments surge before the new rules take effect,” Goldman Sachs analyst Eoin Dinsmore said in a note to clients. Copper prices have already jumped nearly 30% since the beginning of the year, reflecting the growing uncertainty.

Global Demand Fuels the Rally

The tariffs are not the only reason for copper’s rapid rise. China’s efforts to stimulate its economy and increased defense spending in Europe are also driving demand. Copper is a key component in everything from construction and transportation to power grids and military equipment.

“China remains the largest buyer of copper, and its infrastructure projects are a major factor behind the price surge,” Valle said. “We’re also seeing strong demand from Europe, especially with countries ramping up defense production.”

Tech companies are another major force. The growth of artificial intelligence and data centers has pushed copper demand even higher, as large-scale infrastructure projects require massive amounts of the metal.

Concerns Over a Trade War

Despite the current optimism, some market analysts warn of risks ahead. A trade war could dampen global economic growth, reducing demand for copper. Heightened uncertainty could also lead to market volatility.

“If trade tensions escalate, it could weigh on the broader economy and reduce copper consumption,” said Nikos Tzabouras, a market analyst at Tradu.com. “Add to that the growing fears of a US recession, and we could see downward pressure on prices.”

Traders and investors are keeping a close watch on the White House's next steps. With uncertainty lingering, copper prices are likely to remain volatile in the near term.

Also Read: Copper Demand for Electric Vehicles Stays Strong Despite Slower EV Sales

According to a blog post from the regional Fed bank, more than nine million borrowers are expected to see notable drops in their credit standing by the first quarter of 2025. While the extent of the decline remains uncertain, economists note that individuals with higher credit scores are at greater risk of substantial losses.

“If prime and super-prime borrowers fall behind on student loan payments, the overall drop in credit standing could be much more severe,” the report explained. This could lead to lower credit limits, higher interest rates for new loans, and reduced access to credit across the board.

The situation is further complicated by growing uncertainty in the broader economy, partly attributed to recent policy shifts. Government-backed forbearance programs had provided relief to student loan borrowers during the COVID-19 pandemic, preventing delinquencies and stabilizing credit scores. Additionally, the Biden administration made efforts to implement student loan forgiveness programs, though many of these attempts were blocked in court.

Now, with payments resuming, pre-pandemic financial struggles are resurfacing. Before the pandemic, the New York Fed estimated that the effective student loan delinquency rate peaked at 14.8% in the second quarter of 2018, remaining near 14% throughout 2019. After repayment requirements resumed, the Fed’s shadow estimate placed the delinquency rate at 15.6% in the fourth quarter of last year, with 9.7 million borrowers holding a combined $250 billion in troubled debt.

In its February report, the New York Fed highlighted that total student loan debt stood at $1.62 trillion by the end of 2023, compared to $18.04 trillion in total household borrowing.

Financial Strain on Borrowers

With loan repayments resuming, many borrowers may face difficulty managing their monthly budgets. Rising interest rates and inflation have already increased the cost of living, making it harder for households to meet their financial obligations. Missed payments can quickly damage credit scores, limiting access to future loans and pushing borrowers into deeper financial hardship.

Borrowers can mitigate some of these challenges by considering options like income-driven repayment plans, which adjust monthly payments based on income and family size. Federal programs like Public Service Loan Forgiveness (PSLF) may also offer debt relief for eligible borrowers working in public service. Additionally, temporary forbearance or deferment options are available for those experiencing financial distress.

Potential Ripple Effects on the Economy

A surge in student loan delinquencies could have wide-ranging effects on the economy. Reduced consumer spending is a likely consequence, as borrowers prioritize loan payments over discretionary expenses. This could slow growth in sectors like housing, automotive, and retail. Financial institutions may also impose stricter lending standards, reducing access to credit for a broader range of consumers.

Communities with younger populations or significant concentrations of student loan borrowers could face heightened economic instability. Local businesses may suffer from reduced consumer spending, while municipalities may see declines in tax revenues.

What Lawmakers and Regulators Might Do Next

The Federal Reserve and lawmakers are closely monitoring the worsening student loan landscape. Many anticipate stronger demands for policy intervention, especially to support struggling borrowers. Possible actions could include adjustments to repayment plans, expanded forgiveness program eligibility, or direct financial assistance for those most affected.

For borrowers, the current situation calls for proactive measures. Staying informed about available repayment options, monitoring payment deadlines, and seeking financial advice can prevent further credit damage. Federal resources and counseling services are also available for those experiencing financial strain.

Further updates from the Fed and financial institutions are expected to provide greater clarity on the evolving challenges facing student loan borrowers and the broader economic implications.

Also Read: Tax Implications for Borrowers After Federal Student Loan Forgiveness

Following the first roundtable on March 21, which aimed to bring clarity to digital asset regulations, the SEC plans to continue fostering dialogue with industry experts. The goal is to create clearer guidelines for the sector and ensure a fair and transparent regulatory environment.

The first in the upcoming series is set for April 11, concentrating on the challenges of regulating crypto trading platforms. Next, on April 25, the focus will shift to the complexities of crypto custody, ensuring that digital assets are safely stored. On May 12, tokenization and how traditional assets can move on blockchain networks will take center stage. The series will conclude on June 6 with a session dedicated to DeFi, discussing the risks and opportunities of decentralized financial platforms.

These roundtables are led by SEC Commissioner Hester Peirce, who heads the agency’s Crypto Task Force. She has emphasized the need for practical conversations between regulators and market participants to develop sensible regulations that address both innovation and investor protection.

While detailed agendas and participant lists are yet to be announced, the SEC has confirmed that the roundtables will be accessible to the public both online and at its headquarters in Washington, D.C.

The Crypto Task Force was formed on January 21 under acting SEC Chair Mark Uyeda to create a clearer and more adaptive regulatory framework for the crypto sector. This signals a shift from the strict enforcement-driven approach taken under former SEC Chair Gary Gensler.

Chair Uyeda has also indicated that the SEC is reconsidering several enforcement actions against crypto firms initiated during Gensler’s tenure. Additionally, Uyeda suggested withdrawing a proposed rule that would have imposed tougher custody standards on investment advisers working with crypto assets. He has also called for a reassessment of regulations that would have expanded oversight of alternative trading systems, including those involving crypto.

In addition to its crypto initiatives, the SEC will hold a roundtable on March 27 to explore the role of artificial intelligence in financial markets. This session will discuss how AI is used in finance, its potential risks, and how to ensure responsible use of the technology.

These upcoming discussions reflect the SEC’s commitment to refining its approach to crypto regulation by engaging directly with stakeholders. For investors, crypto companies, and enthusiasts, these roundtables offer valuable insight into how the regulatory landscape may evolve in the coming months. Stay tuned for updates as the SEC navigates the complexities of the crypto industry.

Also Read: SEC Launches Crypto Roundtables to Discuss Regulation Changes

The Interests tool allows users to describe what they’re looking for using natural language, like asking for “kitchen gadgets for coffee lovers” or “home workout essentials.” The AI then sifts through thousands of products to suggest personalized options, making the search process effortless. Currently available to select U.S. customers, Amazon plans to expand the feature soon, providing even more users with a tailored shopping experience.

But that’s not all — reports reveal that Amazon is also testing Health AI, a chatbot designed to offer medical insights and product recommendations. Whether you’re dealing with a cold or curious about which vitamins suit your lifestyle, the chatbot could offer general care advice and suggest Amazon products to address your needs. While it’s no replacement for professional medical advice, it could serve as a quick, convenient resource for minor concerns. This move follows Amazon’s increasing presence in the healthcare industry, including its acquisition of One Medical and the launch of Amazon Pharmacy.

These AI advancements are not only about improving customer experience but also enhancing Amazon's competitive edge in the e-commerce and healthcare sectors. Leveraging massive datasets and large language models, Amazon’s AI ecosystem is designed to anticipate consumer needs, making interactions more intuitive and efficient. This strategy could cement Amazon’s position as a leader in both digital retail and healthcare services.

While Amazon hasn’t officially commented on the ongoing Health AI trials, industry analysts are watching closely. With AI becoming a significant driver of growth, these innovations could further strengthen Amazon’s market position. The company's stock has already seen a 14% increase over the past year, and successful AI rollouts could push it even higher.

For now, customers can look forward to a smarter shopping experience with Interests and possibly a helpful virtual health assistant soon. Whether you're searching for the perfect product or need quick health guidance, Amazon’s AI is set to make your life easier. Keep an eye out — the future of AI-powered convenience might already be in your hands.

Also Read: Google Wallet Rolls Out In-Store Payments for Kids in Select Countries

Focus on American Industry and Digital Assets

The ETFs will include Bitcoin, Cronos, and other cryptocurrencies, alongside stocks of companies that emphasize American innovation, energy production, and manufacturing. The goal is to offer an investment vehicle that supports U.S.-based enterprises while capitalizing on the growing interest in digital finance.

The funds will be available through Foris Capital US LLC, Crypto.com’s registered broker-dealer. According to Trump Media CEO Devin Nunes, the collaboration reflects the company’s goal of backing businesses that contribute to the country’s economic growth. "Our goal is to create financial products that champion American values and support the nation’s industrial growth," said Nunes.

Stock Performance and Market Response

Despite Tuesday’s gains, Trump Media’s stock remains down about 33% for the year. Investors have shown cautious optimism, with some analysts suggesting that the company’s volatile stock performance and uncertain regulatory environment could impact the success of its new financial products.

However, the move into ETFs could mark a strategic turning point for Trump Media. By venturing into the financial services sector, the company hopes to diversify its revenue streams and reduce reliance on its social media platform, Truth Social.

Crypto.com’s Expanding Footprint

For Crypto.com, the partnership represents another opportunity to expand its footprint in the U.S. financial sector. Known primarily as a crypto exchange, Crypto.com has been increasingly positioning itself as a comprehensive financial platform. Partnering with a high-profile company like Trump Media could help bolster its credibility and attract new users.

The platform has faced regulatory scrutiny in the past, but working alongside a company with political ties might lend additional legitimacy as it pursues compliance within the U.S. market.

What to Expect from the Partnership

Trump Media and Crypto.com plan to launch the ETFs later this year, focusing on providing investors with diversified exposure to both digital assets and American-made securities. The companies aim to fill a growing demand for innovative financial products that emphasize domestic industry support.

While the specifics of the ETF portfolios are yet to be disclosed, the emphasis on cryptocurrencies like Bitcoin and Cronos alongside stocks of companies driving American innovation is expected to attract a range of investors. The move also positions Trump Media to expand its presence in the financial services sector beyond its existing digital platforms.

As regulatory scrutiny remains a factor in the cryptocurrency space, both companies will need to ensure compliance with U.S. laws. The collaboration with Foris Capital US LLC as a licensed broker-dealer is seen as a step toward ensuring transparency and regulatory alignment.

This strategic initiative could also enhance Crypto.com's standing in the American financial market, further establishing its role as a key player in digital finance. For Trump Media, the expansion into ETFs marks a significant diversification effort, reducing its reliance on social media revenue and creating new opportunities in the financial sector.

With the anticipated launch later this year, investors and analysts will closely watch how the partnership navigates regulatory challenges and market reactions. The success of these ETFs could play a critical role in defining Trump Media's growth trajectory and its long-term presence in the investment world.

Also Read: This Tech Stock Is Outpacing Bitcoin—And Could Have Even More Potential

Leadership Changes at TikTok

Chandlee, who brought extensive experience from his previous role at Facebook, will transition into an advisory role. During his tenure at TikTok, he oversaw rapid growth in the company’s advertising arm, contributing to its position as a dominant player in the digital ad space. Under his leadership, TikTok achieved some of the fastest global ad sales growth, second only to its Chinese counterpart, Douyin.

To streamline operations, TikTok is merging its global business solutions team with its monetization product technology team. Will Liu, currently leading the monetization team, will assume leadership of the combined division starting April 1. The goal is to enhance innovation and operational efficiency, ensuring the platform remains competitive despite the uncertainty surrounding its future in the US.

TikTok’s Advertising Goals and Market Growth

TikTok remains determined to expand its advertising revenue. Chandlee indicated that the platform is targeting a 50% growth in ad sales in 2025. TikTok’s influence on younger audiences has made it an attractive option for advertisers seeking to reach Gen Z and Millennial consumers. Brands continue to prioritize TikTok for its high engagement rates and viral marketing potential.

The company has also introduced new tools to enhance the effectiveness of ad campaigns, including AI-powered insights and expanded e-commerce integrations. These innovations are expected to drive further revenue growth, reinforcing TikTok’s position as a leading platform for digital advertising.

Leadership Shakeup Raises Questions

Chandlee’s departure follows a series of high-profile executive exits, including TikTok’s music chief Ole Obermann and several senior leaders. Since the beginning of 2025, at least eight executives have stepped down, adding to the uncertainty surrounding the company's future. While TikTok has maintained that these departures are part of natural leadership transitions, they have raised concerns about stability as the platform navigates its regulatory challenges.

Political and Regulatory Pressure

TikTok is currently facing a strict April 5 deadline to arrange a sale of its US operations. President Donald Trump has temporarily delayed enforcing a ban, but the administration remains firm on requiring TikTok’s separation from its Chinese parent company, ByteDance, to address national security concerns.

Oracle Corp. has emerged as a key contender in discussions, proposing a plan to take a minority stake in a new US entity while ByteDance retains control of the algorithm. This arrangement aims to ensure the security of US user data while allowing TikTok to continue operating. However, it remains unclear whether this proposal will satisfy regulatory authorities.

Uncertainty Surrounds TikTok’s Future

The outcome of the sale will significantly impact TikTok’s trajectory in the US, one of its most lucrative markets. Industry experts suggest that while TikTok has built a strong advertising presence, ongoing uncertainty could affect partnerships and ad spending. Advertisers may grow cautious without clear assurances of the platform’s long-term availability.

Nevertheless, TikTok is pushing ahead with product innovation and international expansion. With a dedicated user base and continuous updates to its advertising capabilities, the platform is well-positioned to remain competitive, provided it successfully addresses regulatory challenges.

For now, all eyes are on the coming weeks as TikTok’s leadership works to finalize a deal and ensure the platform’s continued presence in the US market.

Also Read: Will Oracle Save TikTok? ByteDance Races to Beat U.S. Ban Deadline

Lack of Conflict of Interest Waiver Raises Questions

Unlike other government advisers who have received formal conflict of interest waivers, there is no public record indicating Musk has pursued or been granted one. A waiver would detail the steps Musk is taking to mitigate conflicts and ensure his government role is not used to benefit his businesses. White House press secretary Karoline Leavitt has insisted that Musk is complying with all federal ethics laws and has committed to avoiding any conflicts.

However, ethics experts emphasize that a clear waiver would provide reassurance to the public. "A conflict of interest waiver provides transparency and accountability," said Walter Shaub, former director of the U.S. Office of Government Ethics. "Without it, the public has no way to gauge whether Musk's government influence is serving the public good or his corporate interests."

Business Entanglements and Federal Contracts

Musk’s companies have longstanding ties to the federal government. SpaceX has secured billions in government contracts for space missions and satellite launches. Starlink, his satellite internet service, is increasingly used in both military and civilian capacities. Additionally, Tesla has benefited from billions in government subsidies and tax credits to support electric vehicle production and renewable energy projects.

These financial ties have fueled concerns about Musk’s ability to remain impartial in his government role. Further complicating matters is Musk’s reliance on China for Tesla’s manufacturing and market share. Given rising geopolitical tensions, his involvement in sensitive government discussions could pose national security risks.

Reports indicate Musk attended a Pentagon briefing where China was a key topic of discussion. While President Trump dismissed concerns about Musk's access to sensitive information, calling him a "great patriot," critics argue that Musk's economic interests could still create potential vulnerabilities.

Government Advisers and Ethical Standards

Government advisers like Musk are brought into government roles for their expertise without relinquishing their private-sector positions. While this approach can inject valuable knowledge into policymaking, it also poses ethical risks. Federal law prohibits advisers from participating in matters where they have a direct financial interest, unless a waiver is granted.

In contrast to Musk’s opaque situation, David Sacks, an AI and cryptocurrency adviser in the Trump administration, received a conflict of interest waiver. The 11-page document, publicly disclosed through the White House’s transparency portal, outlines the limitations placed on Sacks and the steps he took to divest certain assets.

"Sacks' waiver is a clear example of how the system should work," said Virginia Canter, chief ethics counsel at Citizens for Responsibility and Ethics in Washington. "It offers the public insight into how conflicts are managed. The lack of a similar waiver for Musk leaves the administration vulnerable to accusations of favoritism and lack of accountability."

Calls for Greater Transparency

Transparency advocates are calling on the White House to disclose any existing waivers or provide clarity on Musk's ethical commitments. They argue that maintaining public trust in government decision-making requires accountability, especially when influential figures like Musk hold key advisory roles.

Lawmakers have also voiced concerns. Democratic Senator Elizabeth Warren has previously criticized Musk’s financial entanglements and called for stricter oversight of private-sector leaders in government roles. "Public service is about serving the people, not personal interests," Warren said in a recent statement. "The American people deserve transparency."

Critics argue that without visible oversight, the risk of blurred lines between Musk’s government role and his business interests could persist. Lawmakers and ethics experts are pushing for the White House to establish clear guidelines to ensure Musk's advisory position remains free from undue influence. The demand for transparency is growing, with calls for regular disclosures of his involvement in policy discussions and detailed reports on any interactions tied to his business ventures.

Amid increasing public concern, the White House faces mounting pressure to demonstrate that Musk's contributions are in the public’s interest rather than serving private financial gains. Whether the administration chooses greater transparency or maintains its current course will significantly shape public confidence in its commitment to ethical governance.

Also Read: Musk Faces Pressure to Prove He Can Lead Tesla While Managing DOGE Role

Named the 'iShares Bitcoin ETP,' the new product is domiciled in Switzerland and will be available for trading in major European financial hubs, including Paris, Amsterdam, and Frankfurt. The launch reflects the increasing demand for cryptocurrency investment options in the region.

With growing interest in digital assets, this offering provides European investors with a regulated and transparent way to gain exposure to bitcoin without the complexities of directly managing the cryptocurrency. By listing in multiple key markets, BlackRock is making digital currency investment more accessible to institutional and retail investors alike.

BlackRock has collaborated with Coinbase to serve as the custodian for the ETP, ensuring secure storage of the digital assets. Additionally, Bank of New York Mellon will act as the administrator, providing trusted financial management services. These partnerships reinforce confidence in the product’s security and operational stability.

In the U.S., BlackRock was among the first asset managers to introduce bitcoin exchange-traded products after receiving regulatory approval from the Securities and Exchange Commission in January 2024. The company's expansion into the European market marks another significant milestone in its efforts to meet growing investor interest in digital currencies.

Industry experts see this move as a clear indicator of the increasing mainstream acceptance of cryptocurrencies. With financial giants like BlackRock stepping further into the sector, it underscores the long-term confidence in digital assets as a part of diversified investment portfolios.

For European investors seeking regulated exposure to bitcoin's price movements, the iShares Bitcoin ETP presents a compelling opportunity. This latest product from BlackRock reflects its commitment to offering practical investment solutions that respond to the growing demand for digital asset access.

Also Read: Rich Dad Poor Dad's Robert Kiyosaki Says Bitcoin Could Help End Poverty — Here's Why

If this deal goes through, it would mark a significant stride toward making cryptocurrency payments as accessible and straightforward as traditional card payments.

Visa and World Network Discuss Stablecoin Payment Integration

The reported discussions between Visa and World Network could lead to a seamless integration of stablecoin transactions into mainstream payment systems. Stablecoins, pegged to fiat currencies like the US dollar, provide a practical means of conducting digital transactions without the volatility of traditional cryptocurrencies.

Visa’s extensive merchant network offers a scalable path for stablecoin adoption. For World Network users, this partnership could mean making everyday purchases using stablecoins at millions of locations globally.

Sam Altman Backs Stablecoin Payments

Sam Altman, co-founder of World Network and CEO of OpenAI, supports using technology to promote financial inclusion. Through World Network, Altman aims to provide people with accessible digital financial services, particularly in regions underserved by traditional banks.

A collaboration with Visa would further this goal by making stablecoin payments a practical solution for users in emerging markets, where stablecoins can provide more stability than volatile local currencies.

World ID's Role in Secure Crypto Transactions

World Network’s key offering, World ID, is a biometric digital identity system designed to verify users as real humans. Integrating World ID with the stablecoin wallet would ensure secure, verified transactions while minimizing the risk of fraud and identity theft.

For businesses, this system offers added security by confirming the authenticity of transactions. For consumers, it provides confidence in the safety of their digital payments.

Visa and World Network's Crypto Payment Plans

While the deal is not yet confirmed, the prospect of Visa collaborating with World Network highlights growing acceptance of cryptocurrency within traditional finance. Stablecoins, seen as a bridge between digital assets and fiat currency, are increasingly positioned as practical alternatives for everyday payments.

With Visa’s infrastructure and World Network’s technological capabilities, this partnership could accelerate the shift toward widespread cryptocurrency payment options.

Stablecoins and the Future of Payment Solutions

Neither Visa nor Tools for Humanity, the company behind World Network, have commented on the ongoing discussions. However, industry experts suggest that if the agreement moves forward, it could serve as a model for future partnerships between blockchain companies and financial institutions.

Stablecoins are gaining ground as a reliable payment method, providing a digital alternative that sidesteps the volatility of other cryptocurrencies. World Network’s collaboration with Visa, if successful, could significantly influence how people transact digitally. It would demonstrate the practical use of stablecoins beyond speculation, showcasing their real-world benefits. Even without a confirmed agreement, the ongoing discussions reflect Visa’s acknowledgment of blockchain technology’s growing role in reshaping financial systems. This potential shift could pave the way for further innovation and greater accessibility in global payments.

Also Read: Stablecoin Market Surpasses $205 Billion and Gears Up for Mainstream Adoption

WHY POOR PEOPLE remain POOR.

Most of us have heard of FOMO: Fear Of Missing Out.

Yet…the main reason poor people remain poor is due to FOMM: Fear of Making Mistakes.

The biggest opportunity in history is here…BITCOIN has made easy for everyone become rich…..Yet most…

— Robert Kiyosaki (@theRealKiyosaki) March 24, 2025

Fear of Mistakes Keeps People Poor

“Most people remain poor because of FOMM,” Kiyosaki shared. “They’re afraid of making mistakes, so they avoid opportunities like Bitcoin. But the biggest chance for financial freedom is right in front of us.”

Kiyosaki believes that Bitcoin offers a level playing field for people worldwide, providing access to wealth-building opportunities without relying on traditional financial systems. Unlike conventional investments, Bitcoin operates on a decentralized network, free from institutional control.

Financial Education Beyond the Classroom

The financial guru also highlighted the importance of seeking knowledge beyond traditional education. He emphasized that financial literacy doesn’t require a prestigious degree, suggesting that people can educate themselves using free resources available online.

“The best financial education today is on YouTube,” he said, encouraging his followers to learn from thought leaders in the cryptocurrency space. Kiyosaki recommended experts like Michael Saylor, Jeff Booth, and Max Keiser as reliable sources of insight on Bitcoin’s potential.

Bitcoin as Protection Against Economic Collapse

Kiyosaki’s support for Bitcoin is not new. He has frequently warned about the dangers of government-backed fiat currency, inflation, and mounting national debt. Calling Bitcoin “the lifeboat,” he views it as protection against economic instability.

Earlier this month, Kiyosaki cautioned about a possible market crash, advising investors to seek financial security through Bitcoin, gold, and silver. He believes that assets like Bitcoin provide stability from the volatility of traditional financial markets.

Bitcoin's Recent Surge

At the time of writing, Bitcoin is trading at $87,535.59, with a trading volume of $23.2 billion in the past 24 hours, reflecting a 130.07% increase. The cryptocurrency's recent growth has fueled discussions about its role as a long-term store of value.

While skeptics remain cautious about Bitcoin’s volatility, Kiyosaki remains firm in his belief that the digital asset presents a historic opportunity for wealth creation.

Taking Risks for Financial Freedom

Kiyosaki’s core message is clear: overcoming fear is essential for achieving financial success. He encourages people to view mistakes as valuable learning experiences instead of obstacles. For him, Bitcoin represents a practical path to escape financial hardship.

“You won’t get rich by playing it safe,” he said. “And you won’t escape poverty by standing still. Courage leads to wealth, and Bitcoin is the opportunity waiting for those ready to take it.”

Whether Bitcoin will truly become a solution for global poverty remains to be seen. However, Kiyosaki’s call for financial empowerment through knowledge and bold decision-making continues to inspire people to rethink their approach to money and investments.

Also Read: Trump Is Building a Crypto Reserve With 5 Coins — Should You Invest Too?

Meta has been aggressively investing in artificial intelligence infrastructure to compete with leading tech firms like OpenAI, Google, and emerging players such as China's DeepSeek. CEO Mark Zuckerberg recently outlined plans to allocate up to $65 billion this year for AI-related projects, including data center expansions and workforce growth. Furthermore, Zuckerberg signaled that Meta could eventually spend hundreds of billions on AI infrastructure. The company has also been working on proprietary AI chips to enhance its platform’s ad recommendation and content ranking capabilities.

FuriosaAI has emerged as one of the notable AI semiconductor innovators in Asia, drawing interest from global technology companies. Founded eight years ago and led by CEO June Paik, a former executive at Samsung Electronics and Advanced Micro Devices, the company specializes in AI inferencing chips. Its latest product, the second-generation RNGD (pronounced "Renegade") processor, is designed to compete with products from Nvidia Corp. and other startups like Groq Inc., SambaNova Systems Inc., and Cerebras Systems Inc.

Choosing independence over acquisition, FuriosaAI plans to raise additional funds in a Series C extension round that is expected to surpass its initial target. The company is also considering an initial public offering (IPO) as part of its long-term growth strategy.

With approximately 150 employees, including a Silicon Valley presence, FuriosaAI has begun distributing chip samples to potential clients. Among its initial customers are LG AI Research, part of the LG Group, and Saudi Aramco. The company anticipates expanding its customer base, with a dozen firms currently testing its chips.

Manufactured using Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co.'s 5-nanometer process, the RNGD chip also utilizes HBM3 memory from SK Hynix Inc. With its continued focus on technological advancements, FuriosaAI remains committed to driving innovation and establishing a competitive presence in the global AI semiconductor market.

Also Read: DeepSeek Projects 545% AI Profit—Is It Realistic or Just Hype?

Here’s a clear guide to help you resolve the issue and prevent further disruptions.

Common Reasons Why Social Security Benefits Are Suspended

Understanding why your benefits stopped is the first step toward regaining them. The Social Security Administration (SSA) may suspend payments for various reasons, including:

• Exceeding Earnings Limits: If you are receiving benefits before reaching your Full Retirement Age (FRA) and earn more than the SSA’s annual limit, your benefits may be temporarily withheld. After reaching FRA, earnings no longer affect your benefits.

• Unfiled or Incorrect Tax Returns: Not filing your taxes on time or reporting incorrect information can lead to payment issues. Make sure your tax obligations are up to date.

• Living Abroad in Restricted Countries: Some countries prohibit Social Security payments. If you relocate to one, your payments will stop. Moving back to a permitted country can resolve this.

• Legal or Incarceration Status: Benefits are paused during incarceration or certain legal proceedings. Once released, you can request your payments to resume.

• Providing False Information: Submitting inaccurate information can lead to payment suspension. Correcting errors and submitting evidence can reinstate your payments.

• Lack of Response to SSA Requests: If the SSA requests additional documents and you fail to respond, your payments may be stopped. Providing the necessary information promptly can prevent this.

• Incorrect Death Reports: Clerical errors can lead to false reports of a beneficiary’s death. Visiting an SSA office with proof of identity can rectify this.

Steps to Recover Your Social Security Benefits

If your payments have been suspended, follow these practical steps to get them reinstated:

1. Contact the SSA Directly: Call the SSA at 1-800-772-1213, visit your nearest SSA office, or log into your My Social Security account to check the status of your benefits.

2. Understand the Reason for Suspension: Request a clear explanation from the SSA about why your payments were stopped.

3. Provide the Necessary Documents: Gather and submit any requested documents such as identification, tax forms, employment records, or proof of address.

4. Resolve Earnings Issues: If the issue is related to excess earnings, confirm if your income now falls within the limit or wait until you reach FRA when the earnings limit no longer applies.

5. Correct Tax-Related Problems: Resolve any tax issues by filing the correct documents and informing the SSA once resolved.

6. File an Appeal If Necessary: If you disagree with the SSA’s decision, you have 60 days to file an appeal. Provide supporting documentation to strengthen your case.

7. Request Retroactive Payments: In some cases, you may be eligible for back payments for the period your benefits were suspended.

Preventing Future Benefit Suspensions

Once your benefits are reinstated, consider these tips to prevent further disruptions:

• Track Your Earnings: If you’re below FRA, monitor your income to ensure it stays within SSA’s limits.

• File Taxes On Time: Ensure all tax filings are completed accurately and promptly to avoid interruptions.

• Keep SSA Updated: Report any changes in your income, address, or marital status to the SSA immediately.

• Respond to SSA Requests: Provide any requested information quickly to avoid unnecessary delays.

Where to Get Additional Support

If you encounter challenges while trying to reinstate your Social Security benefits, you can seek assistance from the following sources:

• Social Security Representatives: SSA staff can provide personalized guidance and help you through the process.

• Financial Advisors: An advisor with experience in Social Security can offer advice tailored to your financial situation.

• Legal Professionals: If your case involves legal complications, a lawyer specializing in Social Security benefits can represent your interests.

For more information or assistance, visit the official SSA website or call 1-800-772-1213.

Taking action quickly and understanding your options can help you restore your Social Security benefits and maintain your financial stability.

Also Read: March 26 Social Security Payment: Are You One of the Millions Getting Paid This Week?

The Social Security Administration (SSA) follows a structured payment schedule, primarily determined by your birthdate. Using Direct Deposit remains the fastest and most reliable option for receiving your funds.

Eligibility for the March 26 Social Security Payment

If your birthday falls between the 21st and 31st of any month and you started receiving Social Security benefits after May 1997, your payment is set to arrive on March 26. For those with Direct Deposit enabled, the funds should be available in your account by that date. If you’re receiving a paper check, allow up to three additional business days for delivery.

Understanding Payment Groups

The SSA divides payments into four groups to ensure a smooth distribution process:

• Group 1: Birthdays from the 1st to 10th (Payment sent on the second Wednesday of the month)

• Group 2: Birthdays from the 11th to 20th (Payment sent on the third Wednesday)

• Group 3: Birthdays from the 21st to 31st (Payment sent on the fourth Wednesday)

• Group 4: Those who started receiving benefits before May 1997 (Paid on the 3rd of each month)

Understanding which group you belong to can help you plan your monthly budget more effectively.

Benefits of Using Direct Deposit

Direct Deposit offers several advantages over traditional checks:

• Faster Payments: Funds are available immediately on the payment date.

• Increased Security: Eliminates the risk of lost or stolen checks.

• Convenience: No need to visit the bank to cash your check.

Setting up Direct Deposit is straightforward. Follow these steps to get started:

1. Visit ssa.gov.

2. Log into your My Social Security account.

3. Select the Direct Deposit option.

4. Provide your bank account information.

5. Confirm your changes.

Once set up, all future payments will be deposited directly into your account.

Steps to Take if Your Payment Is Delayed

If your payment doesn’t arrive as expected, consider the following steps:

• Check Your Account: Confirm that the deposit has not been made.

• Wait a Few Days: Payments via paper check may take additional time.

• Contact the SSA: Call 1-800-772-1213 for assistance if your payment hasn’t arrived after three business days.